Home

Siemens Simatic M7-400 User's Manual

1. AAR 465 mm 240 mm 482 5 mm 257 5 mm II l S Figure 2 6 ER1 Rack with 18 Slots and ER2 Rack with 9 Slots Technical Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 Racks Dimensions WxHxD inmm W x H x D in mm 482 5 x 290 x 27 5 257 5 x 290 x 27 5 baene T
2. 290 mm 190 mm Of I 465 mm 482 5 mm Figure 2 3 Rack Dimensions S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 5 Racks Ax Caution Danger of damage to equipment If you insert a power supply module in a slot that is not permitted for power supply modules the module may be damaged Slots 1 to 4 are permitted whereby power supply modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps Make sure that power supply modules are only
3. Voltage measurement Resistance measurement Current measurement 1 mle 3 4 L L 5 6 MO CHO Wordo MO 7 Mo MO 8 9 CHO Word 0 10 11 M1 CHI Word 2 ICO 12 Q M1 IC0 13 14 15 16 M2 CH2 Word4 M1 17 M2 M1 18 19 CH2 Word 4 E 20 21 M3 CH3 Word 6 IC1 22l M3 IC1 23 24 25 A MANA a M4 CH4 Words M2 29 M4 M2 30 32 E M5 CH5 Word10 C2 34 M5 IC2 35 36 37 38 Tz M6 M3 T CH6 Word 12 39 amp M6 ore M3 40 41 CH6 Word 12 42 43 5 M7 CH7 Word14 03 44 M7 IC3 45 a 46 47 4g M M Figure 5 31 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 91 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Programming package Current consumption Associated programming package Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of inputs e For resistance type sensor Length of cable Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L
4. 290 mm 190 mm muni 465 mm 240 mm gt 482 5 mm 257 5 mm gt Figure 2 2 Dimensions of the UR1 18 Slot or UR2 9 Slot Rack S7
5. oOo NOOA ON TNN O N Pim lt 1 Short circuit protection ow h EN rt o1 Vas Monitoring of sensor supply 1Vs O 00 oO N N N N Backplane bus interface N oO 1M N ENS oe es Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 2L Monitoring of internal voltage p gt 2L N o1 N O N N amp yas N 0 0 wo io ow oO N oe wo amp R oO ol 2M e Short circuit protection Ve Monitoring of sensor supply 2Vs ie O oO NJ Jai io O io o aN O gt gt N A A O A A A N O aN CO Figure 4 4 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 24 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Termin
6. l n a I O bus I O bus 290 mm 190 mm Segment 1 Segment 2 bu 465 mm 482 5 mm Figure 2 4 CR2 Rack Technical Specifications of the CR2 Rack Rack DCR Number of single width slots Dimensions W x H x D in mm 482 5 x 290 x 27 5 Weight 3 kg 4 1 as of version 03 Busses Segmented I O bus continuous communication bus Only one power supply module required S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 Racks 2 5 The Rack CR3 6ES7401 2TA01 0AA0 Introduction The CR3 rack is used for the assembly of CRs in standard systems not in fault tolerant systems The CR3 has an I O bus and a communication bus Suitable Modules for CR 3 You can use the following modules in CR3 e All S7 400 modules with the e
7. X2 socket Figure 13 2 X2 Socket Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961 VGA 6 Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 6 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 3 2 Addressing Interrupts and Submodule ID Addressing Addressing corresponds to the AT standard The following addresses are occupied by the IF 962 VGA interface submodule Memory addresses A0000p to C7FFFY I O addresses 0604 to O6Fy 3BOy to 3BBy 3BFy to 3DFy Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies the following interrupts e IRQa Keyboard interrupt e IRQb Mouse interrupt trackball e IRQc VGA interrupt The BIOS routes these interrupts to ISA interrupts in accordance with Table 13 6 Table 13 6 Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule Interrupt Source of the Interface Submodule tSAInterrupt Mouse track ball p IRQb IRQ 12 Submodule ID The IF 962 VGA interface submodule has the submodule ID 814 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 7 Interface Submodules 13 3 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications The IF 962 LPT interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power
8. NOOR WN O lt Figure 4 2 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 18 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC Programming package Status Interrupts Diagnostics Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Status display Green LED per package channel Dimensions and Weight Interrupts None Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 Diagnostic functions None in millimet AIRES Substitute value can be applied No Weigh A 60 em phos ree Sensor Selection Data Data for Specific Module l Input voltage Number of inputs 32 e Rated value 24 VDC Length of cable e For signal 1 11 V to 30 V e Shielded Max 1000 m 30 V to 5 V as of Voltages Currents Potentials version 03 Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC Input current electronics L At signal 1 6 mA to 8 mA e Reverse polarity protection Yes Input delay e Power failure buffering None At O to 1 1 2 ms to 4 8 ms 11 33 19 33 Number of inputs that can be 32 ee dea Pelee ee triggered simultaneously Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 2 Isolation Connection of two wire BEROs Possible Between channels and Yes e Permitted bias current Max 2 5 mA backplane bus Between channels and No power supply of the electronics
9. a e 2M ee Short circuit protection Ved Monitoring of sensor supply 2Vs rravye Figure 4 6 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 33 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram for Redundant Supply of Sensors The figure below shows how sensors can additionally be supplied by means of Vs with a redundant voltage source for example via another module Short circuit proof driver om Sere SD as Digital input oM module to the sensors 1 L Figure 4 7 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Dimensions and Weight Voltages Currents Potentials Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC in millimeters electronics and sensor L Weight Approx 600 g e Reverse polarity protection Yes Data for Specific Module Number of inputs that can be 16 Number of inputs triggered simultaneously Isolation e Between channels and backplane bus Length of cable e Unshielded input delay 0 1ms Max 20 m Between A
10. 5th supply group 6th supply group 7th supply group 8th supply group LED control Figure 4 15 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 63 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2A Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L Rated load voltage L Aggregate current of the outputs two outputs per supply group 1 Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference e Between the different circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L Between the outputs of the different groups Current consumption From the backplane bus e Power supply and load voltage L no load Power
11. Data register and bus control NOOR WN O NOOR WN O lt Figure 4 3 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 21 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 Status display Green LED per in millimeters channel Weight Approx 500 g Interrupts None Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions None Number of inputs 32 Substitute value can be applied No Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage e Shielded Max 1000 m e Rated value 24 VDC Voltages Currents Potentials e For signal 1 13 V to 30 V Power rated voltage of the Not required e For signal 0 30 Vto5 V electronics L Length of cable e Unshielded Max 600 m Input current Number of inputs that can be 32 At signal 1 7 mA triggered simultaneously Input del nput delay Isolation e At 0 to 1 1 2 ms to 4 8 ms Between channels and Yes At 1 to 0 1 2 ms to 4 8 ms backplane bus Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 1 Between the channels No l ii Connection of two wire BEROs Possible Permitted potential difference e Between the different 75 VDC 60 VAC Permitted bias curr
12. N CO N wo oO oo N oo oo oo D oo ol wo O oO NJ oo 00 oo iN O pD o_o D NO pP se EN AK iN o1 iN O pD N iN CO Figure 5 39 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 124 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 in millimeters Weight Approx 650 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs 8 e For resistance type sensor 4 Length of cable e Shielded Max 200 m Voltages Currents Potentials Constant current for Max 1 mA resistance type sensor Isolation Between channels and Yes backplane bus Permitted potential difference Between Mana and 120 VAC Minternal Uiso Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 650 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 3 38 W module Analog Value Generation Integrative Does not go into the response time Measuring principle Integration conversion time resolution per c
13. Bus interface S7 400 g Figure 5 41 Block Diagram of the SM 431 AI 8 x 16 Bit Note An external protective network is required in the signal leads in accordance with IEC 61000 4 5 150 V 14 mm MOV across each and input to chassis ground S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 131 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit C Optional connector Connector with Thermocouples screw type temperature reference Voltage measurement INTE Current measurement EXTF D 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 MO gt gt LA CHO Word 0 12 M0 13 14 M1 1 15 M1 16 R CH1 Word 1 17 M1 18 5 19 M2 M2 22 M2 23 i 24 M3 27 M3 28 4 29 M4 M4 32 M4 33 5 34 M5 M5 37 M5 38 6 39 M6 40 M6 aa ss CH6 Word 6 42 M6 43 44 M7 45 M7 i J A R7 CH7 Word 7 47 M7 48 6ES7492 1AL00 0AAO 6ES7431 7KFO0 6AA0 Figure 5 42 Terminal Assignment Diagram SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 132 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of th
14. 0 Minutes E O M Press F1 key for help Timeout ey Disabled m i Screensaver amp Ra ee ee e 0 _ l esans a Figure 11 13 Setup Page Timeout Function What is the Purpose of the Setup Page On this setup page you determine whether the hard disk is to go into standby mode during access pauses or the screen is to be protected by a screen saver during entry pauses Timeout Mode Timeout mode offers you the following possible selections Disabled switch the timeout function off Screen saver or have the screen saver switched on during entry pauses IDE Standby or operate the hard disk in energy saving standby mode during access pauses Delay Time In this edit box you enter the time in minutes that has to elapse after the last entry or the last hard disk access before the timeout function activates OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 29 CPUs for M7 400 CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page 11 4 8 Setup Page Security Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Security in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 and activated the OPEN button this setup page ap
15. S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 9 Analog Modules 5 2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules Introduction The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission analog modules successfully The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later for example assign parameters to the module or install other modules or install commission etc other modules in between times Sequence of Steps Table 5 3 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module se m O OO OO UUU Select the module Section 5 1 and specific module section from Section 5 18 With some analog input modules set Section 5 4 the measuring method and measuring range by means of the measuring range module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 Installation section in the manual for the network programmable controller being used e 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation 4 Assign parameters to module Section 5 7 a measuring sensor or loads Sections 5 8 to 5 15 to module Commission configuration Commissioning section in the manual for the programmable controller being used e 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation 7 If commissioning was not successful Section 5 16 diagnose configuration
16. Three Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to anAl Two Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to anAl Design of Thermocouples 0 eee eee e eens Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value to an Isolated Al Connection of a Thermocouple with Reference Junction Order No M72166 xxx00 to an Isolated Al 0 ccc eee eee Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer Connected to Channel O 0 c cece eee e ee eee e eens Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four Conductor Connection 0 cece eee Two Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output OF an ISOIICDAO on 2022chent Glew ra ine ENERE TE ERA ke de ote ee ee 5 61 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO 5 62 Start Information of OB 40 Which Event Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value 0 nannaa Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 008 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 AI 8 x 13 Bit Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 008 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al8 x 14 Bit Step Response of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 0 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al8x14Bit 008 Term
17. Characteristics The SM 422 DO 16x 120 230 VAC 2 A has the following features e 16 outputs isolated in groups of 4 e 2A output current e 120 230 VAC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 83 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A Process Module 16 digital outputs 4 chassis grounds Byte 0 OONOORWN gt ie Sm c ie S gt 2 xe c Sam a O eb Sam m LED control Figure 4 20 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 84 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A Programming package Data for Selecting an Actuator Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Output voltage package At signal 1 At maximum current Dimensions and Weight min L1 1 3 Vrms DimensionsW x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 At ee in millimeters min L1 18 1 Vrms Weight Approx 800 g Output current Data for Specific Module At signal 1 Number of outputs 16 Rated value 2 A Length of cable Permitted range 10 mA to 2 A e Unshielded 600 m Permitted surge current Max 50 A per cycle Shielded 1000 m per group
18. D400 O7FF isan D800 0EFF fe DECOO DFFF SEN Press Fl key for help Figure 11 19 System Setup Page What is the Purpose of the Setup Page On this page you make the settings for the cache memory the system ROM and the video ROM We recommend you use the default settings see Figure 11 19 System Cache System Cache offers you the following possible selections By Activating the Option Button You Can Switch Disabled all cache memory off Primary only only the process oriented cache on Primary and Secondary both the internal and external cache on If Size 0 is displayed for Secondary Cache only the Primary Cache can be switched on Secondary Cache Size Indicates the size of the secondary cache memory This field is for information only and cannot be edited S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 38 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 System Cache For the memory areas of the System ROM the VIDEO ROM and the addresses of BIOS expansions you can set whether they are copied to the Shadow RAM and whether the cache should be used e System ROM offers you the following possible selections Shadowed that the BIOS address area of 128 Kbytes is to be copied into the high speed shadow RAM This option cannot be switched off Shadowed and Cached that a cache memory is available for this memory area in addition to shadow RAM Note If you have switched off the
19. Measuring Range Module A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel to each type of sensor If necessary the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 5 4 The corresponding table in Section 5 19 2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range In addition the necessary settings are embossed on the module Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 51 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Parameter Value Range Parameter Type Diagnostics e Wire break Yes no No Static Channel Measurement e Measuring type Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current four wire transmitter U 2DMU Current two wire transmitter R 4L Resistance four conductor terminal R 3L Resistance three conductor terminal RTD 4L Thermal resistor Static Channel linear four conductor terminal RTD 3L Thermal resistor linear three conductor terminal TC L Thermocouple linear e Measuring Refer to Section 5 19 2 for the 10V range measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set O O 273 15 to 327 67 C 0 00 C Temperature S7
20. e Reverse polarity protection Power supply of the transmitters e Supply current e Short circuit proof Constant measured current for resistance type sensor Isolation Between channels and backplane bus e Between the channels e Between channels and load voltage L Permitted potential difference Between inputs and Mana Ucm Between the inputs Ecm Between Mana and Minternal Uiso Insulation tested Between bus and analog section e Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L M and chassis ground 5 92 As of STEP 7 V 2 0 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 500 g 8 4 Max 200 m 24 VDC required only for the supply of 2 wire transmitters Yes Max 50 mA Yes Typ 1 67 mA Yes No Yes 8 VAC 8 VAC 75 VDC 60 VAC 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC From the backplane bus From the backplane bus L Power dissipation of the module Measuring principle Integration time conversion time resolution per channel e Parameters can be assigned e Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz e Basic conversion time in ms e Resolution incl overrange Smoothing of the measured values Time constant of the input filter Basic execution time of the module in ms all channels enabled Max 1000 mA Max 200 mA with 8 connected fully contr
21. 5 58 9 59 5 60 5 61 5 62 5 63 5 64 5 65 5 66 5 67 5 68 5 69 5 70 5 71 5 72 5 73 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and4 to 20 MA arrasar iasa e e e e E i A A ase E ee Bas ors 5 27 Dependencies of the Analog Input Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values 0008 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values 06 Static and dynamic parameters of the analog groups Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 0 005 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 0000 0 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Ordering Data of the Comparison Point 00 cc eee eens Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures 000ce cee eees Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x13 Bit 0 0 00 00 0a e Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431 Al8 x 13 Bit Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 AIl 8 x13 Bit Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 0 0c eee Selection of the Measuring Method for Chann
22. Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values Input resistance e Voltage e Current e Resistors Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Maximum input current for current input destruction limit Connection of the signal sensor For measuring voltage e For measuring current As two wire transmitter As four wire transmitter For measuring resistance With two conductor terminal With three conductor terminal With four conductor terminal Load of the two wire transmitter Characteristic linearization S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 V 10 MQ 10 V 10 MQ 1 V to 5 V 10 MQ 20 mA 50 Q 4 mA to 20 mA 50 Q 0 to 600 2 10 MQ Max 18 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms cycle factor 1 20 40 mA continuous Possible Possible Possible Possible cable resistance is also measured Possible Max 750 Q No 9 93 Analog Modules 5 20 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7 Measuring Range Modules A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel to each type of sensor If necessary the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range The steps you have to perform to do this
23. Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Table 4 15 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Diagnostic Message Diagnostics Reaction to Input Value of Digital Module Parameter Error Parameter Module not Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal all channels parameterized disabled No front connector sd S Parameterized substitute value 4 Last read valid value Incorrect parameters Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal module all incorrectly module channel disabled parameterized channels STOP operating mode Cannot be Process value not updated disabled Internal voltage failure Cannot be S Parameterized substitute value disabled Last read valid value Hardware interrupt lost Cannot be Not relevant Current process value disabled LV LV Parameterized substitute value LV Last read valid value Sensor supply missing Deactivated LV V also activated via No Load Voltage L Activated No load voltage L for Deactivated each channel group Activated S KL Parameterized substitute value Last read valid value 0 signal if the contact is connected via the sensor supply process value for the external sensor supply Parameterized substitute value Last read valid value V K V K channel Activated SV K SV K V S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 39 Digital Modules Behavi
24. Table 5 45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point Recommended Compensating Box Order Number Reference junction with integrated power supply M72166 00 000 unit for rail mounting tt Auxiliary power 220 VAC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC Connection to thermocouple Fe CuNi Type L Fe Cu Ni Type J Ni Cr Ni Type K Pt 10 Rh Pt Type S Pt 13 Rh Pt Type R Cu CuNi Type U Cu Cu Ni Type T B i B 2 B 3 B 4 N oO fF WD Reference temperature 0 C Connecting to the Comparison Point Order No M72166 xxx00 Compensating leads same material as thermocouple Auxiliary power SIEMENS M72166 Q O O 3 O O O Cu wires Figure 5 19 Connection of a Thermocouple with Reference Junction Order No M72166 xxx00 to an Isolated Al S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 57 Analog Modules Connecting Thermocouples and Resistance Thermometers Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module Make sure that you parameterize the RTD on Channel 0 reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a thermocouple connected to it If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same comparison point you compensate as follows RTD on Channel 0 Equalizing line same material as thermocouple Junction Incoming line Cu Figure 5 20 Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation by Means of a Resi
25. UL CSA Note Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the UL CSA these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 2 A5E00069467 07 Racks 2 2 The Racks UR1 6ES7400 1TA01 OAA0 and UR2 6ES7400 1JA01 0AA0 Introduction The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion racks The UR1 and UR2 racks have both an I O bus and a communication bus Suitable Modules for UR1 and UR2 You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks e When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack All S7 400 modules with the exception of receive IMs e When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack All S7 400 modules with the exception of CPUs and send IMs Special case Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461 1 receive IM Structure of the UR1 and UR2
26. 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 Resistance test Oto 48 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 150 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 300 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q four conductor measurement in the range of 6000 Q 0 to 300 Q three conductor measurement S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 8 3K 1 7K 3 2K 4 3K 6 2K 2 8K 4 2K 4 4K Resistance thermocouples four conductor standard measuring range 3 1K 4 9K 3 9K 3 1K 0 8K 0 8K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 8K 0 8K Resistance thermocouples three conductor standard measuring range 4 2K 6 5K 5 2K 4 2K 1 0K 1 0K 0 5K 0 5K 0 5K 0 5K 1 0K 1 0K 5 111 Analog Modules Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to input range e Voltage input 25 mV 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5 V 5V 1Vto5V 10V Current input 0 mA to 20 mA 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA
27. 1 V 2 5V EON 10 V 1to5V 4DMU Current four wire 3 2 mA You will find the digitized analog transmitter 5 mA values in Section 5 3 1 in the 10 mA current measuring range 20 mA O to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA TC L Thermocouple linear You will find the digitized analog temperature measurement values in Section 5 3 1 in the temperature range Default Settings 5 140 The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Thermocouple linear for the measuring method and Type J for the measuring range You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 25 Analog Output Module SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit 6ES7432 1HF00 0ABO0 Characteristics The SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit has the following features e 8 outputs e The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs e 13 bit resolution e Analog section Isolated to CPU and load voltage e Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and the channels against Mana is 3 VDC Block Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit Bus S7 400 Bus control eS Analog supply Figure 5 47 Block Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 141 Analog Modules Terminal Ass
28. 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V Buffering of power failures Power input Test Voltage 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 2300 VDC primary lt gt PE gt 20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 ata repeat rate of 1 s 168 W Power loss 44 W Backup current Backup batteries optional Max 100 uA at power off 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 29 Power Supply Modules 3 11 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0DA00 0AA0 Function The PS 405 4 A power supply module is designed for connecting to a DC line voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 4 A and 24 VDC 0 5 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 4054A Ooh Fixing screw 405 0DA00 0AA0 o INTF o BAF ene LEDs INTF dle BAF BATTF hai 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset Standby switch Under cover e Battery compartment Switches BATT INDIC BATT OFF 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 7 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 30 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the PS 4054 A Power
29. 5 4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels Two Procedures There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules e With a measuring range module and STEP 7 e By wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7 Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP 7 is described in Section 5 7 The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range by means of measuring range modules Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range Modules If the analog modules have measuring range modules they are supplied with the measuring range modules plugged in If necessary the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range Attention Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module Before installing the analog input module therefore check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another measuring range Possible Settings for the Measuring Range Modules 5 28 The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions A
30. 76543210 Byte2 Hardware interrupt On rising edge at channel 8 On rising edge at channel 9 On rising edge at channel 10 On rising edge at channel 11 On rising edge at channel 12 On rising edge at channel 13 On rising edge at channel 14 On rising edge at channel 15 76543210 Byte3 Hardware interrupt On falling edge at channel 0 On falling edge at channel 1 On falling edge at channel 2 On falling edge at channel 3 On falling edge at channel 4 On falling edge at channel 5 On falling edge at channel 6 On falling edge at channel 7 Only in 6ES7 421 7BHO0 0ABO Figure A 1 Data Record 1 of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 5 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 bytes 4 5 and 6 for the parameters of the digital inout modules You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 76543210 Byte4 Hardware interrupt On falling edge at channel 8 On falling edge at channel 9 On falling edge at channel 10 On falling edge at channel 11 On falling edge at channel 12 On falling edge at channel 13 On falling edge at channel 14 On falling edge at channel 15 7654321 0 Byte5 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable subst
31. A5E00069467 07 Index 3 Index Diagnostics Digital module analog input module 5 40 assigning parameters 4 6 digital input module 4 7 causes of errors and remedies 4 11 digital output module 4 8 channel error 4 11 of analog modules 5 63 channel information available 4 11 of digital modules 4 9 diagnostic messages 4 10 system Glossary 18 diagnostics 4 9 Diagnostics entry 5 32 EPROM error 4 11 Digital input module external malfunction 4 11 diagnostic data B 4 EXTF LED 4 9 diagnostic interrupt enable 4 7 fuse blown 4 12 diagnostics 4 7 hardware interrupt 4 14 _ hardware interrupt enable 4 7 hardware interrupt lost 4 11 4 14 input delay 4 7 internal malfunction keep last value 4 7 no load voltage L 4 7 parameters interrupts sensor supply missing 4 7 SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC 4 41 SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC 4 50 4 53 internal voltage failure interrupt triggering channels 4 14 INTF LED M short circuit module malfunction SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 4 23 4 32 no auxiliary voltage SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 4 44 no front connector 4 11_ SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC 4 56 _ no load voltage L 4 12 SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 4 17 4 20 no sensor supply 4 12 structure of data record 1 A 4 parameter assignment error substitute 1 4 7 _ parameter assignment missing substitute a value 4 7 sequence o
32. K Keep last value digital input module 4 7 digital output module 4 8 Key control M7 400 KLV Glossary 9 L LBA mode M7 400 11 34 LEDs 7 5 Limit value analog input module 5 40 Load connection to analog output module Load connection to current output on analog output module 5 62 Load connection to voltage output to analog output module 5 60 Load memory Glossary 9 Load voltage failure of the analog module Load voltage L missing digital module 4 12 Loads connecting Local data Glossary 10 Logic block Glossary 10 Low voltage directive 1 3 M M short circuit digital module M7 Glossary 10 M7 400 main memory assignment 11 40 Master Glossary 10 Maximum expansion 7 3 Measured value sensors isolated non isolated Measurement analog input module 5 41_ Measuring method analog input channels Measuring principle instantaneous value encoding Glossary 10 integrating Glossary 10 Measuring range analog input channels 5 28 analog input module 5 41 Measuring range module 5 28 a e Measuring range module incorrect missing analog input module 5 65 Measuring sensor isolated 5 44 Measuring type analog input module 5 41 Memory assignment M7 400 Memory card Glossary 11 Memory card M7 400 CPUs Memory reset Glossary 11 Memory submodules M7 400 note on ordering C 3 Mode selector Glossary 11 Mode selector switch M7 400 CPUs 11 9 Module
33. Programmable controller A programmable controller consists of a gt central device a CPU and diverse input output modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 13 Glossary Programming device A programming device PG is an industry standard compact personal computer A PG is completely equipped for programming SIMATIC programmable controllers Protection level The SIMATIC S7 access protection concept prevents the central processing unit from being accessed by unauthorized persons It has three protection levels Protection level 1 all program device functions allowed Protection level 2 read only program device functions allowed Protection level 3 no program device functions allowed RAM A RAM random access memory is a semiconductor memory with random access RC element Series connection of ohmic resistance and capacitor When a load is disconnected overvoltage occurs in circuits with inductive load This can result in an arc and reduce the lifetime of the contacts To suppress this arc you can bridge the contact with an RC element Reboot In the S7 400 When a CPU starts up for example by switching the mode selector from STOP to RUN or by switching the power on either OB 101 restart or OB 100 reboot is processed before cyclic program scanning OB 1 In rebooting the process input image is read in and the STEP 7 user program is processed starting with
34. SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit 5 122 smoothing of analog input values 5 36 5 41 STOP operating mode 5 65 structure of data record 1 temperature coefficient temperature unit 5 41 underflow 5 66 _ wire break 5 66 wire break check Analog input modules causes of errors and remedies 5 65 diagnostic messages 5 64 Analog module assigning parameters 5 39 behavior 5 31 determination of measuring error output error 5 34 diagnostics 5 63 EXTF LED 5 63 5 67 _ INTF LED 5 63 load voltage failure sequence of steps E commissioning 5 5 6 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Index 1 Index Analog output channel conversion time 5 37 response time 5 38 Analog output module connecting loads and actuators 5 59 connecting loads to current output 5 62 connecting loads to voltage output 5 60 isolated 5 59 output 5 42 output range 5 42 output type 5 42 parameters 5 42 response time 5 38 settling time 5 38 SM 432 AO 8x 13 Bit 5 141 Analog value conversion 5 7 sign 5 7 Analog value representation 5 7 binary representation of input ranges binary representation of output ranges 5 23 for current measuring ranges 5 13 5 16 for current output ranges 5 27 5 30 for resistance thermometers 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 14 for re
35. There is a 25 pin sub D socket connector on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable Figure 13 10 shows the assignments for the X1 socket and the terminal connection diagram of the submodule Pinout diagram voltage measurement Pinout diagram current L4 measurement 1 L 2 TTA Mo CHO Mo 15 Ml CHO MV A 18 X M1 17 6 20 V l M2 19 8 22 21 Pinout diagram voltage output R 10 Vee QV 9 So CHO 23 Ground bar Qlo 11 V RL of the PLC CH 0 Ground bar Ri of the PLC Ql CH1 Figure 13 10 X1 Socket Assignments 25 Pin Sub D Connector and Terminal Connection Diagram of the IF 961 AIO Note Use only shielded cables for connecting the inputs and outputs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 34 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Meaning of Signals The following table shows the meanings of the signals in Figure 13 10 Table 13 38 Meaning of the Signals of the X1 Socket of the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule es Een si a i eon Circuit Block Diagram Figure 13 11 shows the circuit block diagram of the IF 961 AlO interface submodule Internal data bus Current limiter Outputs U Pied N CH 1 Internal supply Figure 13 11 Circuit Block Diagram of the IF 961 AIO Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 35 Interface Submodules Gro
36. Transmission Speed The following transmission speeds transmission rates can be set in the IF962 COM interface submodule ATl compatible transmission speeds and transmission speeds up to 115 2 Kbps Note Please note that a safe level of transmission speed depends on factors such as cable length cable type and environmental interference S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 14 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies an interrupt request IRQa and IRQb for each serial port You can define the assignment of the interrupt requests IRQa and IRQb to the appropriate processor interrupt requests in the BIOS Setup Table 13 14 Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962 COM Interface Submodule Interrupt Source of the Interface Submodule ISAInterrupt Default settings in the BIOS are IRQ 4 for COM1 and IRQ3 for COM2 Submodule ID The IF 962 COM interface submodule has the submodule ID 414 13 4 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications The IF 962 COM interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7962 3AA00 0ACO Technical Specifications
37. You can achieve corresponding backup in an EU in the case of the following receive IMs by applying between 5 VDC and 15 VDC to the EXT BATT socket e IM 461 0 6ES7461 0OAA00 0AA0 e IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 0AA0 e IM 461 3 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 The EXT BATT input has the following features e Reverse polarity protection e A short circuit current limit of 20 mA To provide an incoming supply at the EXT BATT socket you need a connecting cable with a 2 5 mm jack as illustrated in the following figure Note the polarity of the jack Plus pole Minus pole gt Jack 2 5mm S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 6 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules 6 2 The Interface Modules IM 460 0 6ES7460 0AA00 0AB0 6ES7460 0AA01 0AB0O and IM 461 0 6ES7461 0AA00 0AA0 6ES7461 0AA01 0AA0 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 0 and IM 461 0 6ES7461 0AA00 0OAAO 6ES7461 0AA01 0AA0 IM 461 0 me IM 461 0 Mem OR e 461 XXXXX XXXX DIP switch Fa EXT BATT DIP switch External backup voltage 5 15 VDC Under cover Connector X1 Interface C1 Connector X2 Interface C2 Figure 6 2 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 0 and IM 461 0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 Interface Modules Function The interface module pair IM 460
38. and L M Between analog section 2120 VDC and chassis ground Between L M and chassis 2120 VDC 9 79 Analog Modules Suppression of Interference Limits of Error TC type B 14 8K Interference voltage suppression for f nx f1 1 TC type R 9 4K f1 interference frequency n 1 2 TC type S 10 6K e Common mode gt 100 dB TC type T 129K interference Uc lt 120 Vss TC type E 4 0K Series mode interference gt 40 dB TC type J 5 2K peak value of interference TC type K 7 6K lt rated value of input TC type U 3 5K range TC type L 5 1K ARR i l TC type N SSK Operational limit in the entire temperature range with l yP reference to the input range Resistance thermocouples four conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 4 6 K Pt 200 5 7 K Pt 500 4 6 K Pt 1000 ESK Ni 100 0 9K Ni 1000 0 9K Climatic measuring range Pt 100 0 5K Pt 200 0 5K Pt 500 0 5K Pt 1000 0 5K 4mAto20mA ely 0 9K Resistance test Ni 1000 0 9K Oto 48 Q Resistance thermocouples three conductor four conductor standard measuring range measurement Pt 100 52K 0 to 150 Q Pt 200 8 2K four conductor Pt 500 65K eee eae Pt 1000 5 2K 0 to 300 Q l four conductor Ni 100 1 3K measurement Ni 1000 1 3K 0 to 600 Q Climatic measuring range four conductor Pt100 0 7K measurement Pt 200 0 7K 0 to 5000 Q four conductor Pt 500 0 7K measurement in Pt 1000 0 7 K the
39. destruction limit Connection of actuators Permissible input current e For voltage output eke input destruc Three wire connection Possible lon alt Four wire connection Connection of signal measuring line Not possible SENSON For current output e For voltage Two wire connection Possible Pigs urement Poke Status Interrupts Diagnostics For current Interrupts measurement As two wire transducer Possible As four wire transducer Possible For resistance measurement Possible 1 1 When supplied via analog outputs with a constant current e With capacitive load max 1 6 mF e End of cycle interrupt Yes can be set e Diagnostic interrupt Yes can be set S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 55 Interface Submodules 13 8 IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7961 3AA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule is used for connecting incremental encoders lt has the following characteristics e Connection with RS422 or 24 V signals e Adigital inputs START STOP SET RESET isolated e 2 digital outputs Q1 Q2 isolated Figure 13 24 IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 56 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 8 1 What Can the IF961 CT1 Interface Submodule Do Introduction This section contains an overview of the functionality of the IF 961 CT1 interface submodu
40. pressing the key OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page with the exception of the time S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 32 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 10 Hard Disk Setup Page Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Hard Disk and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this BIOS setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 16 eg Digg PT l e al l l AUTO All Drives ce CANCEL Drive Wait Time sec H Auto Type Cyl Heads SPT Precomp L Sone Size Mode Mode Bit PIO Master USR1 525 32 63 MOME 1049 4516 LBA A yp ices Slave NOE OD 0 0 0 0 0 giae a I Press F1 key for help Figure 11 16 Hard Disk Setup Page with only the Master Hard Disk Present What is the Purpose of the Setup Page The setup page is used for transferring the parameters of the hard disk in your mass storage module to the BIOS Only change the default settings if you install a different hard disk and this cannot be detected automatically see Auto function If the wrong hard disk type is entered the operating system cannot be started AUTO All Drives Sets the type and all parameters for the master and slave hard disks A
41. syte 2 oL0L oL olol ol Thermocouple connection error Operating status 0 RUN 1 STOP 76543210 Byte3 o o ojo EPROM error RAM error ADC DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B 24 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 7 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 765 43 2 1 enes LTT ana type B 16 71 analog input 7 0 Byte 5 EE ea Number of diagnostic bits that the module outputs per channel 16 bits long 1 0 Byte 6 RnR Number of channels of the same type in one module 8 channels 7654321 0 Byter 1111111 Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 Figure B 25 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 18 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 8 to 23 of the SM 431 Al8 x 16 Bit Data record 1 with bytes 8 to 23 contains channel specific diagnostic data The following figure shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes bytes 8 10 to 22 for a channel of the module Configuring parameter assignment error Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Figure B 26 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit The following figure shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes bytes 9 11 to 23 for a channel of the module 7654321 7 ti
42. 0c ccc ees Context Sensitive Help Window 00 cece eee eee eens Setup Menu sccndcctieeedd sate ddededeweteewe temas da wwe deanna Setup Exit Dialog BOX 0 ccc eee teen eens User Help Setup Page 2 ccc cnet e eee ees IF Modules Setup Page ccc cece ete ene eens Setup Page Timeout Function 0 cee ees Security Setup Page a siacx dod ncieced iesi teste Hahei nin ddan aon gree anaes Date and Time Setup Page Default 0 0 0 cee ee eee Hard Disk Setup Page with only the Master Hard Disk Present Floppy Card Setup Page 1 cece ee eee eens Boot Options Setup Page 0 ccc eee eee ne es System SUD PAGS s cagaduc wen big ose obese ww eure Renee ORE ox Positions of Expansion Socket and Expansion Connector Maximum Expansion with Expansion Modules 005 EXM 478 Expansion Module 0 00 ccc eee een eens Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the FM 456 4 and EXM 478 Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 and EXM 479 ice cece te dessa de se besten sac ssn st at ures E iach a de hgh a A ath si 12 9 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules and the Interface Submodules 0 0 ccc eee eee ees ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 0 ccc cee ees ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 98 Pin Standard Direct Connector Dimension Specifications for AT Modules to be
43. 4 mA to 20 mA Resistance test 5 112 0 to 48 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 150 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 300 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q four conductor measurement in the range of 6000 Q 0 to 300 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q three conductor measurement in the range of 6000 22 Thermocouples TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC type J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N 7 6K 4 8K 5 4K 1 1K 1 8K 2 3K 3 4K 17K 2 3K 2 6K Resistance thermocouples four conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 1 6K 2 5K 2 0K 1 6K 0 4K 0 4K 0 2K 0 2K 0 2K 0 2K 0 4K 0 4K Resistance thermocouples three conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Temperature error with reference to the input range Linearity error with reference to the input range 3 1K 4 9K 3 9K 3 1K 0 8K 0 8K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 8K 0 8K 0 004 K 0 01 K Repeat accuracy inthe steady 0 1 state at 25 C referred to the input range
44. Application of the RS 485 Repeater You need an RS 485 repeater if e more than 32 nodes are connected to the bus e bus segments are to be operated non grounded on the bus or e the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded See table 10 1 Table 10 1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment Baud Rate Max Cable Length of a Segment in m 9 6 to 187 5 kbaud 1000 Rules If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters e Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series e The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in Table 10 2 Table 10 2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Baud Rate Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes in m with RS 485 Repeater 6ES7 972 0AA01 0XA0 9 6 to 187 5 kbaud 10000 500 kbaud 4000 1 5 Mbaud 2000 3 to 12 Mbaud 1000 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 10 2 A5E00069467 07 RS 485 Repeater 10 2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater 6ES7972 0AA01 0XA0 The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its functions Table 10 3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply pin M5 2 is the ground reference if you want to measure the voltage difference between terminals A2 and B2 Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2 gop G co Terminals for the bus cable of b
45. Current consumption at rated voltage e without node at PG OP socket e Node at PG OP socket 5 V 90 mA e Node at PG OP socket 24 V 100 mA Connection of fiber optic cables Yes via repeater adapters Transmission rate automatically detected by the repeater 9 6 kbaud 19 2 kbaud 45 45 kbaud 93 75 kbaud 187 5 kbaud 500 kbaud 1 5 Mbaud 3 Mbaud 6 Mbaud 12 Mbaud Degree of protection IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters 45 x 128 x 67 mm Weight incl packaging 350 g Pin Assignment of the Sub D Connector PG OP Socket Vew Pinno Saranane Desiran a S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 10 6 A5E00069467 07 RS 485 Repeater Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater e Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other e Bus segment 2 and the PG OP socket are galvanically isolated from each other e Signals are amplified between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 between PG OP socket and bus segment 2 Segment 2 A2 B2 A2 B2 Figure 10 3 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 10 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 1 1 In this Chapter This chapter describes the CPUs of the M7 400 automation computer e CPU 486 3 e CPU 488 3 The CPUs differ essentially in their clock frequencies You will find a comparison
46. If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings Assignment of the Encoder Supplies to Channel Groups The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups inputs O to 7 and inputs 8 to 15 In these two channel groups you parameterize the diagnostics for the encoder supply too S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 27 Digital Modules Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out To ensure that a wire break check is carried out you require an external sensor circuit using a resistor of 10 to 18 kQ The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor This additional resistor is not required in the following cases e If two wire BEROs are used e lf you don t parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups You can only set the input delay for each group of channels In other words the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15 Note The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 must be equal to the value 0 or 8 otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorre
47. Ld Es 2 Note Operational ground signal GND at the COMa or COMb ports is referenced to internal ground Suitable measures may be required on the process side to avoid ground loops S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 11 Interface Submodules 13 4 2 Addressing and Interrupts Addressing The IF 962 COM interface submodule can be addressed in the following two ways e Inthe AT compatible I O address area e Inthe M7 300 400 reserved I O address area from C000p Addressing in the AT Compatible I O Address Area The COM ports can be operated in the AT compatible I O address area The settings are made in the BIOS Setup You can see the addresses that can be set in the BIOS Setup from the following table Table 13 9 Addressing the COM Ports in the AT Compatible Address Area eee ae 03F8y to O3FFy 02F8 to O2FFy OSES to OSEFH Automatically configured by the BIOS and O2E8y to O2EFy can be set in the BIOS setup The BIOS searches the addresses in the order 03F8y O2F8y 03E8p and O2E8y and assigns COM1 COM2 COM3 and COM4 in ascending order There is no fixed assignment of the I O addresses to COMx For example if only one COM port is detected at address 12E8n this will be COM1 Example of Setting an AT Compatible I O Address In the following example the I O addresses 03F8y COM1 for COMa and 02F8y COMZ2 for COMb are to be set in the BIOS setup Proceed as follows
48. PC and STEP 7 How the CPUs work for example memory concept access to inputs and outputs addressing blocks data management Description of STEP 7 data management Using data types of STEP 7 Using linear and structured programming Using block call instructions Using the debug and diagnostic functions of the CPUs in the user program for example error OBs status word Basic procedure for working with STL LAD or FBD for example structure of STL LAD or FBD number formats syntax Description of all instructions in STEP 7 with program examples Description of the various addressing methods in STEP 7 with examples Description of all functions integrated in the CPUs Description of the internal registers in the CPU Description of all system functions integrated in the CPUs Description of all organization blocks integrated in the CPUs Description of the programming device hardware Connecting a programming device to various devices Starting up a programming device S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Preface Specific Information for M7 400 This documentation package describes the hardware of the M7 400 You will need the following additional documentation for programming and starting up an M7 400 System Software for Designing writing and testing a C program 6ES7802 0FA14 0BA0 M7 300 400 Program Design for M7 CPU FM modules with the M7 SYS Programming Manual programming
49. Supply voltage Supplied from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules Current consumption in the M7 300 for dimensioning the 24 V current supply Current consumption in the M7 400 for dimensioning the 5 V current supply 0 1 A Submodule ID 41y Power losses 0 5 W Dimensions W x H x D mm 18 2 x 67 x 97 Weight 0 080 kg S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 15 Interface Submodules 13 5 IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 4AA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 962 LPT interface submodule contains an AT compatible parallel LPT port for connecting a printer with Centronics interface The IF962 LPT submodule can also be used as a bi directional data interface There is a 25 pin sub D socket connector on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable Up to four LPT ports can be accessed on AT I O addresses in one programmable module using standard PC drivers This also includes LPT ports located on the programmable module itself and those located on expansions The IF 962 LPT interface submodules can be operated in the AT compatible address area and if special drivers are used also in the M7 300 400 reserved address area The cable length on the IF 962 LPT interface submodule should not exceed approximately 3 m X 2 34 O O O lt O 3 3 bs N oO O X 9 Fi
50. a memory module is not required Using the S7 functions it is possible to program and configure remotely all the IM 467 IM 467 FO connected to the network and all the CPUs connected via the SIMATIC S7 400 backplane bus SIMATIC STEP 7 is the prerequisite for this e STEP 7 V3 1 The IM 467 MLFB no 6ES7467 5GJ00 0ABO0 can be configured as of STEP 7 version 3 1 e STEP 7 V4 02 The IM 467 MLFB no 6ES7467 5GJ01 O0ABO supports the SYNC FREEZE functional enhancement as of STEP 7 version 4 02 e STEP 7 as of version 5 00 The IM 467 IM 467 FO MLFB number 6ES7467 5GJ02 0AB0 6ES7467 5FJ00 0OABO supports the functional expansions of routing of programming device functions DP direct communication and equidistance as of STEP 7 version 5 00 Module Replacement Without a Programming Device The configuration data are stored in the load memory of the CPU The non volatile storage of configuration data in the CPU is ensured by battery backup or EPROM module cards The IM 467 IM 467 FO can be replaced without the need to explicitly reload the configuration data It is only possible to remove and insert the IM 467 IM 467 FO in a deenergized state Multiprocessor Operation The connected DP slaves can only be assigned to and processed by one CPU Configuration and Diagnostics Cannot Be Carried Out Simultaneously When configuration is in progress the IM 467 IM 467 FO cannot be diagnosed at the same time via MPI S7 400 M7 400 Pr
51. addresses to LPTx For example if only one LPT port is detected at address 0378 this will be LPT1 Note The LPT port in the M7 400 expansion module MSM 478 is always at the I O address 03BCy For this reason the I O address O3BCy must not be set for the IP 962 LPT interface submodule if an MSM 478 is in use S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 18 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Example of Setting an AT Compatible I O Address In the following example the I O address 0278 is to be set in the BIOS setup Proceed as follows to do this 1 Select the IF Modules page in the BIOS setup 2 Enter the submodule receptacle number of the interface submodule in Select Module 3 Enter the offset address for the configuration register of the interface submodule OO at Config Index 4 Enter FE or 02 at Value This value is then written into the configuration register see also Table 13 20 5 Press the OK button Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area Regardless of possible addresses in the AT compatible I O address area the IF 962 COM interface submodule can be addressed in this reserved address area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable modules
52. associated offset addresses for the individual interface submodules The resulting I O address is the sum of the base address and the offset address Submodule ID Each interface submodule has a submodule ID stored in read only memory This information is required in the BIOS Setup S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 2 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Interrupt Assignments When configuring the interface submodules in the BIOS setup you can assign ISA interrupts to the three interrupts of an interface submodule IRQa IRQb IRQc For this purpose enter the ISA interrupt provided in the relevant screen form See the table below for the format for entering the interrupt Table 13 1 Format of the Interrupt Entry in the BIOS Setup of the Interface Submodule oer See eee eee ee ee Pe ee ee rr If you enter the value FO instead of the ISA interrupt EX this interrupt is processed via a shared interrupt Shared Interrupt Since the number of interrupts is limited due to AT compatibility it is possible to assign several individual interrupts of the interface submodules to a shared interrupt The shared interrupt is shared by all interface submodule interrupts within an expansion module where the interrupt assignment FO has been entered The shared interrupt is assigned to the ISA interrupt during configuration of the interface submodule in the BIOS setup Signal
53. backplane bus and load voltage L Between the outputs of the different groups Current consumption From the backplane bus e Power supply and load voltage L no load Power dissipation of the module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts e Diagnostic Interrupt e Hardware interrupt 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 600 g 24 VDC 24 VDC Max 4A Max 2A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC 500 VDC Max 200 mA Max 120 mA Typ 8 W Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic functions e Monitoring of the load voltage Group error display For internal fault For external fault Diagnostic information readable Monitoring for Short circuit e Wire break Digital Modules Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF Yes gt 1 A typ lt 0 15 mA Substitute value can be applied Yes Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage e At signal 1 Output current e At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range e At signal 0 leakage current Load resistor range Parallel connection of 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of a load e To increase performance Triggering a digital input Switch rate e For resistive load e For inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 e For lamp load Limit internal of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to Short circui
54. e Between the channels No Permitted potential difference Between the different 75 VDC 60 VAC circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against 500 VDC backplane bus and load voltage L Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 30 mA e From supply voltage L Max 30 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 6 W module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 19 Digital Modules 4 8 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 1BL01 0AA0 Characteristics 4 20 The digital input module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following features e 32 inputs isolated in a group of 32 e 24 VDC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and two three four wire proximity switches BEROs IEC 61131 type 1 The status LEDs indicate the process status Notice If you use the module with the order number 6ES7421 1BL01 OAA0 as a replacement for the module with the order number 6ES7421 1BL00 0AA0O you can leave PIN 3 wired If you run modules 6ES7421 1BL00 OAAO and 6ES7421 1BL01 0AA0 involved in mutual exchange you have to wire and supply PIN 3 as described in Section 4 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC Process Module OOND OaBRWDND NOOR WN NOOR WON
55. e Pack of plug in adapters 6ES7195 1BE00 0XA0 Installing Connectors 1 Remove approximately 30 cm of the sheath of the fiber optic duplex cable 2 Install the fiber optic duplex cable with the associated Simplex connectors You can find a detailed description of Simplex connectors in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual TIP Close the two Simplex connectors together rather than separately to obtain a Duplex connector This ensures a more secure position in the plug in adapter IMPORTANT The polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely smooth and even The plastic sheath must not stick out or be cut unevenly If this is not the case considerable attenuation of the light signal via the fiber optic cable may occur 3 Place the Simplex connectors in the plug in adapter for the IM 467 FO and the fiber optic cable in the cable guides provided Insert the plug in adapter until you hear the sides clearly latch into position Make sure when you insert the plugs in the plug in adapter that the sender is always at the top and the receiver is underneath Plug in adapter for the IM 467 FO Put the 2 Simplex connectors together to make one duplex connector Tip Cut the lower cable approx 10 mm shorter than the upper one to achieve better cable routing Fiber optic in the cable channel of the IM 467 FO duplex cable Max 30 mm bending radius Figure 8 6 Installing the Connector S7 400 M7 400 Programma
56. for line 1 and line 2 connectors X1__ X1 upper front connector X2 lower front connector and X2 Operator Controls and Indicators of the Receive IM INTF LED red Lights up if a rack number gt 21 or 0 was set Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage EXTF LED Lights up in the event of an external fault line fault for example if the red terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process but not when the CC is switched off 5 VDC green Power supply in the EU is correct DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack Front Upper connector input for the connecting cable from the previous connector X1 interface module Front Lower connector output for terminator The front connector X2 is no connector X2 longer required for the IM 461 1 order number 6ES7 461 1BA01 0AA0 The terminator 6ES7461 1BA00 7AA0 previously required is now integrated in the module N Caution Modules can be damaged If you want to connect an EU via the IM 461 1 interface module and use a power supply module in this EU you might damage the modules Don t use a power supply module in an EU that you want to connect to the CC via the IM 461 1 interface module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 12 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Technical Specifications of the IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 Maximum line length total Dimensi
57. reference junction must be known because a thermocouple always measures the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction Repeater A device for the amplification of bus signals and connection of bus segments over long distances Resolution With analog modules the number of bits which represent the digitized analog value in binary The resolution depends on the module and with analog input modules on the integration time The precision of the resolution of a measured value increases with the length of the integration time The resolution can be as many as 16 bits including sign Response time The response time is the time from an input signal being detected to the change to an output signal linked to it The actual response time is somewhere between a shortest and a longest response time When configuring a system you must always assume the longest response time S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 15 Glossary Restart When a CPU starts up through the use of the mode selector for example or when the power is switched on either OB 101 restart OB 100 reboot warm restart or OB 102 cold restart is processed before cyclic program scanning OB 1 It is essential for a restart that the CPU is up The following applies All the data areas timers counters memory markers data blocks and their contents are preserved The process i
58. to analog input module 5 43 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 10 A5E00069467 07 Sensor supply missing digital input module 4 7 digital module 4 12 Sensors non isolated 5 45 Sequence layer Glossary 17 Settling time 5 38 analog output Setup fields M7 400 Setup page M7 400 Boot Options Date Time 11 32 Security System 11 38 Timeout Function 11 29 User Help 11 24 SFB Glossary 19 SFC Glossary 17 Glossary 18 SFC 51 4 13 5 67 SFC 55 WR_PARM A 2 SFC 56 WR_DPARM A 2 SFC 57 PARM_MOD A 2 SFC 59 4 13 5 67 Shared destination M7 400 Short circuit to L digital module digital output module 4 8 Short circuit to M digital output module 4 8 Short circuit Glossary 17 Shunt resistor Glossary 17 SIG destination M7 400 11 28 SIG source M7 400 11 28 Sign analog value 5 7 Signal module Glossary 17 Sinusoidal aR ET Slave Glossary 17 SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC diagnostic data B 4 SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC diagnostic data SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A diagnostic data B 12 Index SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A diagnostic data B 8 SM 422 DO 32x 24 VDC 0 5 A diagnostic data B 10 SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit diagnostic data B 14 SM 431 Al 8x 16 Bit diagnostic data B 18 SM 431 Al 8x RTD x 16 Bit diagnostic data Smoothing Glossary 17 Smoothing of anal
59. 0 send IM and IM 461 0 receive IM are used for a local link The communication bus is transferred at the full transmission rate Parameter Assignment for the Mounting Rack Number Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed The permitted range is 1 to 21 Setting Changing the Number Proceed as follows 1 Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make a change in the position Output voltage 0 V 2 Enter the number using the DIP switch 3 Switch the power supply module on again Operator Controls and Indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty red terminator missing or broken cable Ci LED Line 1 via front connector X1 connection 1 is correct green C1 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is not switched on or green e A module has not yet completed the initialization process C2 LED Line 2 via front connector X2 connection 2 is correct green C2 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is not switched on or gies e A module has not yet completed the initialization process Front Connector output for line 1 and line 2 ee X1 1x1 upper front connector X2 lower front connector an S7 400 M7 400 Programmab
60. 0 5 mA current Output delay for resistive load e From 0 to 1 Max 1 ms e At 1 to 0 Max 1 ms Load resistor range 12 Q to 4 KQ Lamp load Max 10 W Parallel connection of 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of Possible only outputs a load of the same group e To increase performance Not possible Triggering a digital input Possible Switch rate e For resistive load 100 Hz e For inductive load to IEC 0 2 Hzat 1A 947 51 DC 13 0 1 Hz at 2A e For lamp load Max 10 Hz Limit internal of the inductive Max 30 V circuit interruption voltage up to Short circuit protection Electronically cyclic1 of output Threshold on 2 8 to 6A 1 A supply group always consists of two adjacent channels starting with channel 0 Channels 0 and 1 2 and 3 and so on up to 14 and 15 therefore form one supply group 2 Following a short circuit reclosing under a full load is not guaranteed To prevent this you can do one of the following things e Change the signal at the output Interrupt the load voltage of the module or e Briefly disconnect the load from the output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 61 Digital Modules 4 17 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 6ES7422 1BH11 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A has the following features e 16 outputs isolated in two groups of 8
61. 07 CPUs for M7 400 Interrupt Source Here you set interrupts A to C see the Interface Submodules chapter provided for the interface submodule The values positioned on the left are setpoints You can edit these The value indicated in gray type to the right of these is the actual value determined at the last CPU power up It cannot be edited Note For the IF 961 AlO IF 961 DIO and IF 961 CT1 interface modules there are no default interrupts in the BIOS setup default values are always OxFF Additionally no error message is given if no interrupt is set for an interface module which is configured for interrupt generation BIOS settings for interrupt capable interface modules If you have set the interrupt generation for an interface module in the SIMATIC manager you have to set an interrupt for this interface module in the BIOS setup page IF modules For this use an available interrupt see above and Table 11 9 Interrupt Assignment on page 11 42 Shared Dest Here you set a shared interrupt for the interface submodule see the Interface Submodules and M7 400 Expansions chapters This value is entered only once per expansion module at the first submodule receptacle 0 3 6 9 etc The value on the left hand side is the setpoint value which you can edit The value indicated in gray type to the right of it is the actual value determined at the last CPU power up It cannot be edited DMA R
62. 1 socket X1 X2 IF 962 COM 9 Pin Sub D Plug Connector Addressing the COM Ports in the AT Compatible Address Area Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962 COM Interface Submodule Offset Address for the Configuration Register IF 962 COM Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 COM Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 COM Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962 COM Interface Submodule Socket X1 IF 962 LPT 25 Pin Sub D Socket Connector Addressing the LPT POMS lt 2scsclenstbevdcvhetauhecwteteae oadaie oes Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule Offset Address for the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule Offset Address for the Digital Input Function IF 961 DIO Assignment of the Digital Input DI Channels to the Bits IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Digital Output Function IF 961 DIO Assignment of the Digital Output DO Channels to the Bits IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Acknowledgment Register IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Acknowledgment Register IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Interrupt Register IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Register IF 961 DIO Off
63. 12 6 addressing 12 7 base addresses of the interface submodules interrupt assignment numbering of the submodule receptacles signal switching technical specifications Expansion modules M7 400 submodule receptacles for interface submodules 11 11 1 11 Expansion socket M7 400 CPU 11 14 Expansions expansion socket 12 2 maximum expansions 12 3 overview 12 2 permissible combinations 12 5 External malfunction analog input module 5 65 digital module EXTF LED analog module 5 63 digital module 4 9 F Fault LEDs M7 400 CPUs FB Glossary 7 FC Glossary 7 FEPROM Glossary 6 Fiber optic cable Glossary 6 FM approval 1 8 Force Glossary 6 Four conductor connection 5 51 Four wire transducers connection Four wire transmitter Glossary 19 Four wire transmitters 5 49 FREEZE Glossary 6 Front connector missing analog input module 5 65 digital module Function FC Glossary 7 Function block FB Glossary 7 Function elements M7 400 CPUs 11 4 lossary 19 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Index 5 Index Functional grounding Glossary 7 IF 961 AlO 13 33 Fuse blown Glossary 7 addressing 13 46 digital module analog input function 13 48 digital output module 4 8 analog output function 13 47 analog value representation inputs 13 51 analog value representation output 13 52 G characteristics 13 33 Global data Glossa
64. 13 6 shows the pin assignments of the submodule Figure 13 6 X1 Socket Assignments IF 961 DIO 25 Pin Sub D Connector S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 24 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Figures 13 7 and 13 8 show the circuit block diagrams and the terminal connection diagrams for wiring the digital inputs and digital outputs Internal data bus Minternal Circuit block diagram Terminal connection diagram Figure 13 7 Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring the Digital Inputs Internal data bus Terminal connection diagram Circuit block diagram Figure 13 8 Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring the Digital Outputs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 25 Interface Submodules 13 6 2 Addressing and Interrupts Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable modules for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule The I O address is the sum of the base address and the offset address The registers and their meanings and the offset addresses are described below Table 13 21 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961 DIO Interface Submod
65. 16 Bit Incorrect Parameter Possible Display Explanation Assignment Of the module Module malfunction You can find an Internal malfunction explanation of the W i diagnostic information in Fong Palamerels Tables 4 8 and 5 47 on Module not parameterized Pages 4 10 and 5 65 Affecting certain Module malfunction channels Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel information available Vector channel error Channel parameter assignment error User calibration doesn t correspond to the parameter assignment 5 24 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Temperature measurement You specify the setting by means of the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Unused Channels Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 139 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the Measuring Range parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 77 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Method Selected Measuring Range U Voltage 25 mV You will find the digitized analog 50 mV values in Section 5 3 1 in the 80 mV voltage measuring range 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV
66. 16 x 120 VAC Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H xD 25 x 290 x 210 Input voltage aremilimeters Rated value 120 V Weight Approx 650 g For signal 1 72 to 132 VAC Number of inputs Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz Length of cable Input current e Unshielded At signal 1 6 to 20 mA e Shielded At signal 0 0 to 4 mA Number of inputs thatcanbe 16 eo Ord 2 to 15 ms triggered simultaneously At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms Isolation Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 2 Between channels and Yes Connection of two wire BEROs Possible backplane bus e Permitted bias current Max 4A Between the channels Yes In groups of 1 Permitted potential difference inputs e Between the inputs of the 250 VAC different groups Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Current consumption e From the backplane bus Max 0 1 A Power dissipation of the Typ 3 0 W module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 43 Digital Modules 4 12 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 6ES7 421 7DHO00 0ABO Characteristics The SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC is characterized by the following features 4 44 16 inputs individually isolated Rated input voltage 24 VUC to 60 VUC Suitable for switches and two wire proximity switches BEROs
67. 33 Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Rising Edge IF 961 DIO 20 Interrupt generation at rising edge of the Disabled Enabled digital input channel 0 27 Interrupt generation at rising edge of the Disabled Enabled digital input channel 7 Selection Register Falling Edge Tables 13 34 and 13 35 give an overview of the selection register for interrupt generation at a falling edge of a digital input Table 13 34 Offset Address for the Selection Register Falling Edge IF 961 DIO offset Aadress Function Remarks 6 Selection register falling edge Read write Table 13 35 Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Falling Edge IF 961 DIO Interrupt generation at falling edge of the digital Disabled Enabled e EEE generation at falling edge of the digital a a input channel 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 29 Interface Submodules Mode Register Tables 13 36 and 13 37 give an overview of the mode register Table 13 36 Offset Address for the Mode Register IF 961 DIO Mode register Read write Table 13 37 Meaning of the Bits in the Mode Register IF 961 DIO a inputdslay OOOO l ms iPS a Reseed OOO e cs a fesa S Reset Status After switching on the interface submodule the input delay is set to 3 ms Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies an interrupt request IRQa You can define the assignment of the IRQ
68. 3L If voltage is not applied to a group due for example to 1L and 2L failing all the outputs switch off even those in the second group The status LED continues to function in the same way S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 59 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A Process Module 1st supply group 2nd supply group 3rd supply group Data register and bus control 4th supply group 5th supply group 6th supply group 7th supply group 8th supply group LED control Figure 4 14 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 60 A5E00
69. 4 11 CPUs for M7 400 Setup Page Floppy Card Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Floppy Card and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 17 ml Flopp Card c bI lIIi Press F1 key for help Drive A Drive B pA o E 0 NONE ms y O E E E E a E 0 ede a ele a elise Shins L SE ely Ss ee 720 kbs 1 44 Mb i 1 44 Mb CANCEL ie ence MemCard Figure 11 17 Floppy Card Setup Page What is the Purpose of the Setup Page Drive A Drive B OK Button You can enter the diskette floppy disk drive in your mass storage module and the memory card drive in your CPU on this page At the first power up or after the key has been pressed during booting the BIOS setup detects whether the CPU has been expanded by a mass storage module and whether it therefore has a floppy disk drive available or not e fa floppy disk drive is available the BIOS assigns drive A to it by activating the option button 1 44 Mb e fa floppy disk drive is not available the BIOS assigns drive A to the memory card drive by activating the option button MemCara If you do not want either of the two drives entered activate the option button NONE The other Drive A settings are not significant at the present time Drive B stands only for the memory card drive within t
70. 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 83 Analog Modules Table 5 51 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit continued Parameter Value Range Parameter Type 6 Interference 60 Hz 50 Hz Static Channel suppression e Smoothing None Low Static Channel Average High e Ref junction None RTD on Channel 0 Reference temperature value dynamic 1 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings Smoothing of the Measured Values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5 6 The following figure indicates for the module in the case of a step response the number of module cycles after which the smoothed analog value applies at almost 100 depending on the smoothing setting The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input oes Step response for any analog input signal Signal variation in percent 100 200 Smoothing low average high Module cycles Figure 5 29 Step Response of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 84 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 19 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 AIl 8 x 14 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Resistance test e Tempera
71. 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out To ensure that a wire break check is carried out you require an external sensor circuit using a resistor of 10 to 18 kQ The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor This additional resistor is not required in the following cases e If two wire BEROs are used e lf you don t parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups You can only set the input delay for each group of channels In other words the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15 Note The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 must be equal to the value 0 or 8 otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly parameterized Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after acknowledgement Optimum Signal Propagation Delay You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings e Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0 1 ms e All the diagnoses load voltage error wire break are deactivated e Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 37 Digital Modules 4 10 2 B
72. 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF10 0ABO0 Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit has the following features e 8 inputs for voltage current measurement e 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement e Unlimited measuring range selection e 14 bit resolution e Particularly suitable for measuring temperatures e Temperature sensor types can be parameterized e Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves e Supply voltage 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2 wire transmitters e Analog section isolated from CPU e The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and the central ground point is120 VAC Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Meas CA range module o Bus S7 400 Bus control z LU an O Oo O lt __ Bus 7 400 Bus S7 400 Figure 5 27 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 77 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Q Figure 5 28 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x
73. 5A Programming package Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L Rated load voltage L Aggregate current of the outputs per supply group of 8 outputs Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L Load voltage L against backplane bus Current consumption From the backplane bus e Power supply and load voltage L no load Power dissipation of the module 4 72 24 VDC 24 VDC No 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC 500 VDC Max 200 mA Max 30 mA Typ 4 W Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Output voltage e At signal 1 Output current e At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range e At signal 0 leakage current Output delay for resistive load e From 0 to 1 e ART to 0 Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Triggering a digital input Switch r
74. 732 lt 02DC Windadiow 2000 3280 In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow f F380p is violated and lf EACOy is violated and If FE2Cy is violated and outputs 8000H outputs 8000 outputs 8000 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 22 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 3 2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels Introduction The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output channels of the analog output modules The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding output ranges Notes on How to Read the Tables Tables 5 31 to 5 33 contain the binary representation of the output values Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same starting at 5 34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units Binary Representation of the Output Ranges The output ranges shown in Tables 5 31 to 5 33 are defined in two s complement representation Table 5 31 Bipolar Output Ranges Output Data Word Value in o1 09 98 97 o 32511 117 589 Overrange hal 27648 100 000 0 003617 0 003617 27648 100 000 2 649 lt 100 004 0 32512 117 593 0 0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E0
75. 8 Channel error channel 9 Channel error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 Figure B 3 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module 7654321 Configuring parameter assignment error Wire break Sensor supply missing Figure B 4 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 5 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 7 65 432 1 one 2 o 0 alaL al ole on status 0 RUN 1 STOP 765 432 1 eves ol ool TOTO N error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B 5 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 7654321 enes TT Shaina type B 16 70 digital input 7 0 Byte 5 ele ae eel Number of alagnesiice bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long i 0 Byte 6 Tl TET LL Number of channels of the same type in one module 16 channels 76543210 Byter 1T Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 76543210 Byes Channel error channel 8 Channel error channel 9 Chann
76. 9 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A 2 een etn ee nen 4 80 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A en enn eens Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A een eens Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5A 2 ccc eee eens Levering the Measuring Range Module out of the Analog Input Module Inserting the Measuring Range Module into the Analog Input Module Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated Al 008 Connecting Non lsolated Sensors to an Isolated Al Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Al 0 0 cee eee Connecting Two Wire Transmitters to an Isolated Al Connecting Two Wire Transmitters to an SM 431 8 x 13 Bit Connecting Four Wire Transmitters to an Al 0 0 0 0 eee eee Connecting Four Wire Transmitters to an SM 431 8 x 13 Bit Four Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers on anAl
77. B C and EYS Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific module section The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Replugging Measuring Range Modules If you want to replug a measuring range module perform the following steps 1 Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module Figure 5 1 Levering the Measuring Range Module out of the Analog Input Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 29 Analog Modules 2 Insert the measuring range module correctly positioned 1 into the analog input module The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on module 2 Figure 5 2 Inserting the Measuring Range Module into the Analog Input Module Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules The next step is to install the module Caution This can result in damage If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly the module may be destroyed Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before connecting a sensor to the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications
78. C referred to input range e Voltage input 1V 0 25 10V 0 25 1Vto5V 0 5 e Current input 20mA 0 25 4mAto20mA 0 25 Temperature error with 0 01 reference to the input range Linearity error with reference 0 05 to the input range Repeat accuracy in the steady 0 01 state at 25 C referred to the input range Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts None None Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied No S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values Input resistance e Voltage e Current Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Maximum input current for current input destruction limit 1 V 10 MQ 10 V 100 MQ 1 V to 5 V 100 MQ 20 mA 50 Q 4 mA to 20 mA 50 Q 20 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms cycle factor 1 20 40 mA Connection of the signal sensor e For measuring voltage e For measuring current As two wire transmitter As four wire transmitter Load of the two wire transmitter Characteristic linearization S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Possible Possible Possible Max 750 Q No 9 103 Analog Modules 5 21 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit by means of m
79. DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 88 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Dimensions and Weight e Diagnostic Possible information readable Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 in millimeters Substitute value can be applied Yes programmable Number of outputs 16 At signal 1 L1 1 5 Vrms Length of cable Output current e Unshielded Max 600 m At signal 1 e Shielded Max 1000 m Rated value 2A Permitted range 100 mA to 2 A Rated load voltage L 20 to 132 VAC Permitted surge current Max 20 A 2 cycles e Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz re e At signal 0 leakage Max 2 5 mA at 30 V Total current of the outputs current Max 4 5 mA at 132 V With fan subassembly Output delay for resistive load Up to 40 C Max 16A 24 A F toroa j Up to 60 C Max 7A 16A rao ve e 6At 1 to 0 1 AC cycle Isolation e Between channels and Yes Zero cross inhibit voltage Non zero cross outputs backplane bus Size of the motor starter Max size 5 to NEMA e Between the channels Yes Lamp load Max 50 W In groups of 1 Parallel connection of 2 Permitted potential difference outputs Between Minterna and the 120 VAC e For redundant triggering of Possible only outputs outputs a load of the same group Between the outputs of the 250 VAC e To increase performance Not possible if
80. Diagnostic Message in STEP 7 Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions e The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module forwarded to the CPU and can be read out by the user program e The fault LED on the digital module lights up e lf you have parameterized Enable Diagnostic Interrupt in STEP 7 a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 Is called refer to Section 4 5 Reading Out Diagnostic Messages You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnosis refer to the STEP 7 online help system Diagnostics Using the INTF and EXTF LEDs Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF internal fault and EXTF external fault The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been eliminated Refer to the technical specifications of the modules starting at Section 4 7 to find out which digital modules have these fault LEDs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 9 Digital Modules Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules 4 10 The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with diagnostics capability You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix entit
81. EE E a a SE oem o E S ow ME oe ee TF No 18 yeNow S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 11 IM 463 2 Table 7 6 Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721 continued Connector Bundle Identification Foil Core Color Connector 50 Pin Contact Ident Sheath 5 SARRE 50 Pin Contact white brown 29 green 12 yellow 13 s Ze brown 46 No 19 gray 46 47 pink 47 30 blue 30 Spare ee 24 PR Co fe ee ae e S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 7 12 A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 7 8 Terminating Connector for IM 314 Introduction The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each chain is terminated with the 6ES5 760 1AA11 terminating connector Table 7 7 Assignment of the Terminator 760 1AA11 000000 8eeeeee Try yyy yy xy yy OM OW OW OY N 0000 0000008 000080 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 13 IM 463 2 7 9 Technical Specifications 6ES7463 2AA00 0AA0 Voltages Currents Potentials Programming package Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 1 Supply voltage from 5 V package S7 400 bus Dimensions and Weight Current consumption typ 1 2 A Dimensions max 1 32 A WxHxD mm 29X290x280 Power losses typ 6 W Weight 360 g ee Module Specific Data Number and type of 2 parallel symmetrical interfaces interfaces Cable length from IM
82. EXTF Possible For external fault e Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values input resistance e Resistance thermometer Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 35 V continuous 75 V for max 1s duty factor 1 20 e Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Connection of the sensor e For measuring resistance With three conductor Possible terminal With four conductor Possible terminal Characteristic linearization e For resistance thermometer Pt 100 0 00385 to DIN IEC 751 Ni 100 0 00618 to DIN 43760 Unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 125 Analog Modules 5 23 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bitin STEP 7 Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 71 Parameters of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No Destination CPU for 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Trigger for hardware i
83. FM address area The division of the 256 addresses within an expansion module can be seen from Table 12 2 Table 12 2 Division of Addresses Within an Expansion Module 00p to 3Fy Reserved In this address area the automation computer s BIOS makes basic settings in the expansion module such as assignment of interrupts etc Base Addresses of the Interface Submodules Special characteristics of the interface submodules such as the location of the AT compatible I O addresses IF 962 COM IF 962 LPT are set via the base addresses or the interface submodules are accessed exclusively via these base addresses IF 961 DIO IF 961 AlO The base address for an interface submodule is obtained from the sum of the slot dependent address of the expansion module and the interface submodule address within the expansion module You can find the resulting base addresses in Tables 12 3 and 12 4 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 11 M7 400 Expansions Table 12 3 Base Addresses of the Interface Submodules with FM 456 4 Interface Submodule Base Address in Submodule Receptacle Co40y Nummer 3 Co80y 1st EXM 478 in sloto n 1 Number 4 CoCO0y Number 5 Cp404 Number 6 Cp804 2nd EXM 478 in slotp n 2 Number 7 CpC0y Number 8 Cq404 Number 9 Cq804 3rd EXM 478 in slotq n 3 Number 10 CqC0y Number 11 n qz Number of the module slot in the mounting rack in hexadecimal notation Tab
84. IM 460 3 e IM 461 3 Power loss e IM 460 3 e IM 461 3 Typ 1350 mA Max 1550 mA Typ 590 mA Max 620 mA Typ 6750 mW Max 7750 mW Typ 2950 mW Max 3100 mW S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 17 Interface Modules 6 5 The Interface Modules IM 460 4 6ES7460 4AA01 OABO and IM 461 4 6ES7461 4AA01 0AA0 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 6ES7461 4AA01 0AAO IM 461 4 DIP switch Under cover Connector X1 Interface C1 Connector X2 Interface C2 OUT Figure 6 5 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 18 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Function The interface module pair IM 460 4 send IM and IM 461 4 receive IM are used for a remote link of up to a maximum 605 m exactly 600 m plus inputs outputs of 1 5 m in the line Parameterization Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed The permitted range is 1 to 21 If required you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using STEP 7 The default setting for the distance is 600 m Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length the sum of all the connecting cables per line as this will a
85. Integrative Does not go into the response time in the 80 mV input range Max 50 m Pamer oe wee assigned and with thermocouples Voltages Currents Potentials ma MGS renee Vol A9 e90 suppression f1 in Hz Rated load voltage L T a only e integration time in 16 7 20 MPRI milliseconds two wire transmitters Ae heed e Basic conversion time in 20 1 23 5 Reverse polarity protection Yes S FONE UPP ONIDE Additional conversion time 40 2 47 transmitters i or measuring resistance In e Supply current max 50 mA ms Short circuit proof Yes e Additional conversion time 4 3 4 3 Typ 1 67 mA for open circuit monitoring Constant measured current for in ms resistance type sensor e Additional conversion time 5 5 5 5 Isolation for measuring resistance Between channels and Yes mS backplane bus e Resolution including sign 14 14 bit Between the channels No Smoothing activated 16 16 bit Between channels and Yes Smoothing of the measured Parameters can be load voltage L values assigned in 4 Permitted potential difference a stages e Between inputs and Mana 120 VAC Basic execution time of the 161 188 module in ms all channels Ucn enabled e Between the inputs Ecm 120 VAC e Between Mana and 75 VDC 60 VAC Minternal Uiso Insulation tested with Between bus and L M 2120 VDC Between bus and analog section 2120 VDC Between bus and chassis 500 VDC ground Between analog section 707 VDC
86. L missing 0 mA 0 V parameter assignment of the module has been completed L only required with 2 wire transmitters S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 31 Analog Modules Behavior on Failure of the Supply Voltage Failure of the load power supply L of the diagnostics capable analog module is indicated in the case of parameterized two wire transmitters by the EXTF LED on the module Furthermore this information is made available on the module entry in diagnostic buffer Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment see Section 5 7 5 9 2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values Effect of Errors on Analog Modules with Diagnostics Capability Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter assignment You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 5 16 Effect of Range of Values on the Analog Input Module The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the range of values Table 5 39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values Measured Input Value LED Diagnostics Value In EXTF Rated range Measured value Overrange Measured underrange value Overflow 7FFFH Flashes Entered Diagnostic interrupt Underflow 8000H Fl
87. M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 25 Digital Modules Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts e Hardware interrupt e Diagnostic Interrupt Diagnostic functions e Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics Load voltage monitor Group error display For internal fault For external fault Channel error display F Diagnostic information can be displayed Monitoring for e Wire break Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Yes Green LED per group Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF None Yes l lt 1mA Substitute value can be applied Yes Number of outputs Output voltage e with load Output current e Rated value e Permitted range Additional redundant supply Short circuit protection 4 26 Min L 2 5 V 120 mA 0 to 150 mA Possible Yes electronic Input voltage Rated value For signal 1 e For signal 0 Input current At signal 1 At signal 0 Input characteristic curve Connection of two wire BEROs e Permitted bias current Internal preparation time for e Only hardware interrupt enable Input delay the same for both channel groups Input delay not the same for both channel groups e Enable hardware and diagnostic interrupts Input delay Parameters can be assigned Rated value Input frequency wit
88. M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 C 1 Spare Parts and Accessories Fors OOOO A IF module L2 DP 6ES7964 2AA00 0ABO Forinterfacing Networking SCS 6XV1830 3BH10 PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1500 0AA00 6GK1500 0AB00 6GK1500 0ODA00 For Fan Subassembly o Filters qty 10 for fan subassembly Cabinets Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for 8 MC 2281 7FC11 8DA1 SIMATIC S7 400 Extension set for SIMATIC S7 400 8 MC 1605 0BS70 0AA0QO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 2 A5E00069467 07 Spare Parts and Accessories Cables Connecting cables for printers with e Serial port COM 10 m 9AB4173 2BN10 0CAO e Parallel port Centronics 6AP1901 0AL00 Connecting cable for interface module 6ES7368 3BB00 0AA0 6ES7368 3BC00 0AA0 6ES7368 3BF00 0AA0 6ES7368 3CB00 0AA0 Connector housing gray e 9 pin V42254 A6000 G109 e 15 pin V42254 A6000 G115 e 25 pin V42254 A6000 G125 Connector housing black e 9 pin V42254 A6001 G309 e 15 pin V42254 A6001 G315 e 25 pin V42254 A6001 G325 Memory Submodules for M7 400 The following table lists the memory submodules that can be used in the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Product Desorption oreo MEM 478 Memory submodule for main memory 6ES7791 OEP00 0XA0 DRAM 2 x 8 Mbytes 3 3 V In the CPUs the memory submodules must always be used in pairs Spare Parts for M7 400 Modules Memory cards Flash EPROM 1
89. Module Specifications 7 6 A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 Plugging in the Connecting Cable To plug in the connecting cable follow the steps outlined below 1 Open the cover of the IM 463 2 2 Plug the new connecior of the connecting cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463 2 Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector 3 Screw the connector of the connecting cable onto the connector of the IM 463 2 4 Close the cover Selecting the Interface You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate Set the interface s here that you want to use Make the settings on the IM 463 2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode Selecting the Cable Length You select the cable length with the selector switch on the front plate Set the range corresponding to the chain length Make the settings on the IM 463 2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Ier IM 463 2 7 9 Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314 Introduction To operate the IM 463 2 you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the address area of the S5 I O modules Setting the S5 Expansion Unit You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1 BR2 and BRS on the IM 314 The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the IM 314 and which setting corresponds to
90. RH lt 60 no condensation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 17 General Technical Specifications 1 5 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Test Voltages Insulation resistance was demonstrated in routine testing with the following test voltages in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Table 1 16 Test Voltages Circuits with Rated Voltage U to Other Circuits or Test Voltage Ground 0 V lt Ue lt 50 V 350 V 50 V lt Ue lt 100 V 700 V 100 V lt Ue lt 150 V 1300 V 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V 2200 V Protection Class Safety class to IEC 60536 VDE 0106 Part 1 In other words a connection is required from the protective conductor to the power supply module Protection Against Ingress of Foreign Bodies and Water Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 60529 In other words there is protection against contact with standard probes There is no special protection against the ingress of water S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 18 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications 1 6 Using S7 400 in a zone 2 explosion risk area You will find important information in different languages in the chapters below Chapter overview S7 400 n k ytt rajahdysvaarannetuilla alueilla vy hyke 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 19 General Technical Specification
91. Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 0 0 ee Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16x 16 Bit Points to Note when Checking for Underflow 000005 Parameters of the SM 431 Al8x RTD x 16 Bit Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al8x RTD x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 74 5 75 5 76 5 77 5 78 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 3 7 4 7 6 rE 8 1 8 2 9 1 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 Contents Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 0 0 eee eee 5 135 How Response Times Depend on the Parameterized Interference Frequency Suppression and Smoothing of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 0 8 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 AI 8 x 16 Bit Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 AI 8 x 16 Bit Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432 AO8 x 13 Bit Interface Modules of the 87 400 0 ccc ene Terminators for the Receive IMS 0 0 ccc eee eee ee Connecting Cable for Interface Modules 0 000 ce eee eee S5 Interface Modules 0 ce ene teen eens LEDs Of t
92. S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 22 A5E00069467 07 Maintenance General Technical Specifications If repair is necessary the affected module must be sent to the production location Repairs can only be carried out there Special Conditions 1 The SIMATIC S7 400 must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing These must comply with the IP 54 in accordance with EN 60529 degree of protection as a minimum The environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken into account There must be a manufacturer s declaration for zone 2 available for the housing in accordance with EN 50021 If a temperature of gt 70 C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this housing under operating conditions or if a temperature of gt 80 C can be reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions the temperature related properties of the cables must correspond to the temperatures actually measured The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection and Section 7 2 in accordance with EN 50021 All devices including switches etc that are connected to the inputs and outputs of S7 400 systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion protection Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot be exceeded by more than 40 Ambient temperature range 0 C to 60 C A sign containing the
93. Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 7 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies Signaling Concept The signaling concept of the 24 VDC fan subassembly is identical to the signaling concept of the 120 230 VAC fan subassembly Fuse Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links 5 x 20 mm conforming to DIN e 1 0 AT for 24 V The fuse is already installed on shipping from the factory Shielding Clamps If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied do not install them in the fan subassembly Technical Specifications Dimensions WxHxD mm 482 5x109 5x235 Input voltage Weight appr 2000 g e Nominal value DC 24 V Kabeldurchmesser 3 bis 9 mm e Valid range ai 19 2 V up to 30 Nominal Sizes o Nominalsizes _ ___Y Pie o i Lifespan of the fans 30 2 V at40 C 70000 h Starting current 0 9 A at 24 V at75 C 25000 h Fuses 10AT Max contact load of relay con tacts 1 to 6 e Switching voltage e Switching current e without fan N Caution Danger of damage to equipment If you insert the monitoring PCB in the wrong position in the fan subassembly the fan subassembly may be damaged During maintenance of the unit make sure you do not replace the monitoring PCB in the wrong position Power consumption e with fan Monitoring Function In the case of a fault defective fans the fans are not switched off Once you have replaced the defective fan s the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon
94. Suitable as active high and active low input Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable input delays The status LEDs indicate the process status S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Process Front connector jumper ooOoNgOQ aGAAOUAN gt Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation Adaptation QDU Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Inp Diagnostics Input Inp Diagnostics Input Diagnosti Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Inp Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnostics Input Diagnosti Digital Modules ho apd fo O o 3 Q o C O C a O D then Q Figure 4 9 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 45 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM
95. Underrange 1840 F8D0y 153 2 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E Table 5 23 Analog Value Representation for Type E Units n Hexade fa K cimal 12000 2EEOY i 21920 55A0y 14732 398Cy z Overrange 10001 27114 18338 47A24 12742 31C6y 10000 2710 18320 47904 1273 2 12732 31BCy Rated range 2700 F574 4540 EE44 00004 lt 270 0 lt F5744 lt 454 0 lt EE44 lt 0000y In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow If FOC4y is violated and lf FB70y is violated and if E5D4y is violated and outputs 8000H outputs 8000H outputs 8000 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 18 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J Table 5 24 Analog Value Representation for Type J Units 7 Hexade Ax K cimal 14500 38A44 26420 67344 17232 4350H 3 Overrange 12010 2EEAy 21938 55B2y 14742 39964 12000 2EE0O 21920 55A0y 14732 ic Rated range 2100 F7CCy 3460 F27Cy 632 02784 lt F7CCy lt 346 0 lt F27C lt 63 2 lt 632 ot 00 3460 0278 Underflow In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the neg
96. Voltages Currents Potentials oo 0 leakage Max 2 6 mA R L1 7 264 VA fase n CACNOTAJ nee z Output delay for resistive load Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz e From 0 to 1 Max 1 ms Total current of the outputs per group AGT tog Not more than 1 AC scan cycle With fan subassembly P Up to 40 C Max 4 A GA Minimum eae Cuman 10m Up to 60 C Max 2 A 5A Zeo cross inhibit voltage pele ie cross outputs eit Size of the motor starter Max size 5 to NEMA ae Lamp load Max 50 W Between channels and Yes backplane bus Parallel connection of 2 outputs ne PENESMINE Canne nee e For redundant triggering of Possible only outputs In groups of 4 a load connected to the same Permitted potential difference load Between the outputs of the 500 VAC Triggering a digital input Possible different groups Switch rate Insulation resistance 4000 VAC e For resistive load Max 10 Hz Current consumption e For inductive load to Max 0 5 Hz e From the backplane bus Max 400 mA IEC 947 5 1 AC 15 e From load voltage L 1 5 mA e For lamp load 1 Hz without load Short circuit protection of the Fuse 8 A 250 V per Power dissipation of the Typ 16 W output group module e Min current required for Min 100 A Status Interrupts Diagnostics fuse to blow Status display Green LED per s Max response time Max 100 ms channel Replacement fuses Fuse 8 A quick acting Interrupts None e Wickmann 194 1800 0 Diagnostic f
97. and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy Message Module malfunction An error detected by the module has occurred Internal malfunction The module has detected an error within the programmable controller External malfunction The module has detected an error outside the programmable controller There is a channel Indicates that only certain channels error are faulty No external auxiliary Load voltage to supply the 2 wire Feed supply L voltage transmitter is missing on terminals L and M No front connector Jumper between connections 1 and Install jumper 2 in the front connector missing Parameters have not The module requires the information Message queued after power on until been assigned tothe as to whether it should work with parameter transmission by the CPU has module system default parameters or with been completed parameterize the your parameters module as required Wrong parameters A parameter or combination of Reassign module parameter parameters is incorrect impermissible measurement range for example Channel information Channel error present the module available can supply additional channel information Measuring range One or more measuring range Insert the measuring range modules on the module modules is missing or incorrectly module according to the parameter incorrect missing inserted assignment of the type of measurement and the measurement range STOP operating mode Module not par
98. and Resistors 5 12 Connecting Thermocouples 0c e eee e cece eee eens S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 XIII Contents 5 13 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs 08 5 14 Connecting Loads Actuators to Voltage Outputs 05 5 15 Connecting Loads Actuators to Current Outputs 005 5 16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 0 ccc eee e eee eens 5 17 Analog Module Interrupts 0 0c c ccc cee eens 5 18 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al8 x 13 Bit 6ES7431 1KFOO OABO 5 18 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 0008 5 18 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 13 Bit 5 19 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF10 O0ABO 5 19 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 08 5 19 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al8 14 Bit 5 20 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al8 x 4 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO 5 20 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 08 5 20 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 0 ee 5 21 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 6ES7431 OHHOO OABO 5 98 5 21 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 8 5 103 5 21 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM431 Al16 x 13 Bit
99. as free should be kept free when using a memory manager SRAM Area The size of the SRAM with battery backup is 64 Kbytes net for data blocks 56 Kbytes If the battery is removed and inserted again when there is no power connected the SRAM content will be lost This is indicated by the BAF LED S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 40 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 Memory Areas for AT Cards AT cards which are inserted in the expansion module ATM 478 can occupy the following memory areas Range M7 RMOS32 M7 RMOS32 with MS DOS M7 RMOS32 with Without EMS With EMS MS Windows 1 The area is only available if no memory card is present 2 Under M7 RMOS322 with MS Windows or if the driver software under MS DOS requires expanded memory EMS the memory manager EMM386 occupies 64K in the area DOOOOH to E7FFFH because it must be operated in EMS mode I O Address Area Addressing the ISA compatible input output components is done in the I O area under the addresses from 0100 to OSFFH The addresses specified by the ISA architecture are used here In contrast to the original AT the I O addresses in the CPUs are completely decoded so that the addresses above 03 FFH can be used for addressing M7 400 specific hardware I O Address Area for AT Adapter Modules If you are using AT adapter modules the following address areas are available for addressing e 0200 to OSFFY e Except for the area 3 E
100. as the fans have reached the required speed Any faults that occur are not stored When you switch on the fan subassembly the fans start running After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 8 A5E00069467 07 RS 485 Repeater In this Chapter In this chapter you will find a detailed description of the RS 485 repeater Included in the description are e The purpose of the RS 485 repeater e The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters e The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals e Information about grounded and non grounded operation e Technical specifications and the block diagram Further Information You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware and Installation in the Chapter Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS DP network Chapter Overview Seaion opon e 10 1 Application and Characteristics 6ES7972 0AA01 0XA0 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater 6ES7972 0AA01 0XA0 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Technical Specifications S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 10 1 RS 485 Repeater 10 1 Application and Characteristics 6ES7972 0AA01 0XA0 What is an RS 485 Repeater The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments
101. assignment in STOP mode of the CPU When you have set all the parameters download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU When there is a transition from STOP to RUN mode the CPU transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules Static and dynamic parameters The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU as described above In addition you can modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program in an S7 programmable controller by means of SFCs Note however that after a change from RUN STOP STOP RUN of the CPU the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A Table 4 5 Static and dynamic parameters of the digital modules Parameter Settable with CPU Operating Mode PG STEP 7 HWCOMFIG STOP Dynamic PG STEP 7 HWCONFIG STOP SFC 55 in the user program S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 6 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 3 1 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules The parameterized digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below depending on functionality Refer to the section on a particular digital module starting from Section 4 7 to find out which subset it is capable of using Don t forget that some digital modules have different time de
102. be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 5 4 The corresponding table in Section 5 22 2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range In addition the necessary settings are embossed on the module Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 64 Parameters of the SM 431 Al16 x 16 Bit Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No Destination CPU for 1 to 4 Static Module interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt Yes no No Static Channel e End of scan cycle reached at input e High limit 32511 to 32512 E Dynamic Channel e Low limit 32512 to 32511 Diagnostics Wire break vecno No Reference channel Y No es no error No Static Channel Yes no Underflow No Yes no Overflow vesino No Short circuit to M S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 114 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 64 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit continued Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Measurement e Measuring type Disabled U U Voltage 4DMU Cur
103. boot drive and the method for the main memory test Boot Sequence By activating the relevant option button you select here the drive from which the CPU is to boot at power up e Drive A represents the floppy disk drive or memory card depending on which of them has been entered as Drive A in the Floppy Card setup page If there is no medium with boot capability in the floppy disk drive the system will next try to boot from the memory card Floppy Card setup page gt Drive B e Drive C represents the hard disk drive It is possible to designate a primary and secondary drive that is if there is no boot program in the primary drive the system boots automatically from the secondary drive if there is a boot program there If neither Drive A nor Drive C contain a boot program a message on the screen prompts you to insert a medium with boot capability and to confirm this by pressing S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 36 A5E00069467 07 Halt On CPUs for M7 400 Here you can choose which error messages are displayed in an error window during booting Displaying an error window delays booting by approximately 2 seconds Keyboard State Typematic Settings Enabled If you activate this check box the values Typematic Rate and Typematic Delay are set by the BIOS Typematic Rate This value is used to set the maximum keyboard rate in characters per second Typematic Del
104. can be triggered by the mode selector or following power on or by means of an operator input on the programming device Rebooting and restarting are the two different types of startup Depending on the position of the mode selector either a reboot or restart is executed in the case of the S7 400 A reboot is executed in the case of the M7 300 400 STEP 7 Parameter assignment and programming software for the parameterization and creation of user programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers Substitute value Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal output modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process value when signal input modules have failed The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 old value retained substitute value 0 or 1 They are values which the output s have to output in the event of a CPU STOP SYNC Control command of the gt master to the slave freeze the outputs at their current value System data block SDBs system data blocks are data areas on the central processing unit which contain system settings and module parameters The system data blocks are created and modified in STEP 7 System diagnostics System diagnostics is the detection analysis and reporting of errors that occur within the programmable controller Examples of such errors are program errors or failures on modules System errors can be indicated with LED displays
105. case you must run the compensating lines right up to the analog module The internal temperature sensor acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation Theory of Operation of External Compensation with Compensating Box If you employ external compensation the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box for example The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature The reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouple s compensating leads If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature the temperature sensitive bridge resistance changes This results in a positive or negative compensating voltage which is added to the thermo e m f Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings M Measuring line positive M _ Measuring line negative lox Constant current lead positive Ic_ Constant current lead negative Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 8 with its genera
106. ce dt eed al 4 Number of channels of the same type in one module 8 channels 7654321 0 Byter 1111111 Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 Figure B 21 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 16 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 8 to 23 of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Data record 1 with bytes 8 to 23 contains channel specific diagnostic data The following figure shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes bytes 8 10 to 22 for a channel of the module Configuring parameter assignment error Wire break Underflow Overflow Figure B 22 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit The following figure shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes bytes 9 11 to 23 for a channel of the module User connection not wired Open conductor in direction Open conductor in direction Run time calibration error Underrange or overrange Open conductor in the current source User calibration doesn t correspond to the parameter assignment Figure B 23 Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 17 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 7654321
107. connect the power supply modules to a 230 V power system it might damage the power supply modules Warranty is excluded in such a case Set the voltage selector on these AC power supply modules to the line voltage S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 11 Power Supply Modules Cover The battery compartment battery selector switch voltage selector switch and power connection are housed under one cover The cover must remain closed during operation in order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the battery connections If you have to carry out measurements on a module you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts Use grounded measuring devices only S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 12 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules 3 5 Fault Error Messages via LEDs Introduction The power supply modules of the S7 400 indicate module faults and backup battery faults via LEDs on the front plate Overview of the Fault Error Messages Table 3 7 Error messages of the power supply modules Module fault INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC Backup battery fault Power supplies with 1 backup battery BAF BATTF Power supplies with 2 backup batteries BAF BATT1F BATT2F INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF 5 VDC and 24 VDC LEDs and li
108. directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive and are UL CSA certified as such To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability flame retardance stability and shock hazard protection the following alternative types of installation are specified e Installation in a suitable cabinet e Installation in a suitable housing e Installation in a suitably equipped enclosed operating area 1 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Introduction In this section you will find information on the noise immunity of S7 400 M7 400 modules and on radio interference suppression All the components of S7 400 M7 400 systems meet the requirements of the standards that apply in Europe provided they are installed in accordance with all the appropriate regulations see Installation Manual Chapters 2 and 4 Definition of EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment Warning Personal injury or property damage can result Installation of expansions that have not been approved for the S7 400 M7 400 can result in violations of the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility Use only expansions that have been approved for the system S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 9 General Technical Specificatio
109. directly on the resistance thermometer Q D a O O O O Figure 5 14 Four Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers on an Al S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 51 Analog Modules Three Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer During three conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer you must set up a jumper between M and I and SE and AGND see Figure 5 15 The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the module and the resistance thermometer resistor Make sure that the connected cables Ic and M and the cables SO and SE are directly connected to the resistance thermometer To get an accurate measurement make sure that the connected cables M Ic and Ic and the cables SE SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross section 6166618 6 090 Figure 5 15 Three Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Al Two Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer 5 52 With a two conductor connection you must insert jumpers on the module between M and Ic and between M_ and Ic_ Note Cable resistance is also measured Figure 5 16 Two Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Al S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 12 Connecting Thermocouples Design of Thermocouples A
110. dissipation of the module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions 4 64 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 600 g 24 VDC 24 VDC Max 3A Max 2A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC 500 VDC Max 160 mA Max 30 mA Typ 5 W Green LED per channel None None Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range e At signal 0 leakage current Output delay for resistive load e From 0 to 1 e At 1 to 0 Load resistor range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Triggering a digital input Switch rate e For resistive load e For inductive load to IEC 947 51 DC 13 e For lamp load Limit internal of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to Short circuit protection of output e Threshold on Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage e At signal 1 Min L 0 5 V 2A 5 mA to 2 4 A Max 0 5 mA Max 1 ms Max 1 ms 24 Q to 4 KQ Max 10 W Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible 100 Hz 0 2 Hz at 1 A 0 1 Hz at 2A Max 10 Hz Max 30 V Electronically cyclic 2 8 Ato6A 1 A supply group always consists of two adjacent channels starting with channel 0 Channels 0 and 1 2 and 3 and so on up to 14 and 15 therefore form one supply group 2 Foll
111. e S gt 2 xe c San a O Sam m e ho c ie m LLI al Figure 4 22 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 92 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A Programming package Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 package Data for Selecting an Actuator Max 5A 10 mA Fuse 6 A quick acting Continuous thermal current Minimum load current Dimensions and Weight External fuse for relay outputs D mencione W SRD BOS EU AI Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts in millimeters e For resistive load Weight Approx 700 g Data for Specific Module vollade sureni an Number of outputs 16 cyc typ Length of cable 30 VDC 5 0 A 0 18 mill e Unshielded Max 600 m E F a h Shielded Max 1000 m 230 VAC 50A 0 18 mill volloges Currents Potentials e For inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 Total current of the outputs 13 DC 15 AC per group Voltage Current No of With fan subassembly switching Up to 40 C Max 10A 10A cyc typ Up to 60 C Max 5 A 10A 30 VDC 5 0A 0 1 mill Isolation eee may Between channels and Yes 230 VAC 5 0A 0 1 mill backplane bus pf 0 4 e Between the channels Yes Size of the motor starter Max size 5 to NEMA In groups of 2 Lamp load Max 60 W posi potential C
112. em entradas e sa das dos sistemas do S7 400 devem possuir a licen a para a prote o de explos o do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC 5 Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tens o nominal atrav s de transit rios n o possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 6 rea de temperatura ambiente 0 C at 60 C 7 No mbito da caixa deve ser colocada em um ponto bem vis vel ap s a sua abertura uma placa com a seguinte advert ncia Advert ncia A carca a deve ser aberta apenas por um breve per odo de tempo por ex para diagn stico visual N o acione nenhum interruptor n o retire ou conecte nenhum componente e n o separe nenhum fio el trico liga es de tomada Esta advert ncia poder ser ignorada caso se saiba que n o h atmosfera alguma sujeita ao perigo de explos o Lista dos componentes autorizados A lista com os componentes autorizados encontram se na Internet http www4 ad siemens de view cs sob o numero de ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 39 General Technical Specifications 1 6 11 Xpnon TNS ouoKkeuns S 400 oz Etrikivouvn yia Ekpn n Trepioxn Cwvn 2 Zwvn 2 Ol ETTIKIVOUVEG yia EKONEN TTEPIOXES KWPICOVTA OE CWVv_EG Ol Cwvec SIAMEPOUV OUUQWVO HE TNV THOAVOTNHTA UTTAPENG EVvOC IKAVOU yia EKPNEN TIEPIBGAAOVTOC Kivduvos kpn n Napadeiypa 2 EKONKTIKO TrEpIBGAAOV aepiou MEeploxEs YUPW ATTO PAAVTCWTEG TTAMOUOIACETAI UOVO OTTAVIA KAI OUVOEO
113. en eet n enna 8 3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP 0 ccc eee 8 3 1 BUS COMME CON a e ere aren dep pon oe amend eh pera Be cat Aone Aaa 8 anda beara 8 3 2 Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP 0 0 ccc eee eee 8 3 3 Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to the IM 467 FO 8 4 Technical Specifications 0 0 0 cc ee eee eens 8 4 1 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 0 ccc eee 8 4 2 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 FO 9 Cable Duct and Fan SubassemblieS 0ccceeee cere eee eee eens 9 1 Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies 0000 c ee eee 9 2 Cable Duct 6ES7408 OTAOO OAAO 0 ccc eee 9 4 9 3 The 120 230 VAC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1TBOO OXA0O 9 5 9 4 The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1TAOO OXA0 9 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 XV Contents 10 R9455 Repeal l cect ances mew enews ates cues chewed Gest west sae esen 10 1 Application and Characteristics 6ES7972 0AA01 OXA0 10 2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater 6ES7972 0AA01 0XA0 10 3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation 10 4 Technical Specifications 0 0 eee teens 11 CPUS for M7 400 o 02ccsctuawntcue ste we rinan AKEren E Mhene due 11 1 Performance FeatureS sw eee e ee eeaes 11 2 Technical Specifications 0 eee een nes 11 3 FUNCION EICMEMS 22
114. endast Oppnas under kort tid t ex for visuell diagnos Anvand darvid inga brytare lossa eller anslut inga enheter och franskilj inga elektriska ledningar insticksanslutningar Ingen hansyn maste tas till denna varning om det ar sakert att det inte rader n gon explosionsfarlig atmosf r Lista over godk nda komponentgrupper Lista ver godk nda enheter terfinns i Internet http www4 ad siemens de view cs under bidrags ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 37 General Technical Specifications 1 6 10 Uso do S7 400 em area exposta ao perigo de explos o 2 Zona 2 As areas expostas ao perigo de explosao sao divididas em zonas As zonas sao diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da exist ncia de uma atmosfera explosiva Zona _ Perigo de explos o Exemplo S S raramente e por um breve reas em torno de liga es flangeadas per odo de tempo surgem com veda es chatas em tubula es em atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados rea segura N o fora da zona 2 Aplica es padr o de periferia descentralizada A seguir o encontrar avisos importantes para a instala o do SIMATIC S7 400 em rea exposta ao perigo de explos o Mais informa es Para obter mais informa es sobre os diversos componentes S7 400 consulte o manual Local de produ o Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe German
115. flexible 24 VDC 1 0A sheath cable Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVss Cable diameter 3 to 9mm 24 VDC 200 mVss Input Rating Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs Input voltage 24 VDC 500 mVs Rated value 24 48 60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC 200 mA base e Permitted range Static load required 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC Idling proof Dynamic no base load required 18 5 VDC to 75 5 VDC Other Parameters Protection class in accordance l with protective Rated input current 7 3 A 3 45 A 2 75 A Starting current inrush Peak value 56A half value width 1 5 ms with IEC 60536 grounding conductor Overvoltage category lI Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2S VDE 0160 curve B2 Pollution severity 2 Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V 2300 VDC primary lt gt PE Buffering of power failures gt 20ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 ata repeat rate of 1 s Power input 175 W Power loss 51 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup batteries optional 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 41 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 Structure of the Chapter The present cha
116. goes dark again and then remains lit 3 Turn the switch back to the STOP position and then in the next 3 seconds to the MRES position again and back to STOP Result The STOP LED flashes for approximately 3 seconds at 2 Hz a memory reset is being carried out and then remains lit 4 lf the STOP LED does not flash or other LEDs light up or flash you must repeat steps 2 and 3 Note Resetting by activating MRES is controlled by the system software If this has not been started the CPU must be reset by switching the power supply off and on If a keyboard is connected to the CPU it is also possible to initiate a complete restart via hot keys see Table 11 7 on page 11 19 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 10 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 4 Submodule Receptacles for Interface Submodules Submodule Receptacle Definition The submodule receptacle is a slot for a submodule The CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 have a receptacle for the memory card and two submodule receptacles for interface submodules Figure 11 4 shows the position of the two receptacles for interface submodules on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Submodule _ receptacle Figure 11 4 Position of the Receptacles for Interface Submodules on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 11 CPUs for M7 400 Numbering o
117. if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process or if the CC is switched off DIP DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack rack Front connector X1 Upper connector input for the connecting cable from the previous Fa er Up esp Tor e esi eo TT interface module Front connector X2 Lower connector output for the connecting cable to the next roe perac module or rhe terminlar o S S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 20 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Technical Specifications of the IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 Dimensions W x H x D mm 25 x 290 x 280 Weight e IM 460 4 e IM 461 4 Current consumption from the S7 400 bus 5 VDC Typ 1350 mA IM 460 4 Max 1550 mA Typ 590 mA IM 461 4 Max 620 mA Power loss e IM 460 4 Typ 6750 mW Max 7750 mW e IM 461 4 Typ 2950 mW Max 3100 mW Compatibility You cannot use the IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 interface modules with CPUs that have the following order numbers e 6ES7412 1XF00 0ABO e 6ES7413 1XG00 0ABO e 6ES7413 2XG00 0ABO e 6ES7414 1XG00 0ABO e 6ES7414 2XG00 0AB0 e 6ES7416 1XJ00 0ABO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 21 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 Chapter Overview Seaton e CP Pin Assignments of the 72
118. in millimeters Weight 25 XxX 290 x 210 Approx 800 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation e Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the outputs of the different groups Insulation resistance Current consumption e From the backplane bus From load voltage L without load Power dissipation of the module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Group error display For internal fault 79 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz With fan subassembly Max 16A 24 A Max 8 A 20 A Yes Yes 500 VAC 4000 VAC Max 250 mA Max 1 5 mA Typ 16 W Green LED per channel None Parameters cannot be assigned Red LED INTF failed fuse For external fault Digital Modules Red LED EXTF failed load voltage Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage e At signal 1 Output current At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current per group e At signal 0 leakage current Output delay for resistive load amp From 19 0 to 4 7 At 1 to 0 Minimum load current Zero c
119. inserted in permitted slots Take particular notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on subrack II and slot 9 on subrack I Technical Specifications of the UR2 H Rack Dimensions W x H x D in mm 482 5 x 290 x 27 5 Weight in kg 3 4 1 as of version 03 Buses Segmented I O bus segmented communication bus S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 6 A5E00069467 07 Racks 2 4 The Rack CR2 6ES7401 2TA01 0AA0 Introduction The CR2 rack is used for assembling segmented central racks The CR2 has both an I O bus and a communication bus The I O bus is split into two local bus segments with 10 or 8 slots Suitable Modules for the CR2 You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack e All S7 400 modules with the exception of receive IMs Structure of the CR2 Segment 1 Segment 2 I I HI 3 Al S 6 7 g 3l Al S 6l 7 3i 4 Si 6l 7 12 131 1415116
120. integrating conversion methods the integration time has a direct influence on the conversion time The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 refer to Section 4 3 1 To find out the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned starting at Section 5 18 Scan Time of Analog Input Channels Analog to digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to the memory and or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially in other words the analog input channels are converted one after the other The scan time in other words the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n channel analog module Conversion time channel 1 channel 2 Cycle time l Y Conversion time channel n Figure 5 4 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 35 Analog Modules Basic Execution Time of the Analog Input Channels The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels Setting the Smoothing of Analog Values You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP
121. measurement Vol Resi h OC oltage measurement esistance thermometer Current measurement INTF 1 Bas EXTF o 3 4 L L 5 A MO CHo Wordo MO 4 yia MO CHO Wordo 3 gt Mi CH1 Word2 ICO 9 M1 IC0 10 Be M2 CH2 Word4 M1 ae es Mi CH2 Word4 13 Q M3 CH3 Word6 IC1 tal M3 IC1 15 LF Leg M2 _ CH4 Word 8 bs M5 CH5 Word10 C2 19 M5 IC2 20 ArT M6 CH6 Word12 M e Hg M3 CH6 Word12 23 M7 CH7 Word14 C3 24 M7 IC3 25 26 27 T M8 CH8 Wordi6 M4 ERIE M8 M4 CH8 Word 16 30 M9 CH9 Word 18 IC4 31 M9 IC4 32 AEC M10 CH10 Word20 Ms5 M10 M5 CH10 Word 20 35 A Mil CH11 Word22 C5 36 M11 IC5 37 38 T M12 CH12 Word24 M6 oN M12 M6 CH12 Word24 ARE M13 CH13 Word26 C6 41 M13 IC6 42 43 i M14 H14 Word28 M alien M14 M7 CH14 Word 28 P T M15 CH15 Word30 1C7 46 M15 i07 47 4g M M Figure 5 36 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 109 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Programming package Associated programming package Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of inputs e For resistance type sensor Length of cable e Shielded in the input ranges 80 mV and with thermocoupl
122. module and the sensors are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 8 with its generally applicable information for connecting sensors Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit M Ground terminal L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Uy Auxiliary supply Mi Current measuring line positive My Voltage measuring line positive Supply Voltage of the Sensors The two wire transmitter receives its short circuit proof power supply via the terminals of the analog input module This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current Because the two wire transmitter is supplied by the module you must not ground the M cables Four wire transmitters require a separate supply voltage Uy auxiliary supply S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 47 Analog Modules Connecting Two Wire Transmitters Sensor for example pressure gauge Two wire ransmitter Pe 2d transmitte P Two wire transmitter t ae O Q Q 2 Q O O O O O Connection required in the case of modules with Mana Figure 5 10 Connecting Two Wire Transmitters to an Isolated Al SM 4
123. modules that are available here and a description 2 Information that is generally available in other words affects all analog modules such as parameter assignment and diagnostics 3 Information that refers to specific modules for example characteristics diagram of connections and block diagram technical specifications and special characteristics of the module a For analog input modules b For analog output modules STEP 7 Blocks for Analog Functions You can use blocks FC 100 to FC 111 to read and output analog values in STEP 7 You will find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called S5 S7 Converting Blocks for a description refer to the STEP 7 online help system for the FCs Additional Information Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter records data records 0 and 1 in the system data You must be familiar with this structure if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data data records 0 1 in the system data You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 1 Analog Modules Chapter Overview 5 2 Secon Description Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules Analog Value Representat
124. of their performance features in Table 11 1 The tables in Sections 11 1 and 11 2 give an overview of the performance features and technical specifications of the CPUs Following this overview the modules are described in detail Chapter Overview CA 11 1 Performance Features I O Addresses Main Memory and Interrupt Assignments E 11 40 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 1 CPUs for M7 400 11 1 Performance Features Introduction There are two CPUs with different clock frequencies available for use with the automation computer Table 11 1 gives you an overview of the most important performance features of these CPUs Table 11 1 Performance Features of the CPUs Performance Features CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 6ES7486 3AA00 0AB0 6ES7488 3AA00 0AB0 MEM 478 DRAM memory submodules for main memory e Expansion capability 16 Mbytes 16 Mbytes e Supply voltage 3 3 V 3 3 V Second level cache ae 250 Kbytes Submodule receptacles for interface submodules Connection of expansions MPI a o see M7 SYS User Manual S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 2 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 2 Technical Specifications The following table contains the technical specifications of the CPUs for the M7 400 automation computer Table 11 2 Technical Specifications of the CPUs CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 6ES7486 3AA00 0AB0 6ES7488 3AA00 0AB0 N
125. of this connection Voc no load voltage 15V Vmax 15V Isc short circuit current 50 mA Imax 50 mA Ca Battery capacity Ci 25 nF maximum power supply La Battery inductance Li 2 mH maximum power supply The battery power supply which supplies the non ingnitable connection must have the following values Battery Power supply a CPU iput Ext Batt incl cabel ee vas TM Oooo e e mo S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 6 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Battery Power supply _ CPU iit Ext Batt incl cable D S E seers The batteries used must have the following properties e Battery technology Li SOCL2 e Model AA e Voltage 3 6 V The batteries stipulated by Siemens fulfil requirements that go beyond the ones mentioned above You may only use batteries approved by Siemens Note If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable you can use the following values Cc 197 pF m 60 pF ft Le 0 66 pF m 0 2 mH ft Example The battery of type 4022 from Varta together with a 1 5 m long cable and a plug connection of type 02 02 1500 from Leonhardy meet these conditions S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 7 General Technical Specifications FM Approval APPROVED 1 8 Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611 Class I Division 2 Group A B C D T
126. or in STEP 7 System function A system function SFC is a function integrated in the operating system of the CPU that can be called in the STEP 7 user program like a function gt FC as required S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 18 A5E00069467 07 Glossary System function block A system function block SFB is a gt function block integrated in the operating system of the CPU that can be called in the STEP 7 user program like a function block FB as required The associated instance data block is in working memory Temperature coefficient Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures with a resistance thermometer RTD The temperature coefficient you select de pends on the resistance thermometer being used to DIN standard Transmission rate Rate of data transmission bit s Two conductor three conductor four conductor connection Method of connection to the module for example of resistance thermometers resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the voltage output of an analog output module Two wire transmitter four wire transmitter Kind of transmitter two wire transmitter supply via terminals of the analog input module four wire transmitter supply via separate terminals of the transmitter Ungrounded Without galvanic connection to ground User program The user program contains all the statements decla
127. other one fails There is no loss of operation Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in operation No loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective voltages when the modules are removed or inserted Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if it fails Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the output voltage of the other power supply module A redundant battery concept backup concept is only provided when two backup batteries are used in each of the power supply modules If only one battery is used in each module only non redundant backup is possible since both batteries are being used at the same time The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove interrupt default STOP Only if used in the second segment of the CR 2 is no message sent if the power supply module fails If two power supply modules are inserted but only one is switched on there is a power up delay of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on Note The check box Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration should be activated in the Properties dialog box of the CPU S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 5 Power Supply Modules 3 3 Backup Battery Option Introduction The power supply modules of the S7 400 have a battery compar
128. package using the M7 SYS functions System Software for Detailed description of the M7 SYS functions M7 300 400 System and and data structures listing of messages Standard Functions types Reference Manual System Software for Installing and configuring the operating M7 300 400 Installation and system and system software Operation User Manual Recycling and Disposal The S7 400 is environmentally friendly and can thus recyclable Consult a certified disposal agency for electronics junk to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environmentally friendly manner Further Support If you have any technical questions please get in touch with your Siemens representative or agent responsible http www siemens com automation partner Training Centers Siemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC S7 automation system Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg Germany for details Telephone 49 911 895 3200 Internet http www sitrain com S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Vil Preface A amp D Technical Support Worldwide available 24 hours a day Johnson d Worldwide Nuernberg Technical Support 24 hours a day 365 days a year Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 E Mail adsupport siemens com GMT 1 00 Europe Africa Nuernberg Authorizati
129. periferie Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de SIMATIC S7 400 in het explosief gebied Verdere informatie In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de verschillende S7 400 modulen Productieplaats Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Vergunning x 3G EExnAIIT3 76 conform EN 50021 1999 Keuringsnummer KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Opmerking Modulen met de vergunning 113 G EEx nA II T3 T6 mogen slechts worden gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7 400 van de apparaatcategorie 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 30 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Instandhouding Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging worden gestuurd Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd Speciale voorwaarden 1 Het SIMATIC S7 400 moet worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 volgens EN 60529 waarborgen Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geinstalleerd Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden ingediend volgens EN 50021 Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt gt 70 C of als onder bedrijfsomstand
130. pin connector on the left hand side and a 120 pin socket on the right hand side for connecting a further expansion module or amass storage module Figure 12 3 EXM 478 Expansion Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 6 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 2 1 Addressing the EXM 478 Expansion Module Introduction In order to be able to program the interface submodules in the EXM 478 expansion module you must be able to determine their addresses There are the following addressing methods e Addressing in the AT compatible I O address area e Addressing in the M7 400 specific I O address area In this section you will find information on both methods of addressing the interface submodules Addressing in the AT Compatible I O Address Area Some of the interface submodules are automatically configured by the BIOS for operation in the AT compatible I O address area This automatic configuration takes place for example for e The IF 962 VGA interface submodule e Up to 4 COM ports COM1 to COM4 e Upto 3 LPT ports one LPT port on the MSM 478 and two interface submodules IF 962 LPT Further interfaces are configured in the BIOS setup See the CPU FM description to learn how to operate the BIOS setup The description of the interface submodules will show the specific settings possible To configure in the BIOS setup you must know th
131. range ot Ni 100 1 3K 0900 Ni 1000 1 3K 0 to 300 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q three conductor measurement in the range of 6000 Q Thermocouples Crosstalk between the inputs gt 70 dB e Voltage input 80mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5V 5V 1Vto5V 10V Current input 0 20mA 20mA S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 80 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to input Resistance thermocouples four conductor range standard measuring range e Voltage input 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5 V 5V 1Vto5V 10V Current input 0 mA to 20 mA 20 mA 4 20 mA Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 2 0K E ZOK 2 0K 1 6K 0 4K 0 4K 0 2K 0 2K 0 2K 0 2K 0 4K 0 4 K Resistance test Oto 48 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 150 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 300 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q four conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q four conductor measurement in the range of 6000 Q 0 to 300 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 600 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q three conductor measurement in the range of 6000 Q Thermocouples TC type B TC type R TC type S TC type T TC type E TC ty
132. scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions Table 1 12 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Vibrations Vibration test in Type of oscillation frequency sweeps with a accordance with rate of change of 1 octave minute IEC 60068 2 6 10 Hz s f lt 58 Hz constant amplitude sinusoidal 0 075 mm 58 Hz lt ff lt 500 Hz constant acceleration 1 g Duration of oscillation 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other Shock test in Type of shock half sine accordance with Severity of shock 10 g peak value 6 ms IEC 60068 2 29 duration Direction of shock 100 shocks in each of the 3 axes arranged vertically to each other Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7 400 You can use the S7 400 under the following ambient climatic conditions Table 1 13 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7 400 Climatic Conditions Permitted Range Remark Temperature change Max 10 C h Sa S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 15 General Technical Specifications Table 1 13 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7 400 Climatic Conditions Permitted Range Remark Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure Concentration of contaminants Max 95 at 25 C 1080 to 795 hPa corresponds to a height of 1000 to 2000 m SO lt 0 5 ppm RH lt 60 no condensation Hos lt 0 1 ppm RH lt 60 no condensation Table 1 14 Power Supply Modules
133. submodule only if it is off circuit If you remove the front cover of the interface submodule while the power supply is switched on the CPU goes into DEFECTIVE mode Additional Information You can find information on PROFIBUS DP in the following technical overviews or manuals e Technical overview Distributed I O in SIMATIC S7 and M7 e Manuals on the DP masters for example S7 300 Programmable Controller or S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers for the PROFIBUS DP interface of the S7 300 e Manuals on the DP slaves for example ET 200M Distributed I O Device or ET 200C Distributed I O Device e The manual on the network components SINEC L2 L2FO Network Manual such as bus connectors RS 485 repeaters e Manuals on STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 62 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 9 1 Pin Assignments X1 Connector There is a 9 pin sub D socket connecior on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable See Table 13 45 for the pin assignments Table 13 45 X1 Socket IF 964 DP 9 Pin Sub D Connector ein Signa Meaning f Dren a Pb5ext 5 V isolated max 20 mA Output for supplying the bus terminator a o To 7 P24V 24 V max 150 mA non isolated Output 6ES7 964 2AA01 0AB0 What Can be Connected to the Interface Submodule Devices with PROFIBUS can be connected such as the following ET 200 M ET 200 U B C and o
134. supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7962 1BA00 0ACO Technical Specifications Supply voltage Supplied from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules Current consumption in the M7 300 for dimensioning the 24 V current supply Current consumption in the M7 400 for dimensioning the 5 V current supply 0 6A VGA controller WD90C24 Video controller 1 Mbytes Submodule ID 814 Power losses 2 5 W Dimensions W x H x D mm 18 2 x 67 x 97 Weight 0 085 kg S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 8 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Operating Modes The WD90C24 VGA controller is used on the IF 962 VGA interface submodule Table 13 7 shows you the video modes supported by the BIOS of the IF 962 VGA interface submodule Table 13 7 Video Modes of the IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule Mode Text Monochrome Resolution Number Character Horizontal Vertical HEX Graphics Color Columns x of Size Frequency Frequency Lines colours kHz Hz oO o_o o_o io O1 h 0 0 0 2 2 2 A 8 3 3 3 5 E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 F 6A o o 1 Interlaced mode io O1 _ h 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 7 70 70 0 70 0 70 1 70 1 70 5 70 5 70 5 56 72 5 56 5 72 O1 5D 5D er S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Modul
135. supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7962 4AA00 0ACO Technical Specifications Supply voltage Supplied from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules Current consumption in the M7 300 for dimensioning the 24 V current supply Current consumption in the M7 400 for dimensioning the 5 V current supply 0 1A Submodule ID 44y Power losses 0 5 W Dimensions W x H x D mm 18 2 x 67 x 97 Weight 0 07 kg S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 6 IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7961 1AA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 961 DIO interface submodule has the following characteristics e 8 inputs isolated in groups of 2 Input level 24 VDC 8 5 mA Input interrupt at rising and or falling edge Input delay can be set in common for all channels approx 750 us or approx 3 ms e 8 outputs isolated in groups of 4 Level 24 VDC 0 1A Outputs short circuit protected via electronic fuse 34 IF961 DI9 Figure 13 5 IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 23 Interface Submodules 13 6 1 Pin Assignments X1 Socket There is a 25 pin sub D socket connector on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable Figure
136. tee addeee due wedaes B 2 B 2 Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 1 eee B 3 B 3 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules ASO BVICe sean E caahscadua made aManad ETS EEE T oe oe B 4 B 4 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules GSO DVIS arrra ea AEE sharon k ee baw eek ee dee ees eed as B 8 B 5 Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules AS OBVOZ corwanycrantabaetaeeeeuuw ag enamianne EE Renee ae B 14 C Spare Parts and Accessories 0c cece C 1 D Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD D 1 What is ESD 2 0 een eee n ene nes D 2 D 2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons 00 0 ce cece eee eens D 3 D 3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage D 4 E List Of ADDICVIGUONS 2 ciccvstasestnieccetescusesensatiteeeseseeeeeuseens E 1 D S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications XVIII A5E00069467 07 Contents Figures 1 1 Power supply to the backup battery nananana cc cece eee 2 1 Structure of a Rack with 18 SlotS 0 00 cece eee eee eee eens 2 2 Dimensions of the UR1 18 Slot or UR2 9 Slot Rack 2 3 Rack DiIM NSIONS ccc ee ee ee ee eee eee eee nee n nes 2 4 CR2 Rack 0 cc ee ee eee eee eee ene eeeetnnnnsnanaes 2 5 ORS RIO 6 4 eaten eee ane dhe nce 4 Gadeawereabebneen te euneneaben 2 6 ER1 Rack with 18 Slots and ER2 Rack with 9 Slots 3 1
137. the signal source if the relevant interface submodule is designed for it Interface Submodules chapter The values for the signal source positioned on the left are the setpoints You can edit these The values shown to the right of this in gray type black type in Remote Setup are the actual values determined at the last power up of the CPU Here you enter the signal destination if the relevant interface submodule is designed for it Interface Submodules chapter This value is entered only once per expansion module at the first submodule receptacle 0 3 6 9 etc The value for the signal destination positioned on the left is the setpoint You can edit this value The signal destination value shown to the right of this in gray type black type in Remote Setup is the actual value determined at the last power up of the CPU It cannot be edited Returns to the Setup menu when activated Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button 11 28 Returns to the Setup menu when activated Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 7 Setup Page Timeout Function Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Timeout Function in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 and activated the OPEN button this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 13 m l Timeout Function H melay Tine
138. the table below Table 4 18 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 32x 24 VDC 0 5 A 6ES7422 7BL00 0ABO Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module peenanon ato 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV Dynamic Module Keep last value KLV Diagnostics Ne ha Tano 7 lala Yes no L sensor supply Static group Short circuit to M vesino No Short circuit to L T No ck anne 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 7 Digital Modules 4 20 2 Behavior of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Output Values The output values of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module Table 4 19 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A CPU Operating Mode Power Supply L Output Value of Digital to Digital Module Module POWER ON ae L exists CPU value value WE ee L missing ooo Osignal spa agna preset Ch o POWER Behavior in the Event of Failure
139. thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and connecting parts The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends There are different types of thermocouple depending on the composition of the material used for example K J N thermocouples The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same irrespective of their type Measuring junction Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs Connecting point Compensating leads Reference junction Leads Measurement input Figure 5 17 Design of Thermocouples Principle of Operation of Thermocouples If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the thermocouple point of connection a voltage the thermo emf occurs at the free ends The magnitude of the thermo e m f generated depends on the difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference the free ends must be kept at a Known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the measuring junction The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction by means of compensating wires These compensating wires consist of the same material as th
140. to do this 1 Select the IF Modules page in the BIOS setup 2 Enter the submodule receptacle number of the interface submodule in Select Module 3 Enter the offset address for the configuration register of the interface submodule 00p at Config Index 4 Enter 36 at Value This value is then written into the configuration register see also Table 13 13 5 Press the OK button S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 12 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Ares Regardless of possible addresses in the AT compatible I O address area the IF 962 COM interface submodule can be addressed in this reserved address area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable modules for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule The I O address is the sum of the base address and the offset address The registers and their meanings and the offset addresses are described below Table 13 10 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962 COM Interface Submodule Offset Address Configuration register Read write 08 OF UART 160552 parallel pori 104 174 COMa UART 160552 Read write 184 1Fy COMb UART 160552 Read write Configur
141. which expansion unit 7 8 Used in EU 185U EU 186U 21321 S1 ene awe BR 2 mjajujuaja off Used in EU 183U 152 SPEBAAG on e 2 0 BR2 Used in ER 701 2 ER 701 3 21321 ae eae S1 BR 2 mjajujmaja off on Figure 7 2 Settings of the IM 314 with Expansion Units S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 Setting the Address Area The address area of the S5 I O modules is set on the IM 314 This setting applies only for the digital and analog I O modules The address areas P Q IM3 and IM4 are available Set the switch to the relevant position to address the digital and analog I O modules in these areas Table 7 5 Settings Address Areas on the IM 314 I O Area Address Switch Position not relevant P area FOOO FOFF sae ACMA IM3 area FCOO FCFF IM4 area FDOO FDFF Status as shipped S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 9 IM 463 2 7 6 Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7 400 You configure the S5 modules using STEP 7 See the description of S
142. window PowerBIOS Version 1 00 Copyright C 1984 1996 Award Software Inc 03 13 96 Intel 82430HX 3A59I000 01 0000 Siemens AG M7 CPU M7 BIOS A2 O0On SPU Tyee worn u cre eee parle ce ere oy re Pentium 120Mhz E cieie alee e ziza EI aA AEE A E ETE A S aie Internal RASE DEE S a eae Pc AS E a A a E 640 Kb estee n e A ene ag A a a 31744 Kb MEnCs Sa RM a a a A a ee A Enabled VEe SO P acct a A A A AE nae Enabled AERE E Dec A a AE ASTIE Se E P E E EA E AT TEe Disabled IELO DELNO e s a ra anal E ARAE E O 1 Found ee cee RA Oa 0 F 8 A I EE E oe rege E A TTS TIBM DBOA 2540 REAL LS e succes an meee scum a a ae 2 Found Parade le POETS ea E aie anata E a tart 1 Found estin Pase MEV Ly cy canta snekainaca ease wun ote Biz Bb Press ESC bo See senip Figure 11 6 POST Window for a CPU 488 3 If no error occurs all LEDs on the CPU are switched off with the exception of the STOP LED Power Up with Warnings During power up warnings are given in the POST window after the Video Shadow RAM line if The battery power is missing There is no keyboard The CMOS checksum is wrong The warnings remain for 2 seconds After this the first line is suppressed from the POST window lf battery power is missing the date is reset to 1 1 1994 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 17 CPUs for M7 400 Pow
143. with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 refer to the STEP 7 manuals Table A 2 Parameters of the Digital Inout Modules Parameter Data Record Parameters Can Be Assigned No with SFC 55 STEP 7 Destination CPU for interrupts Input delay Diagnostics Hardware interrupt enable Diagnostic interrupt enable Reaction to error Hardware interrupt with rising edge Hardware interrupt with falling edge Substitute 1 Only in 6ES7421 7BHO00 0ABO Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1 you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7 Structure of Data Record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 bytes 0 1 2 and 3 for the parameters of the digital input modules You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 4 A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules 7 6 pyteo TTT IT Reaction to error Diagnostic interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable 0 7 65 4321 0 Byte1 Hardware interrupt On rising edge at channel 0 On rising edge at channel 1 On rising edge at channel 2 On rising edge at channel 3 On rising edge at channel 4 On rising edge at channel 5 On rising edge at channel 6 On rising edge at channel 7
144. within an expansion module where the interrupt assignment FO has been entered The shared interrupt is assigned to the ISA interrupt during configuration of the interface submodule in the BIOS setup Signal Switching In an EXM 478 expansion module two interface submodule signals can be switched to another signal switching This signal switching is done during configuration of the interface submodule in the BIOS setup Refer to the interface submodule description to find out if an interface submodule requires signals from a further interface submodule that is if signal switching is necessary Note You will find a detailed description of the BIOS setup in the M7 400 application module or CPU description S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 13 M7 400 Expansions 12 2 3 Technical Specifications of the EXM 478 Expansion Module Technical Specifications of the EXM 478 The table below contains the technical specifications of the EXM 478 expansion module EXM 478 6ES7 478 2AC00 0ACO Performance Features Number of connectable interface modules Connection of expansion modules Technical Specifications Supply voltage Current consumption without interface submodules Power losses without interface submodules Permissible power losses with 3 interface submodules e Without forced max 10 W ventilation e With forced ventilation max 12 W Dimension
145. x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 31 Power Supply Modules 3 12 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0DA01 0AA0 Function The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19 2 to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 4 A and 24 VDC 0 5 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 4054A 1 PS 405 4A X 2 3 4 405 0DA01 0AA0 o INTF o BAF o BATTF o 5VDC o 24 VDC Fixing screw LEDs INTF BAF BATTF 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset Standby switch Under cover Battery compartment Switches BATT INDIC BATT OFF 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 8 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A 3 32 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 4054 A Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output Rating Dimensions WxHxD mm 25x290x217 Output voltages Weight 0 76 kg e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Cable cross section 3 x 1 5 mm litz wire Output currents with wire end ferrule Gaiecdwaiiee 5 VDC 4A use component conductor
146. 0 cee eee ee 5 22 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7QHO0 O0ABO 5 106 5 22 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 16 x 16Bit 0 5 114 5 22 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al16 x 16 Bit 0 eee 5 23 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit GES7 431 7KF10 OABO 0 ccc ee ee eens 5 122 5 23 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al8 x RID x 16Bit 5 126 5 23 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit 0 eee 5 129 5 24 Analog Input Module SM 431 AI8 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7KFOO OABO 0 ccc ee eee ee teens 5 130 5 24 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 0008 5 135 5 24 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 ARD ad ot er eee ne eee ee ee en ee 5 139 5 25 Analog Output Module SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit 6GES7432 1HFOO OABO ccc ee eee eee eens 5 141 5 25 1 Commissioning the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit 006 5 145 5 25 2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432 AOG X TOBI weedesrs castes sweeeseia ee deeds tebe pxmes pone bees 5 145 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications XIV A5E00069467 07 Contents 6 interface MOGUIES seciccctcccw cides dcmcwtssinssaenesbbeeenbeneesesuaves es 6 1 Common Features of the Interface Modules 000 000 ee 6 2 6 2 The Interface Modules IM 460 0 6ES7460 OA
147. 0 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 D 3 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD D 3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Ensure Sufficient Grounding Make sure that the personnel working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices You thus avoid electrostatic charging Avoid Direct Contact You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable for example during maintenance work Hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors In this way the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices If you have to carry out measurements on a module you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts Use grounded measuring devices only S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications D 4 A5E00069467 07 List of Abbreviations E asooo amans Ba Bateyiaiue O BUSF1 LED bus failure on the MPI Profibus DP interface 1 or 2 BUSF2 eo Centaldevig O Dabo DI Digitalinput DO Digtaloutput ESD _ Electrostatic sensitive devies EWS Apply substitute value EM E CCC Error LED external fault F8 Funcion block O S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 E 1 List of Abbreviations i mputdeay Error LED internal fault Te memeres O O
148. 0 VDC 4 mV to 20 mV 1 e Between bus and chassis 500 VDC Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to the ground output range Between analog section 707 VDC e Voltage outputs e a sas ti 2120 VDC oe etween analog section and chassis ground Ov AO OV 0 5 e Between L M and chassis 2120 VDC 1Vtoov t 0 5 ground e Current outputs Current consumption 20mA 0 5 From the backplane bus Max 150 mA OQOmAto20mA 0 5 e Power supply and load Max 400 mA Temperature error with 0 02 K voltage L with rated load reference to the output range Power supply and load Max 200 mA Linearity error with reference 0 05 voltage L no load to the output range Power dissipation of the Typ max 9 W module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 143 Analog Modules Repeat accuracy in the steady state at 25 C referred to the output range Output ripple band width 0 to 50 kHz with reference to the output range Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions Substitute value can be applied Data for Selecting an Actuator E Output ranges rated values e Voltage e Current Load resistance in the nominal range of the output e For voltage outputs capacitive load e For current outputs Inductive load Voltage outputs e Short circuit protection Short circuit current Current outputs e No load volt
149. 0 us Peak value 63 A half value width 1 ms Peak value 230 A half value width 200 us Peak value 58 A half value width 1 ms lt 3 5 MA In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve W2 As of version 5 As of version 7 Power Supply Modules Output Variables Output voltages e Rated values Output currents e Rated values Max residual ripple Max switching peaks Idle conditions 5 1 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 10A 24 VDC 1 0 A 5 VDC 50 mVss 24 VDC 200 MVss 5 VDC 150 mVs 24 VDC 500 mVs 5 VDC 200 mA base load required 24 VDC Idling proof no base load required Other Parameters Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 with protective grounding conductor Overvoltage category lI Pollution severity 2 Rated voltage Ue 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V Buffering of power failures Test Voltage 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 2300 VDC primary lt gt PE gt 20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 at a repeat rate of 1 s Power input 105 W Power loss Backup current Backup batteries optional 29 7 W Max 100 uA at power off 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 25 Power Supply Modules 3 9 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORA00 0AA0 Function The PS 407 20 A power supply
150. 0069467 07 Interface Submodules Connection of Resistance Thermometers e g Pt 100 and Resistances The resistance thermometers resistances are measured in a 4 wire connection A constant current Ic which can be set is supplied to the resistance thermometers resistances via one analog output QI each The voltage arising at the resistance thermometer resistance is measured over the M and M terminals This achieves a high degree of accuracy in the measured results for 4 wire connection The lines carrying the constant current are to be run in parallel to the measuring lines and are not to be connected together until the terminals on the resistance Voltage drops on the constant current lines will then not corrupt the measured result Three wire connection is not possible in the case of the IF 961 AlO interface submodule Figure 13 18 shows the connection of resistance thermometers resistances with a single current supply via one analog output each Figure 13 18 Four Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers Resistances with One Constant Current Source Each Figure 13 19 shows the connection of resistance thermometers resistances with a common current supply via only one analog output Please take account here of the maximum permissible load impedance for analog outputs and the maximum permissible common mode voltage Vc Figure 13 19 Four Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers Resistances with a Common Constant Current Sourc
151. 0069467 07 5 23 Analog Modules Table 5 32 Unipolar Output Ranges Output Data Word Range Value in o1 91 91 o 91 99 98 97 96 95 954 953 92 91 90 4 3 2 0 32511 117 589 0o 1 1 1 1 d 1 1 Overrange 2 649 100 004 O 1 1 0O 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 1 2 648 100 000 O 1 1 O 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 1 Rated range O 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to rated range 32512 lower limit of 0 V and 0 mA lt 32513 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow i x lt x lt x lt gt x lt x lt x lt x lt h o_o o_o oh h o_o oh O OF O O O Of S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 24 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 33 Life Zero Output Ranges Output Data Word Value in 59 98 97 32511 117 589 27649 100 004 1 0 003617 6912 25 000 6913 Limited to over range lower 30549 729 000 limit O V and 0 mA S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 25 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges Table 5 34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 0 V 0 V E 5149 e 7FFF 0 00 V a off circuit and deenergized Overrange o S 0 rere CA E 32513 80FF Underflow off circuit and deen
152. 0160 curve W2 repeat rate of 1 s Power consumption 240 VDC 52W Power loss 20 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup battery option 1 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 22 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules 3 8 Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA01 O0AA0 and PS 407 10A R 6ES7407 OKRO00 0AA0 Function The power supply modules PS 407 10A standard and PS 407 10AR redundancy capable see Section 3 2 are designed for connection to an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supply 5 VDC 10A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and thge PS 407 10A R Fixing screw LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover e Battery compartment e Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT e 3 pin plug in power connector e Fixing screw Figure 3 4 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 23 Power Supply Modules Power Connection In contrast to the instructions on i
153. 069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A Programming package Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight 25 XxX 290 x 210 Approx 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L Rated load voltage L Aggregate current of the outputs two outputs per supply group Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L Between the outputs of the different groups Current consumption From the backplane bus e Power supply and load voltage L no load Power dissipation of the module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display 24 VDC 24 VDC Max 3A Max 2A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC 500 VDC Max 160 mA Max 30 mA Typ 5 W Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage e At signal 1 Min L 0 5 V Output current e At signal 1 Rated value 2A Permitted range 5 mA to 2 4 A At signal 0 leakage Max
154. 1 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 21 20 ADC data channel 3 A l N ta ta Control register 1 C T POG Control register 2 channel no P 7 Status register F C ADC ta 000 5 7 ms cycle time of the automatic conversion function ta 001 2 8 MS ta 010 1 3 ms ta 011 600 us ta 100 185 us INT Interrupt enable INT 0 not enabled INT 1 enabled AC 1 Automatic conversion of all ADC channels active ADC channel no Number of the selected ADC channel in the case of conversion on request individual encoding ADC 001 Channel 0 ADC 010 Channel 1 ADC 011 Channel 2 ADC 100 Channel 3 PF 1 Power failure no external voltage EOC 1 End of conversion end of the analog digital conversion of the selected channel S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 48 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Table 13 42 Meaning of the Control Bits in the Analog Input Function IF e PA PA ADC ga ggugugug Status register ADC Status register ADC ADC seme mt interrupt x any ta 000 5 7 ms cycle time of the automatic conversion function ta 001 2 8 ms ta 010 1 3 ms ta 011 600 us ta 100 185 us AC 1 Automatic conversion of all ADC channels active Writing Contotregister2 Contotregister2 2 INT 1 Generation of an interrupt after end of cycle ADC channel no Number of the selected ADC channel ADC 001 channel 0 ADC 010 channel 1 ADC 01
155. 1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels Introduction The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the various measuring ranges of the analog input modules The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges Notes for Readers of the Tables Tables 5 6 to 5 8 contain the binary representation of the measured values Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same starting at 5 9 these tables only contain the measured values and the units Measured Value Resolution The resolution of the analog values can differ depending on the analog module and its parameter assignment With resolutions lt 16 bit the bits marked with x are set to 0 Note This resolution doesn t apply to temperature values The changed temperature values are the result of recalculation in the analog module see Tables 5 16 to 5 30 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 8 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 5 Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values ne ja ia ae tae a f 90000000 moona m 0000000 oroo o OH OH OH H H H 1H o a e w 0000 ooooros 1 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 9 Analog Modules Binary Representation of the Input Ranges The input ranges shown in Tables 5 6 to 5 8 are defined in two s complement
156. 1 Connecting Cable Terminating Connector for IM 314 7 Technical Specifications 7 4 i 7 5 i Tf i i 7 8 i 7 9 Order Number S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 1 IM 463 2 7 1 Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7 400 Area of Application The IM 463 2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion units to an S7 400 You can use the IM 463 2 in the CR of the S7 400 In the S5 expansion unit you use an IM 314 This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion units to an S7 400 e EU 183U e EU 185U e EU 186U e ER 701 2 e ER 701 3 Accordingly you can use all digital and analog I O modules suitable for these EUs or ERs Basic Requirement If you connect an S5 expansion unit to a CR of the S7 400 via an IM 463 2 the SIMATIC S5 basic requirements concerning EMC ambient conditions etc apply for the overall system Note In environments contaminated by radiated noise you must apply the type 721 cable shield see nstallation Manual Chapter 4 Expanding the Distributed Connection You can also centrally expand the EUs connected in a distributed configuration via an IM 463 2 The following table lists the S5 interface modules that you can use for this purpose Table 7 1 S5 Interface Modules IM 300 6ES5300 5CA11 6ES5300 3AB11 6ES5300 5LB11 IM 306 6ES5306 7LA11 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specificat
157. 1 channel 2 ADC 100 channel 3 SC 1 Start of analog digital conversion SC Start of conversion in the case of individual encoding Status After Switching On Control register 1 AC 0 INT 0 ta 0 5 7 ms Control register 2 ADC 001 ADC channel no 0 Status register ADC SC 0 Individual Start of an ADC Channel Below are listed the steps required for individual encoding in the case of an ADC channel 1 Select the ADC input channel by writing the channel number into control register 2 offset address OAW 2 Start the ADC conversion by setting the SC bit in the status register ADC to 1 offset address OCH 3 Read bit EOC in the status register ADC at offset address OCy and wait until EOC 1 4 Read the analog value at the relevant address offset addresses OO to O6 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 49 Interface Submodules Cyclic Conversion of the ADC Channels Below are listed the steps required for cyclic conversion of the ADC channels 1 Set the AC bit in control register 1 to 1 offset address 08p 2 Wait for interrupt 3 Read the values at the relevant address offset addresses OO to 06p 4 Acknowledge the interrupt by writing to the offset address OE data bits O to 15 are irrelevant here S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 50 A5E000694
158. 11 00 32767 7FFFy 15500 3C8CyH 31100 797CyH Overrange 13001 32091 26601 67E94 13000 32C8y 26600 67E8y Rated range 12000 D1204 18400 B8204 DITFH B81Fy Underrange C75Cy A68CH lt 145 00 32768 80004 lt 229 00 32768 80004 Underflow S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 15 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni x00 Standard Table 5 18 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni100 120 200 500 1000 Ni x00 Ni x00 Ni x00 Standard Standard Standard in C in F inK 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 0 1 C 0 1 F 0 1 K 2950 B864 5630 15FE 5682 16324 Overrange 9C5y 12D5y 9233 1471 9C4y 12D4y 5232 14704 Rated range FDA8y FDO8 2132 8544 FDA7y FDO7y 2131 853H Underrange Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni x00 Climatic Table 5 19 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni 100 120 200 500 1000 Ni x00 Ni x00 Climatic Climatic in C in F 1 Digit Hexadecimal 1 Digit Hexadecimal 0 01 C 0 01 F gt 295 00 32767 7FFFy gt 325 11 32767 7FFFy 29500 733Cy 32766 7FFEy Overrange 25001 61A9y 28001 6D614 25000 61A8y 28000 6D60y Rated range 6000 E8904 7600 E2504 E88Fy E24Fy Underrange D6FCY C2ACyH lt 105 00 32768 8000 lt 157 00 32768 8000 Underflow S7 400 M
159. 13 G EExnAllT3 76 far endast anvandas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7 400 fran apparatgrupp 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 36 A5E00069467 07 Underhall General Technical Specifications Vid reparation m ste den aktuella Komponentgruppen ins ndas till tillverkaren Reparationer far endast genomforas dar Sarskilda villkor i SIMATIC S7 400 m ste monteras i ett kopplingsskap eller metallhus Dessa maste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54 Darvid ska omgivningsvillkoren dar enheten installeras beaktas For kapan maste en tillverkardeklaration for zon 2 f religga enligt EN 50021 Om en temperatur pa gt 70 C uppnas vid husets kabel resp kabelinforing under driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid tradforgreningen kan vara gt 80 C under driftvillkor maste kabelns temperaturegenskaper Overensstamma med den verkligen uppmatta temperaturen De anv nda kabelinforingarna m ste uppfylla kraven i det kravda IP skyddsutforandet och i avsnitt 7 2 enligt EN 50021 Alla apparater inklusive brytare osv som ansluts S7 400 systemens in och utg ngar m ste vara godk nda f r explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller EEx nC tg rder m ste vidtas s att m rksp nningen ej kan verskridas med mer n 40 genom transienter Omgivningstemperatur 0 C till 60 C 7 Nar huset ppnats ska en skylt med f ljande varning monteras pa ett tydligt synligt stalle huset Varning Huset far
160. 14 Bit 5 78 CONOORWN L Thermocouples Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance measurement Resistance thermometer a o L MO CHO Word 0 MO Mo M0 CHO Word 0 Mi CH Word 2 ICO M1 ICO M2 M1 CH2 Word 4 M3 CH3 Word 6 IC1 M3 IC1 M4 CH4 Word 8 M2 M4 M2 CH4 Word 8 M5 CH5 Word10 a M5 IC2 M6 M3 H6 Word 12 M6 M3 CH6 Word 12 M7 IC3 H7 Word 14 M7 IC3 M M S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Current consumption Programming package Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 package e Dimensions and Weight Max 600 mA Max 200 mA with 8 connected fully From the backplane bus From the backplane bus L Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of inputs e For resistance type sensor Length of cable Shielded ground 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 500 g 8 4 Max 200 m Power dissipation of the module Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time conversion time resolution per channel S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 controlled two wire transmitters Typ 3 5 W
161. 20 VAC 2 A You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A in the following table Table 4 20 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module i ee aon el 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV Dynamic Module Keep last value KLV BOOSE Fuse blown Yes no Static Channel 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 90 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 24 Relay Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A 6ES7422 1HH00 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A has the following features e 16 outputs isolated in 8 groups of 2 e Output current 5 A e Rated load voltage 230 VAC 125 VDC The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 91 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A Process Module OOnNOAaRWND ie Sn c
162. 2244 enes ee cee ee dhe cede vere cabeseoreeeeye ad 11 3 1 Status and Fault LEDs 0 0 eens 1132 IMGMON Cards arceat reiia da nee Sbeme nd een chedeednenebatne hes 11 3 3 Mode Selector Switch 0 0 enn eee 11 3 4 Submodule Receptacles for Interface Submodules 11 3 5 Memory Submodules Suitable for the Main Memory 11 3 6 Expansion Socket 606 0000s e cece eee ce eee kinar eeeeeees 11 3 7 Multipoint Interface MPI 0 eens 11 4 TNE BIOS SCUID 2 o5a 54 esteisiin ated ined soba oat a E 11 4 1 BIOS Power Up 0 0c eect eens A2 BIOS HOUKCYS ecese giren delice bt che Gee wenden tbe e eed eagle nodes 11 4 3 Operator Inputs in the BIOS Setup 0 0 cece eee 11 4 4 Opening and Exiting the BIOS Setup 0 ccc eee 11 4 5 Setup Page User Help 0 cece nee ees 11 4 6 Setup Page IF modules 0 0 0c ene eens 11 4 7 Setup Page Timeout Function 0 0 ccc ees 11 4 8 Setup Page Security 0 eee teen ne ees 11 4 9 Setup Page Date and Time cee eens 11 4 10 Hard Disk Setup Page 0 ccc ene e eens 11 4 11 Setup Page Floppy Card 0 nen n eens 11 4 12 Setup Page Boot Options 0 ene ees 11 4 13 Setup Page System 1 0 eee eee nnn 11 5 I O Addresses Main Memory and Interrupt Assignments 12 M7 400 Expansions t
163. 304 02DCy lt 200 0 lt 2000 lt F830 lt 328 0 lt F330H lt 73 2 lt 732 lt 02DC ate Underflow In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow lf F8804 is violated and outputs if EACOy is violated and If FE2Cy is violated and 8000H outputs 8000 outputs 8000 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N Table 5 27 Analog Value Representation for Ainaki Type N Ca Type N Hexade ja K cimal 15500 3C8Cy 28220 6E38Cy 18232 47384 Overrange 13001 32C9y 23738 5CBAy 15742 3D7Ey 13000 32C8y 23720 5CA8y 1573 2 15732 3D74y r s 7 r Rated range 2700 F574y 4540 EE44 0000H lt 270 0 lt F574y lt 454 0 lt EE44 UndeHiow 2700 4840 00004 In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow 1f FOC4y is violated and 1f E5D4y is violated and if FB70y is violated and outputs 8000H outputs 8000H outputs 8000 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 20 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R S Table 5 28 Analog Value Representation for
164. 31 8 x 13 Bit Connecting Two Wire Transmitters Because the supply voltage for the two wire transmitters is not fed by the SM 431 8 x 13 Bit you must supply the sensors separately with 24 V Sensor for example Two wire pressure gauge transmitter a Two wire transmitter Figure 5 11 Connecting Two Wire Transmitters to an SM 431 8 x 13 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 48 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Connecting Four Wire Transmitters Sensor for example pressure gauge Four wire transmitter Q Q OO O O O O O Connection required in the case of modules with Mana Figure 5 12 Connecting Four Wire Transmitters to an Al SM 431 8 x 13 Bit Connecting Four Wire Transmitters To ensure that the permissible value for Ucp is not exceeded you must connect the M cables to Mana Sensor for example pressure gauge Four wire transmitter Figure 5 13 Connecting Four Wire Transmitters to an SM 431 8 x 13 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 49 Analog Modules 5 11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 8 with its generally applicable information for connectin
165. 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 3 Racks Technical Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 Racks Dimensions WxHxD nmm W x H x D in mm 482 5 x 290 x 27 5 257 5 x 290 x 27 5 kadaa udii da A in kg LD 4 1 as re version 03 2 15 as of version 04 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 4 A5E00069467 07 Racks 2 3 The Rack UR2 H 6ES7400 2JA00 0AA0 Introduction The UR2 H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in one rack The UR2 H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same rack profile The main area of application of the UR2 H is in the compact structure of redundant S7 400H systems two subracks or subsystems in one rack Suitable Modules for the UR2 H You can use the following modules in the UR2 H rack When the UR2 H is used as a central rack e All S7 400 modules with the exception of receive IMs When the UR2 H is used as an expansion rack e All S7 400 modules apart from CPUs send IMs the IM 463 2 and the adapter module Special case Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461 1 receive IM Structure of the UR2 H Figure 2 3 shows the structure of the UR2 H rack with 2 x 9 slots Division Division ll I I
166. 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Programming package Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H xD 25 x 290 x 210 in millimeters Weight Approx 600 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable e Unshielded input delay 0 5ms 3ms 10 20 ms Shielded line length Max 100 m Max 600 m Max 600 m 1000 m Voltages Currents Potentials Number of inputs that can be 16 triggered simultaneously Isolation e Between channels and backplane bus e Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested with e Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L 1500 VAC e Channels among one 1500 VAC another Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 150 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 8 W module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Green LED per channel Status display Interrupts e Hardware interrupt Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned e Diagnostic Interrupt Diagnostic functions e Group error display For internal fault For external fault Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF 4 46 e Channel error display F e Diagnostic information can be displayed Monitoring for e Wire break Substitute value can be applied None Possible gt 0 7 mA No Sensor Sele
167. 463 2 to the last IM 314 per interface max 600 m Transmission rate 2 Mbytes s to 100 Kbytes s Parameter sets of the differential signal in signal modules accordance with RS 485 Front connector 2 connectors 50 pin male S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 7 14 A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface 8 IM 467 IM 467 FO Chapter Overview Section Description Page PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Connection to PROFIBUS DP S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 1 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 1 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Order Numbers IM 467 6ES7467 5GJ02 0ABO RS 485 IM 467 FO 6ES7467 5FJ00 O0ABO FO Application PROFIBUS DP standardized to IEC 61784 1 2002 Ed1 CP 3 1 enables rapid communication in the field between programmable controllers PCs and field devices Field devices are devices such as ET 200 distributed I O devices drives valve terminals switchgear and many others The IM 467 IM 467 FO interface module is meant to be used in an S7 400 programmable controller It permits the S7 400 to be connected to PROFIBUS DP Note The PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467 or IM 467 FO is nota DP master in accordance with DPV 1 Configuration 8 2 Configured as for the S7 400 Can be operated without a fan A maximum of 4 IM 467 IM 467 FO can be used in the central controller T
168. 467 07 5 3 Analog Modules Table 5 1 Module Characteristics Max Permissible Common Mode Voltage Ext Power Supply Necessary Special Features 2 DMU SM 431 AI 8 x 13 Bit 1KF00 Between the chan nels or be tween the reference potential of the con nected sensors and Mana 30 VAC SM 431 Al8 amp x 14 Bit 1KF10 Between the chan nels or be tween the channel and central ground point 120 VAC 24 VDC only with Current 2 DMU Suitable for tempera ture mea surement Tempera ture sensor types can be parame terized Lineariza tion of the sensor character istic curves Smoothing of the mea sured val ues Two wire transmitter SM 431 Al8 x 14 Bit 1KF20 Between the chan nels or be tween the reference potential of the con nected sensors and Mana 8 VAC 24 VDC only with Current 2 DMU Rapid A D change suitable for highly dy namic pro cesses Smoothing of the mea sured val ues SM 431 Al 13x 16 Bit OHHO Between the chan nels or be tween the reference potential of the con nected sensor and central ground point 2 VDC AC 24 VDC only with Current 2 DMU Analog Input Modules Characteristics at a Glance continued SM 431 Al 16x 16 Bit 7QHOO0 Between the chan nels or be tween the channel and central ground point 120 VAC 24 VDC only with Current 2 DMU Su
169. 5 1 Analog Input Modules Characteristics at a Glance SM 431 SM 431 SM 431 SM 431 SM 431 SM 431 Alg x 13 Al 8 x 14 Al 8 x 14 Al 13 x 16 Al 16x 16 AI 8x RTD Al 8x 16 Bit Bit Bit Bit 16 Bit Bit 1KF00 1KF10 1KF20 7QH00 7KF10 7KF00 Characteristics 997 9 Zi C Number of Inputs 8 AI U 8 Al for U I 8 Al for U I 16 inputs 16 Al for U 8 inputs 8 inputs measure measure measure I tempera ment ment ment ture mea 4 Al for re 4Alforre 4 Al for re surement sistance sistance sistance 8 Al for re measure tempera measure sistance ment ture mea ment measure surement ment 13 bits 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Resistors Voltage Current Current Current Current Current Current Resistors Resistors Resistors Resistors Tempera Tempera Tempera ture ture ture Measuring Integrating Integrating Instanta Integrating Integrating Integrating Integrating Principle neous value en ane Programmable Diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Limit value Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Monitoring Hardware No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Interrupt upon Limit Violation Hardware No Adjustable No No Interrupt at End of Cycle Potential Analog section isolated from CPU Non Analog section isolated from CPU Relationships isolated S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069
170. 5 30 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 5 Behavior of the Analog Modules Introduction In this section you will find information on e How the analog input and output values depend on the operating modes of the CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module e The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie within the value range e The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability e The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value as illustrated by an example 5 5 1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module Table 5 38 Dependencies of the Analog Input Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L CPU Operating Supply Voltage L at Output Value of the Analog Input Value of the Mode Analog Module Output Module Analog Input Module ON Until the first conversion 7FFFy until the first e after power up has been Conversion following completed a signal of 0 POwer up or after mA or 0 V is output parameter assignment of after parameter the module has been completed assignment has been completed the previous value is output POWER STOP L present Substitute value last value ON default values 0 mA 0 V r 7FFFy until the first conversion following power up or after
171. 5 mV Te res mi 500 asm 250 a 80 pat 50 aie 25 aie 100 000 117 5938 32512 8100 587 9mV 294 0 ae 94 1 ae 58 8 _ 29 4 mV 32513 80FF Underflow 117 596 32768 8000 592 6mV 296 3mV 94 8mV 59 3mV 29 6 mV 118 519 Table 5 11 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V Underrange System Voltage Measuring Range bec ex osv omy a Se E 0 003617 a a 1V 144 7 uV OV 361 7 uV Rated range en ae 4864 EDOO 0 296 V Negative values not lt 17 596 32768 8000 ay S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 12 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges Table 5 12 Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges 20 mA to 3 2 mA System Current Measuring Range Current Measuring Range bee pre cama eoma esma esama a S a a as en ee 0 003617 723 4 nA 0 oo 0 mA Rated range nn ae 75 20736 AF00 15mA 117 506 32513 80FF Underflow 118 519 32768 8000 23 70 11 85 5 93 mA 3 79 mA mA mA Table 5 13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA a oan O a e 117 589 Overrange are eco apb p m ersen eere oo S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 13 Analog Modul
172. 500 M 1 15 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7 400 0000 c eee 1 16 TeSt VONQUCS 4due ceceeeneeusewsebereaseeerere nut eceee sacra eenas E a ee ee ee ee ee cee ee Ce ee S 1 a O0O0ONOOARARAON O ok L M 3 1 Compliance with the NAMUR recommendation 005 3 2 Redundant power supply modules 0 0 cece eee 3 3 INTF DC 5V DC 24 VLEDS 0 cee 3 4 BAF PAVIEEEDS gaveidas bebe sreteteerncnnsractadoc ree E a 3 5 BAF BATT1F BATT2F LEDS 0 0 cc cece eens 3 6 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules 3 7 Error messages of the power supply modules 0005 3 8 INTE DC5V DC24V LEDS sci cic dev eins Gaeace bab weed wow dda ed nae ii 3 9 BAF BATTF BATT INDIC LEDS on BATT 00 000 cee eee 3 10 BAF BATT1F BATT2F BATT INDIC LEDs on 1BATT 3 11 BAF BATT1F BATT2F BATT INDIC LEDs on 2BATT 4 1 Digital Input Modules Characteristics ata Glance 4 2 Digital Output Modules Characteristics ata Glance 4 3 Relay Output Module Characteristics ata Glance 4 4 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 4 5 Static and dynamic parameters of the digital modules 4 6 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules 0 0 ce eee 4 7 Parameters of the Digital Ou
173. 5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 3 IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 1BA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 962 VGA interface submodule is used to connect a keyboard and a VGA screen The interfaces to the keyboard and the screen are AT compatible As an alternative to a normal AT keyboard a keyboard with an integrated trackball can be connected for example the PG 740 keyboard The IF 962 VGA interface submodule is designed for the local area and the distance to the I O devices should not exceed approximately 2 5 m ny d COR Ne 962 1BA00 0ACO gt x 4 _ pe SC Figure 13 1 IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule Note You can operate a maximum of one keyboard graphics submodule on one programmable module CPU or FM S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 5 Interface Submodules 13 3 1 Pin Assignments Socket X1 VGA Screen Connection Table 13 4 Socket X1 VGA Screen Connection IF 962 VGA 15 Pin High Density Sub D Socket Connector Fe e E a e maono OOOO e Analog GNDbue SSS S a T eM psd S Socket X2 Keyboard Connection Table 13 5 X2 Socket Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961 VGA 6 Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector Direction Keyboard data Mouse data Signal GND 5 VDC Keyboard clock Mouse clock
174. 67 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 10 Analog Value Representation for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Inputs Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges Table 13 43 contains the representation of the digitized measured value for e The voltage measuring range 10 V and e The current measuring range 20 mA Table 13 43 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Analog Input Function Voltage and Current Measuring Range Measured p Units Measuring Range Measuring Range lt 118 51 32767 7FFFy 411 851 V lt 3 7 mA 117 589 32511 7EFFy 11 7589 V 23 515 mA Overrange l 100 004 27649 6C01H 10 0004 V 20 001 mA Nominal range 100 004 10 0004 V 20 001 mA Underrange 117 59 11 759 V 23 516 mA Underflow gt 118 51 32768 8000 gt 11 851 V 23 7 mA S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 51 Interface Submodules 13 7 11 Analog Value Representation for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Outputs Voltage and Current Output Ranges Table 13 44 contains the representation of e The voltage output range 10 V and e The current output range 20 mA Table 13 44 Representation of the Analog Output Ranges Voltage and Current Output Ranges Uts Output Range Output Range R Overflow gt B2512 SV FOO 11 851 V Ly 32496 7EFOW 11 7534 V Overrange l l 27664 6C10H 10 0005 V Nominal range 10 0005 V Underrange 11 759 V Underflow lt 3252
175. 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 6ES7461 3AA01 OAA0 The Interface Modules IM 460 4 6ES7460 4AA01 OABO IM 461 4 6ES7461 4AA01 OAAO You will find a description of the IM 463 2 in Chapter 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 1 Interface Modules 6 1 Common Features of the Interface Modules Function Interface modules a send IM and a receive IM are required if one or more expansion units EU are to be connected to a central controller CC This configuration is described in the nstallation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Interface modules must always be used together The send modules send IMs are inserted in the CC whilst the corresponding receive modules receive IMs are plugged into the series connected EU Table 6 1 Interface Modules of the S7 400 Partner Areas of Application Send IM for local link without PS transfer with communication bus Receive IM for local link without PS transfer with communication bus Send IM for local link with PS transfer without communication bus pol Receive IM for local link with PS transfer without communication bus Send IM for remote link up to 102 m with communication bus mae Receive IM for remote link up to 102 m with communication bus ped Send IM for remote link up to 605 m without communication bus Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m without communication bus Overview of the Properties of the Connections Note t
176. 7 General Technical Specifications 1 What are General Technical Specifications General technical specifications include the following e The standards and test specifications complied with and met by the modules of the S7 400 M7 400 programmable controllers e The test criteria against which the S7 400 M7 400 modules were tested Chapter Overview Seaion oon e 1 4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7 400 M7 400 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Using S7 400 in a zone 2 explosion risk area S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 1 General Technical Specifications 1 1 Standards and Approvals Note You will find the current approvals on the identification label of the respective products IEC 61131 2 The S7 400 M7 400 programmable controller satisfies the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131 2 standard programmable controllers part 2 on equipment requirements and tests CE Mark Our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC Ce Directives listed below and comply with the harmonized European standards EN promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community for programmable controllers e 73 23 EEC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage Limits Low Voltage Directive e 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive
177. 7 175 1 000 000 6840 h This produces a maximum backup time of 285 days S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 Power Supply Modules 3 4 Controls and Indicators Introduction The power supply modules of the S7 400 have essentially the same controls and indicators The main differences are e Not all the power supply modules have a voltage selector e Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED BATTF that indicates an empty defective or missing backup battery Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs BATT1F and BAT T2F to indicate empty defective or missing backup batteries Operator Controls and Indicators Figure 3 1 shows you an example of a power supply module PS 407 20A with two redundant backup batteries The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate PS 407 20A Or 34 407 ORA00 0AAO o INTF o BAF o BATTF o BATTF o 5 VDC 24 VDC BATT 1 BATT 2 BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT e Fixing screws e LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F 5 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 24 VDC e FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover Battery compartment Switches BAT
178. 7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 16 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Standard Table 5 20 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Cu 10 Cu 10 Cu 10 Standard Standard Standard in C in F in K 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 0 01 C 0 01 F 0 01 K 16DCy Overrange 14D5y 14D4 Rated range 732 2DCy 731 2DBy Underrange 332 14Cy Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Climatic Table 5 21 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Cu 10 Cu 10 Climatic Climatic in C in F 1 Digit Hexadecimal 1 Digit Hexadecimal 0 01 C 0 01 F gt 180 00 32767 7FFFy gt 325 11 32767 7FFFy 18000 4650H 32766 7FFEY Overrange 15001 3A99H 28001 6D61Ay 15000 3A98y 28000 6D60y Rated range 5000 EC78y 5800 E958y EC77y E9574 Underrange E8904 E2504 lt 60 00 32768 80004 lt 76 00 32768 80004 Underflow S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 17 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Themocouple Type B Table 5 22 Analog Value Representation for Type B Type B Ea 20700 50DCy 32766 7FFEy 23432 5B88y Overrange 18210 47224 27866 6CDAY 20942 51CEy 18200 47184 27865 6CD9H 20932 51C4y i i Rated range 00004 i 320 FECO 2732 OAACY
179. 7 9 5 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies Shielding Clamps If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied do not install them in the fan subassembly Technical Specifications Dimensions Weights Voltages Currents Potentials Dimensions WxHxD mm 482 5x109 5x235 At nominal voltage of 230 VAC 120 VAC Weight appr 2000 g Power consumption Cable diameter 3 bis 9mm e with fan Lifespan of the fans Starting current 0 6 A 1 15 A e at40 C 70000 h Fuses 160 mA 250 mA e at75 C 25000 h Max contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6 e Switching voltage e Switching current A Warning Electrical current can lead to personal injury If you remove the left cover when installing or removing the fan subassembly the terminals on the transformer are accessible briefly Remove the voltage from the fan subassembly before you install or remove it Disconnect the supply cable before you remove the fan subassembly Caution Danger of damage to equipment If you mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB in the fan subassembly the fan subassembly may be damaged During maintenance of the unit make sure you do not mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB Monitoring Function In the case of a fault defective fans the fans are not switched off Once you have replaced the defective fan s the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached the required speed Any faults that occur ar
180. 7 Word 14 MI7 CH7 M7 M7 IC3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al 8x 13 Bit Programming package Associated programming package Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of inputs e For resistance type sensor Length of cable e Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L Constant measured current for resistance type sensor Isolation Between channels and backplane bus e Between the channels Permitted potential difference e Between inputs and Mana Ucm e Between the inputs Ecm Between Mana and Minternal Uiso Insulation tested with Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and chassis ground Current consumption From the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time conversion time resolution per channel Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time in ms Resolution including sign Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the 184 200 As of STEP 7 V 2 0 module in ms all channels enabled Suppression of Interference Limits of Error Interfe
181. 7 for some analog input modules Using Smoothing Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing lt makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values for example with temperature measurements Smoothing Principle The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering Smoothing is accomplished by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted digitized analog values The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels none low average high The level determines the number of analog signals used for averaging The higher the smoothing level chosen the more stable is the smoothed analog value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a step response refer to the following example S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 36 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Example The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100 applied as a function of the smoothing that has been set The figure applies to every change of signal at the analog input Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 200 Smoothing low average high Module cycles Figure 5 5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response Additiona
182. 8 lt BOF Oy 11 851 V e S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 52 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 12 Diagnostics Interrupts and Submodule ID Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies an interrupt request IRQa You can define the assignment of the IRQa interrupt request to the relevant processor interrupt request in the BIOS setup Diagnostic and Hardware Interrupts If the interface submodule IF 961 AlO was assigned parameters for cyclic conversion you have the possibility of initiating hardware interrupts at the end of cycle It is also possible to initiate a diagnostic interrupt if a hardware interrupt is lost Submodule ID The IF 961 DIO interface submodule has the submodule ID Oly S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 53 Interface Submodules 13 7 13 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications The IF 961 AlO interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7961 2AA00 0ACO Voltages Currents Potentials Dimensions and Weight Supply voltage Supplied from the M7 400 Dimensions programmable W x Hx D mm 18 2 x 67 x 97 mod
183. 8 x 16 Bit 0 ee Block Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit anannana nananana nanan Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit Example Configuration with Send IMs Receive IMs and Terminators Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 0 and IMACGTO cv acdc rey arn eo eae ENTERT REEERE reurorypaas robes Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 1 AVG MIM AGT sisean ie weenie nels dein canes Odom wracWiar a ei Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 3 and IM GTB sie tesserae Spt caratn Rena nig cath ath ica teenth Ab ne vn hl ian ck a 0 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 4 and IMAG TA nrsririserii ann aan eee a Rho Oh on BA oe Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the IM 463 2 Settings of the IM 314 with Expansion Units 0008 Connection Variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463 2 andIM314 Configuration of the IM 467 467 FO ce eee LEDs of the IM 467 467 FO 2 eee Connecting the Bus Connector to the IM 467 00008 Connector Pin Assignment 0000 ccc cee eee eee eee ees Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP 0 0 cee eee Installing the Connector 0 ccc eee Inserting the Fiber Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO Example of a Message Concept 0 ccc cee ee eee Front View of the Cable Chann
184. A0 6ES7 467 5GJ01 0ABO 8 2 6ES7 405 0KA00 0AAO 6ES7 467 5GJ02 0ABO 8 2 6ES7 405 0KA01 0AAO 6ES7 972 0AA01 OXA0 10 2 6ES7 405 0KRO0 0AAO lt a Organization block OB Glossary 12 6ES7 405 0ORA00 0AAO Output analog output module 5 42 ee See A Output analog values STEP 7 blocks 6ES7 407 ODA00 0AA0 p g 2 i 321 Output range analog output module 5 42 a ee Output type analog output module 5 42 6ES7 407 0OKA01 0AA0 6ES7 407 OKRO0 OAAO 6ES7 407 0RA00 0AAO 3 26 6ES7 407 0RA01 0AA0 3 28 6ES7 421 1BL00 O0AAO 4 17 6ES7 421 1BL01 0AAO 6ES7 421 1EL00 0AA0 4 56 6ES7 421 1FHOO 0AAO 4 50 6ES7 421 1FH20 0AA0 4 53 gt 6ES7 421 5EH00 OAAO 4 41 6ES7 421 7BHO0 0ABO 4 23 4 32 analog input module 5 66 6ES7 421 7DH00 0ABO 4 44 digital module 6ES7 422 1BH10 0AAO Parameter assignment missing 6ES7 422 1BH11 O0AA0 4 62 analog input module 5 65 6ES7 422 1BL00 0AA0 4 70 digital module 6ES7 422 1FF00 0AA0 4 79 Parameters Glossary 12 analog input module 5 40 A 10 analog output module 5 42 6ES7 422 1FHO0 0AAO 6ES7 422 1HHO00 0AA0 4 91 data records A 2 digital input module 4 7 6ES7 422 5EHO0 OABO 6ES7 422 5EH10 0ABO 4 65 digital input modules A 4 digital output module 4 8 A 7 dynamic 4 65 39 6ES7 422 7BL00 0ABO 4 73 modifying in user program 4 6 5 39 static 4 6 5 39 _ 6ES7 431 O
185. A00 0ABO 6ES7460 0AA01 O0ABO and IM 461 0 6 S7461 OAA00 0AA0 6ES7461 0AA01 OAAO 6 7 6 3 The Interface Modules IM 460 1 6ES7460 1BA00 0ABO 6ES7460 1BA01 0ABO and IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 0AA0 6ES7461 1BA01 OAAO0 6 10 6 4 The Interface Modules IM 460 3 6ES7460 3AA00 0ABO 6ES7460 3AA01 O0ABO and IM 461 3 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 6ES7461 3AA01 OAAO 6 14 6 5 The Interface Modules IM 460 4 6ES7460 4AA01 0ABO and IM 461 4 6ES7461 4AA01 OAAO ccc ce cece eee eee eee 7 IM 469 2 ee eaeeetencees E ents tacnron ces Gace ececeee scare 7 1 7 1 Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7 400 04 7 2 7 2 Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units 20 cee eee 7 3 7 3 Operator Controls and Indicators nananana nananana 7 4 7 4 Installing and Connecting the IM 463 2 0 eee 7 6 75 Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314 0 e eee 7 8 7 6 Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7 400 08 7 7 Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable 000000 7 8 Terminating Connector for IM 314 cc ccc cece eee eee 7 9 Technical Specifications 6ES7463 2AA00 OAAO 0200e 8 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO eeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 2 8 1 1 Indicators and the Mode Selector 0 ccc cee eee 8 2 Configuration 0 0 ee
186. A5E00069467 07 4 55 Digital Modules 4 15 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC 6ES7421 1EL00 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC is characterized by the following features e 32 inputs isolated e Rated input voltage 120 VAC VDC e Suitable for switches and two wire proximity switches S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 56 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC Process aces OONDOARWND gt NOOR WN O ie hese the Me z NOOR WN OO NO Z Data register and bus control 0 DE me 2 7 3 4 ES 5 89 Z fa ol oe She ol NOOR WN O aN Z Figure 4 13 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 57 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor Dimensions W x H x D mm 25 x 290 x 210 Input voltage e Rated value 120 VUC Weight Approx 600 g For signal 1 79 to 132 VAC Data for Specific Module 80 VDC to 132 VDC e For signal 0 20 V Number of inputs or signal O 0 to J Length of cable Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz e Unshielded Input current Shielded At signal 1 2 mA to 5 mA J 1 ry Voltages Currents Potentials At signal O Oto 1
187. AB0 5 20 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Resistance test You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 96 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Circuit Variants of the Channels Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 7 as shown in the following table Table 5 58 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF20 OABO Meas Type Disabled Voltage Voltage Voltage Current Current R 4L Channel n 1 1V 1to5V 10V 4 DMU 2 DMU Meas Type Chan nel n X X X X X Disabled Voltage 1 V Voltage 1 to 5V Voltage 10 V Current two wire transmitter Resistance four conductor a Current four wire transmitter Example If you select current two wire transmitter for channel 6 you can only disable the measuring method or set current two wire transmitter for channel 7 Circuit for Resistance Measurement The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Tab
188. AT ISA bus for connecting expansions There is a matching connector for this socket on the left hand side of the EXM 478 ATM 478 and MSM 478 expansion modules Figure 12 1 The EXM 478 ATM 478 and MSM 478 expansion modules have one expansion socket each on the right hand side so that further expansion modules can be plugged in S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Behavior on the S7 400 Backplane Bus The expansion modules can be accessed via the relevant programmable module and not via the S7 400 backplane bus e g FM 456 4 e g EXM 478 Expansion connector Expansion socket Figure 12 1 Positions of Expansion Socket and Expansion Connector Maximum Expansion Figure 12 2 shows the maximum possible expansion using expansion modules for a CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 or FM 456 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 3 M7 400 Expansions e g FM 456 4 e g EXM 478 e g MSM 478 e g ATM 478 Figure 12 2 Maximum Expansion with Expansion Modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 4 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Permissible Combinations You can se
189. ATM and MSM mass storage can be connected via the expansion socket See page 11 14 for more detailed explanations MPI The CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 6 are equipped with a multipoint 9 pin sub D socket interface See page 11 15 for more detailed explanations External battery supply An external battery can be connected via this socket so that for example the contents of the SRAM and the time of day are not lost if the power supply fails The same technical details apply as for the S7 400 CPUs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 5 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 1 Status and Fault LEDs Status and Fault LEDs The CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 have the following status and fault LEDs Figure 11 2 Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 6 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 Meaning of the Status and Fault LEDs The status and fault LEDs are explained in Table 11 4 in the order in which they are arranged on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 modules The following status and fault LEDs are available Table 11 4 Meaning of the Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 LED Meaning Explanations INTF red Internal or external Lights up in the event of EXTF red fault indicator e Hardware faults e Firmware faults Programming faults Para
190. B Organization block foore S Pa Posmen OOOO Pm o Processsimageimputtable OO Qi Analog output current S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications E 2 A5E00069467 07 List of Abbreviations Group error LED S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 E 3 Glossary Address An address denotes a specific operand or address area examples of this are input 12 1 memory word MW 25 data block DB 3 Aggregate current Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communicate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require The interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector Backup battery The backup battery ensures that the gt user program is stored ina powerfail proof manner in the gt CPU and that defined data areas and memory markers timers and counters are kept retentively Backup voltage external You can obtain the same kind of backup if you apply backup voltage to the EXT BATT socket of the CPU DC voltage between 5 V and 15 V as you can witha backup battery External backup voltage is required if you want to replace a power supply module and to provide a backup supply while the user program and data for example memory markers timers counters system data integrated clock stored in RAM
191. CEIC HE TOIUOUXEG OE OWANVWOEIC OE VIA OUVTOUO XpOVIKO OIGOTHYUA KAEIOTOUG KWPOUG Ao gadAns OyI EKT G TNS Gwvns 2 TrEPIOXN TuTik G epapyoy es OTTOKEVIPWHEVNG TEPIP PEIAG 2TN OUVEXEIA Oa BPEITE ONUAVTIKES UTTOOEICEIG yia TNV EYKATAOTAON TOU OOUIKOU OuyKpoTnyatos SIMATIC S7 400 oe emikiv uvy yia kpn n TrEpIOXN Em T OV TrANpOgopiec Emi T ov T npogopies yia Ta i gopa OOUIKA ouyKpot paTa EvoTNTES S7 400 Ba BPEITE OTO EVKXEIPIOIO TOTTOS KATAOKEUNS Siemens AG Bereich A amp D Ostliche Rheinbriickenstrasse 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Adela Il 3 G EEx nA II T3 T6 O UQWVA HE TO TP TUTTO EN 50021 1999 ApiO c yxou KEMA 03ATEX1125 X YTrodeElEN Ta OOUIKO OUYKPOTHUATA YE TNV 13G EExnAllT3 T6 ETTITDETTETAI VO TOTTOPETNBOUV vo OE OUOTHYATA AUTOVATIOUOU SIMATIC S7 400 tns KaTnyopiac OUOKEUNG 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 40 A5E00069467 07 LuvTnpnon General Technical Specifications Fia WIA ETTIOKEUN TIPETTE VA OTAAVE TO AVTIOTOIYO OOUIKO OUYKPOTNUA OTOV T TTO KOTAOKEUNS Movo kEl ETTITPETTETAI VO VIVE N ETTIOKEUN ISIGITEPES TIPOUTTOBECEIC 1 To OOUIKO OUYKpOTHUG SIMATIC S 400 Trpetre va EvoWUATWOHEI oe va ENUAPIO CEUENSC o Eva YETAAAIKO TIEPIBANUA Aut TIPETTE va ECADMAAICOUV TO AMIYOTEPO TO BABYO TrpooTaoOids IP 54 LE AUTNV tnv TIEPITTTWON TIPETTE va An O8ouv UTTOWN ol TIEPIBAGAAOVTIKEG OUVENKEG OTIC OT
192. Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module 3 2 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A ee 3 3 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A 0 ee 3 4 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10AR 3 5 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 20A 0 ccc eee 3 6 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20A 0 0 eee ees 3 7 Controls and Indicators of the PS 4054A 2 ee 3 8 Controls and Indicators of the PS 4054A 2 ee 3 9 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 10A 0 eee aes 3 10 Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10AR 3 11 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20A 0 cc eee eee 3 12 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20A ccc eee eee 4 1 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs 0 0 00 4 2 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 4 3 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 4 4 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 4 5 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC cesta scir is eeccearasiceserntann ane dara nereo 4 6 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DIGX 24 VDO selsaceieeuskeaneh anne pirr EEEE NTER 4 33 4 7 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421 DI 16 x24 VDC a ox h
193. DIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position BATTF Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery is missing and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position BATTF Yellow Lights up if battery 2 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery is missing and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 9 Power Supply Modules Battery Voltage on the Backplane Bus The battery voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or externally into the CPU or receive IM In its normal state the level of the battery voltage is between 2 7 V and 3 6 V The battery voltage is monitored for the lower limit Violation of the lower limit is indicated by the BAF LED and reported to the CPU BAF lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low Possible causes of this include e Battery batteries empty or battery polarity has been reversed e External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power supply module is defective or missing e Short circuit or overload on the battery voltage Note Due to internal capacities if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply some time may elapse before BAF BATT1F or BATT2EF lights up S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules
194. Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current status of a programmable controller e Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record 0 and as many as 39 bytes of module specific diagnostic data Further Reading An in depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 2 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules B 2 Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are described below The following general rule applies When an error occurs the bit concerned is set to 1 Bytes 0 and 1 7654321 0 ByteO Module malfunction Internal malfunction External malfunction There is a channel error No external auxiliary supply Front connector missing Module not parameterized Incorrect parameter in the module 7654321 Byte 1 aor T be a Module type see Table B 1 Channel information available Figure B 1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data Module Types The following table contains the IDs of the module classes bits 0 to 3 in byte 1 Table B 1 Codes of the Module Types 0101 Analog module 1000 Function modu
195. F 962 VGA e Remote setup with a terminal program for example HyperTerminal under Windows 95 on programming device PC or with an ANSI terminal via the COM1 port interface submodule IF 962 COM Remote Setup 11 16 To run BIOS settings via the Remote Setup without the interface submodule IF 962 VGA follow the steps outlined below 1 Switch off the line voltage to your M7 400 2 Connect the programming device to the COM1 port of the SIMATIC M7 device see Section 8 7 2 of the Installation Manual 3 On your programming device under Windows 95 select Start gt Accessories gt Hyperterminal 4 In the HyperTerminal window select the menu command File gt New Connection Enter a connection description and select the COM port with the following transmission properties 19000 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit no flow control 5 Switch on the line voltage to the M7 400 and hold the Q key pressed during startup until the M7 400 registers itself in the HyperTerminal with the hardware tests a U appears 6 Press the ESC button immediately Result You are in the BIOS setup S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 1 BIOS Power Up Power Up without Error Message After switching on or after warm restart of the CPU the BIOS Basic Input Output System starts a Power On Self Test POST and displays the results in the POST
196. Fiber optic cable Force FREEZE Glossary 6 A fiber optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass fiber or plastic Fiber optic cables are resistant to electromagnetic faults and they make fast data transfer rates possible The Force function overwrites a variable for example memory marker output with a value defined by the user At the same time the variable is assigned write protection so that this value cannot be modified from any point including from the STEP Zuser program The value is retained after the programming device is disconnected Write protection is not canceled until the Unforce function is called and the variable is written again with the value defined by the user program During commissioning for example the Force function allows certain outputs to be set to the ON state for any length of time even if the logic operations of the user program are not fulfilled for example because inputs are not wired Control command The inputs of the DP slaves are frozen to the current value S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary Function A function FC in accordance with IEC 1131 3 is a gt code block without static data A function allows parameters to be passed in the user program Functions are therefore suitable for programming complex functions such as calculations that are frequently repeated Functional grounding Groundin
197. Function of the Operator Controls Table 3 6 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules FMR momentary For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the contact pushbut fault ton Standby switch Switches the output voltages 5 VDC 24 VDC to 0 V by intervening in the control loop no mains disconnection e Output voltages at rated value e Output voltages 0 V BATT INDIC Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring switch Where one battery can be used PS 407 4A PS 405 4A e OFF LEDs and monitor signals inactive e BATT BAF BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active Where two batteries can be used PS 407 10A PS 407 20A PS 405 10A PS 405 20A e OFF LEDs and monitor signals inactive e 1 BATT Only BAF BATT1F LEDs for battery 1 active e 2 BATT BAF BATT1F BATT2F LEDs for batteries 1 and 2 active Voltage selector For setting the primary voltage 120 VAC or 230 VAC protected by its if present own cover Please note the following information Battery compart For backup battery batteries ment Power connec 3 pin connector for line voltage connection do not plug in or remove tion when power is on Caution One of the following power supply modules could be damaged Power supply module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 ODA00 0AA0 Power supply module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORAO00 0AA0 If you set the voltage selector to 120 V on these AC power supply modules and
198. HHO0 0ABO 5 99 Parameters incorrect analog input module 6ES7 431 1KF00 OABO 5 70 Overflow analog input module P Parameter assignment for analog modules 5 39 for digital modules 4 6 in user program A 2 Parameter assignment error 6ES7 431 1KF10 0ABO 5 77 6ES7 431 1KF20 0AB0 5 90 6ES7 431 7KF00 OABO 6ES7 431 7KF10 0ABO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Index 9 Index PARM_MOD SFC 57 Password M7 400 1 Performance features M7 400 CPUs 11 2 Permissible potential differences 7 3 PG cable 11 15 C 2 Pin assignment RS 485 repeater 10 6 PLC Glossary 13 Point to point connection Glossary 12 11 2 Potential difference with analog input modules Power supply module PS 405 10A 3 34 3 36 PS 405 10A R 3 36 PS 405 20A 3 38 3 40 PS 405 4A 3 30 8 32 PS 407 10A 3 23 PS 407 10A R 3 23 PS 407 20A 3 26 3 28 PS 407 4A 3 19 3 21 Priority class Glossary 13 Process image Glossary 13 Product status Glossary 13 PROFIBUS DP Glossary 13 PROFIBUS DP master interface 8 2 Programmable controller Glossary 13 Programmable controller PLC Glossary 13 Programming device PG Glossary 14 Protection del cary Protection level Glossary 14 Pulse edge 4 7 Pulse shaped interference 1 10 Q Quick memory test 11 37 Radio in
199. I T3 T6 possono essere impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7 400 della categoria di apparecchiature 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 28 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Manutenzione Per una riparazione l unita interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione La riparazione puo essere effettuata solo li Condizioni particolari iF Il SIMATIC S7 400 deve essere montato in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54 secondo EN 60529 In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l apparecchiatura viene installata Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 secondo EN 50021 Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in condizioni di esercizio una temperatura gt 70 C o se in condizioni di esercizio la temperatura nella derivazione dei fili pu essere gt 80 C le caratteristiche di temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente misurata Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione IP richiesto e alla sezione 7 2 secondo EN 50021 Tutte le apparecchiature inclusi interruttori ecc che vengono collegati a ingressi uscite di sistemi S7 400 devono essere stati omologati per la protezione da esplo
200. Installed in an ATM 478 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module 0 ccc cee eee eens IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule 00 cee eee X2 Socket Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961 VGA 6 Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector 0 c ccc eee eee IF 962 COM Interface Submodule nananana nananana IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule 0 0 cc ees IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule 0 cc ees X1 Socket Assignments IF 961 DIO 25 Pin Sub D Connector Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring the Digital Inputs 0 eee 13 25 Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring the Digital Outputs 0 0 eee eee 13 25 IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule 0 cee eee 13 33 X1 Socket Assignments 25 Pin Sub D Connector and Terminal Connection Diagram of the IF 961 AlO Circuit Block Diagram of the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule Grounding the Analog Inputs Outputs of the Interface Submodule IF 961 AlO 0 0 eee Connection of Isolated Measured Value Sensors 000es Connection of Non lsolated Measured Value Sensors Connection of Voltage Sensors ce ee teens Connection of Two Wire Transducers 0 00 e eee eee eee eee Connection of Four Wire Transducers 0 0 00 c cee eee ee eee Four Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers Resistances with One Con
201. Interference frequency suppression Interrupt Glossary 8 Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules The frequency of the AC network can interfere with the measured value especially with measurements in low voltage ranges and with thermocouples This parameter is used by the user to specify the prevailing line frequency on his system The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run time level which govern running of the user program These run time levels include interrupts such as hardware interrupts among other things When an interrupt occurs the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the reaction he wants for example in an FB S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary Interrupt diagnostic Diagnostic Interrupt Interrupt end of scan cycle Hardwareinterrupt Interrupt hardware Hardware interrupt Interrupt response time The interrupt response time is the time from when an interrupt signal first occurs to calling the first instruction in the interrupt OB The following general rule applies Higher priority interrupts take precedence This means that the interrupt response time is increased by the program processing time of the higher priority interrupt OBs and interrupt OBs with the same priority that have not yet been processed queue I O bus This is part of the backplane bus in the programmable
202. L00 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC is a digital input module with the following features e 32 inputs isolated in a group of 32 In other words all inputs share the same chassis ground e Rated load voltage 24 VDC e Suitable for switches and 2 wire proximity switches BEROs IEC 61131 type 2 The status LEDs indicate the process status Functional Expansion as of Version 03 The lower limit of the rated input range is increased at signal O from 3 to 30 V The rated input voltage for signal 0 is thus 30 V to 5 V S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 17 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC Process Module OONOAaRWDND NOOR WM AOPF NOOR WN O Data register and bus control NOOR WON O
203. Last read valid value also activated ae NO Activated Parameterized substitute value Load Voltage L Last read valid value No load voltage L for Deactivated 0 signal if the contact is connected via the each channel group sensor supply process value for the external sensor supply Activated Parameterized substitute value Last read valid value S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 30 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Behavior when the Input Delay Equals 0 1 ms and an Error Occurs If you have parameterized the following e An input delay of 0 1 ms e KLV or SV as the response to an error e Substitute 1 In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal the following could occur before the last valid value or the substitute value 1 is output e An 0 signal may be briefly output e If parameterized a hardware interrupt may be generated S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 31 Digital Modules 4 10 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 7BH01 0AB0 Characteristics The digital inout module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following features e 16 inputs isolated in 2 groups of 8 e 24 VDC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and two three four wire proximity switches BEROs IEC 61131 type 2 e 2 short circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each e External redundant power supply possible to supply se
204. M3 CH3 Word 6 Da A ve 15 16 Tr M4 CH4 Word8 17 M4 18 Tr M5 cCH5 Word10 19 M5 20 21 Tr M6 cHe Word 12 22 M6 a Tr M7 CH7 Word 14 24 M7 25 26 27 28 M8 CH8 Word 16 aliaa ve 30 M9 CH9 Word 18 31 M9 32 33 M10 CH10 Word 20 nO Sane 35 M11 CH11 Word 22 36 __ M11 37 38 Tr M12 CH12 Word 24 39 M12 40 Tr M13 CH13 Word 26 41 M13 42 43 Tr M14 CH14 Word 28 44 M14 45 Tr M15 CH15 Word 30 46 M15 47 48 M M Figure 5 34 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 101 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module 16 Number of inputs Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L e Reverse polarity protection Power supply of the transmitters e Supply current e Short circuit proof Constant measured current for resistance type sensor Isolation e Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L Permitted potential difference Between inputs and Mana Ucm Between the inputs Ecm Insulation tested with Between bus and chassis ground Current consumption From the backplane bus From load voltage L with 16 conn
205. MO M1 M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M7 M7 M8 M8 M9 M9 M10 M10 M11 M11 M12 M12 M13 M13 M14 M14 M15 M15 2M p Measuring range module me a Z Multiplexer Control and backplane bus interface ADU Tr Transducer Transmitter Voltage current sensor and M must be connected to the chassis ground of the rack Figure 5 33 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 5 100 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Voltage measurement Current measurement 1 5 m 2 R ae 3 4 L L 5 6 MO CHO Word0 ne MiGs 8 M1 CH1 Word 2 g _ Yei 10 11 M2 CH2 Word4 olie 13
206. Mbyte 6ES7952 1KK00 O0AAO Flash EPROM 2 Mbytes 6ES7952 1KLO0 0AA0 Flash EPROM 4 Mbytes 6ES7952 1KMO00 0AA0 Flash EPROM 8 Mbytes 6ES7952 1KP00 0AA0 Flash EPROM 16 Mbytes 6ES7952 1KS00 0AA0 10 cover foils for SM labeling strips 6ES7492 2XX00 0AA0 Cover flap for fuse receptacle AC SM 6ES7422 0XX00 7AA0 12 spare submodule covers 6ES7398 0BA00 0AA0 6 connecting clips 6ES7498 6BA00 0AA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 C 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD Introduction In this appendix we explain e what is meant by electrostatic sensitive devices e the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensitive devices Chapter Overview This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices a ee e D2 Electrostatic Electrostatic Charging of Persons of Persons EE 3 e Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge pI D 4 Damage S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 D 1 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD D 1 What is ESD Definition All electronic modules are equipped with large scale integrated ICs or components Due to their design these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic
207. Module Specifications 3 6 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Backup Times The maximum backup time is based on the capacity of the backup batteries used and the backup current in the rack The backup current is the sum of all individual currents of the inserted backed up modules as well as the requirements of the power supply module when the power is switched off Example for the Calculation of Backup Times The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the power supply The typical and maximum backup current of the backed up module Is listed in the technical specifications of the module The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value The maximum backup current is a worst case value that is calculated based on the corresponding manufacturer specifications for the memory blocks The following technical specifications produce backup times for a CR with a PS 407 4A and a CPU 417 4 as the only backed up module Capacity of the backup battery 1 9 Ah Maximum backup current including own requirement at power off of the power supply 100 uA Typical backup current of the CPU 417 4 75 uA A rated capacity of less than 100 is to be assumed when calculating the backup time because the backup battery is also affected at power on by the regular depassivation A battery capacity of 63 of the rated capacity produces the following values Backup time 1 9 Ah 0 63 100 75 uA 1 19
208. OH to 3 E3H and e Except for the areas which the interface submodules are occupying see the Interface Submodules chapter S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 41 CPUs for M7 400 Interrupt Assignment 11 42 Table 11 9 Interrupt Assignment me Rncion OOO moo Sytemimer ROS Asgredio nny askore omes Po Sowarrierupi reed RQ S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Chapter Overview Seaton oein e e pemn o 12 2 EXM 478 Expansion Module 6ES7 478 2AC00 0AC0 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 6ES7 478 2CA00 0AC0 12 15 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module 6ES7 478 2BA00 0AC0 12 22 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 1 M7 400 Expansions 12 1 Overview Introduction You can expand your automation computer from the M7 400 range by adding expansion modules for interface submodules short AT modules and or the mass storage module The interface submodules can include the IF 962 COM IF 962 LPT The following expansion modules are available e EXM 478 expansion module for up to 3 interface submodules e ATM 478 AT adapter module for one short AT module e MSM 478 mass storage module with hard disk and floppy disk drive and an LPT1 printer port Expansion Socket 12 2 On the right hand side of a CPU or an M7 400 application module there is a 120 pin socket
209. OUG AYWYOUS EUBOUUATWOILEG OUVOEOEIC H TIpoElOOTTOINON auTN e ypEIaCETal va AN VE UTI OWIV EAV Elval YVWOT OTI OEV UMIOTATAI ATUOOMAINA TTAPOUGIGCOUGAG KivOUVO EKONENG KaTadAoyoc TWV EYKEKPINEVWV SOUIKWV OUYKPOTHUATWV H AloTd YE TO EVKPIUEVA OOUIKA OUVKPOTNUATA UTTAPYE OTO OIAOIKTUO http www4 ad siemens de view cs HE TOV KWOIKO ouv pou s 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 41 General Technical Specifications S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 42 A5E00069467 07 Racks Chapter Overview ten ston ae Function and Structure of the Racks 2 2 The Racks UR1 6ES7400 1TA01 0AA0 and UR2 6ES7400 1JA01 0AA0 The Rack UR2 H 6ES7400 2JA00 0AA0 2s The Rack CR2 6ES7401 2TA01 0AA0 2 The Rack CR3 6ES7401 2TA01 0AAO a 2 6 The Racks ER1 6ES7403 1TA01 O0AAO and ER2 6ES7403 1JA01 OAA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 1 Racks 2 1 Function and Structure of the Racks Introduction The racks in the S7 400 have the following tasks e They hold the modules e They supply the modules with operating voltage e They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal buses Structure of the Racks A rack consists of the following elements e Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting the rack e Plas
210. Order nig Upper limit value for Figure A 5 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Note The representation of the limit values and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value representation see Chapter 6 Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 11 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Chapter Overview Seaion n ae Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2 Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2 1 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2 o S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 1 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules B 1 Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program In This Appendix This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program Diagnostic Data are Contained in Data Records The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 43 bytes long and are contained in data records 0 and 1 e
211. Other Parameters 19 2 VDC to 30 VDC Protection class in accordance l with protective Dynamic with IEC 60536 grounding conductor 10S VOS IO S02 VDE Overvoltage category II Rated input current 4 5 A Pollution severity 2 Starting current inrush Peak value 44A Half value width 20 ms Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 150 V lt U lt 300 V 2200 VDC primary lt gt PE Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve B2 Buffering of power failures 4 ms to 5 ms Power input 108 W Power loss 33 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup batteries optional 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 35 Power Supply Modules 3 14 Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A 6ES7405 0KA01 O0AA0 and PS 405 10A R 405 OKR00 0AA0 Function The power supply modules PS 405 10A standard and PS 405 10A R redundancy capable see Section 3 2 are designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC and supply 5 VDC 10 A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R Fixing screw LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Stan
212. P mode of the CPU When you have set all the parameters download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU When there is a transition from STOP to RUN mode the CPU transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules In addition if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the module in the necessary position refer to Section 5 4 Static and Dynamic Parameters The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU as described above You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by means of SFCs Note however that after a change from RUN STOP STOP RUN of the CPU the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A Table 5 41 Static and dynamic parameters of the analog groups Parameter Settable with CPU Operating Mode PG STEP 7 HWCOMFIG STOP Dynamic PG STEP 7 HWCOMFIG STOP SFC 55 in the user program S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 39 Analog Modules 5 7 1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below depending on the functionality Refer to the section on the module concerned starting from Section 5 18 to find out which subset the module is capable of
213. Rated input voltage 120 230 VAC VDC e Suitable for switches and two wire proximity switches S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 50 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC Process OON OD ORWND gt ZAHA Data register and bus control PAA N N N N D Figure 4 11 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 51 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC Programming package Data for Selecting a Sensor Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Input voltage package e Rated value 120 230 VUC For signal 1 79 to 264 VAG Dimensions W XH xD 25 x 290 x 210 80 to 264 VDC in millimeters e For signal 0 0 VUC to 40 VUC Weight Approx 650 g e Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz Number of inputs 16 At signal 1 2 mA to 5 mA Length of cable At signal 0 O to 1 mA e Unshielded 600 m Input delay e Shielded 1000 m AROMIS 5 to 25 ms Voltages Currents Potentials e At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms Number of inputs that can be 16 at 120 V Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 1 triggered simultaneously 8 at 240 V Connection of two wire BEROs Possible 16 with fan e Permitted bias current Max 1 mA subassembly Isolation Between channels and Yes backp
214. S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts Parameters can be assigned e Hardware interrupt Parameters can be assigned Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic Interrupt Diagnostic functions e Group error display Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF For internal fault For external fault Diagnostic information Yes readable Substitute value can be applied No Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values Input resistance 25 mV 1 MQ 50 mV 1 MQ 80 mV 1 MQ 250 mV 1 MQ 500 mV 1 MQ 1 V 1 MQ 2 5 V1 MQ 5 V 1 MQ 1V to 5 V 1 MQ 10 V 1 MQ 0 mA to 20 mA 50 Q 5 mA 50 Q 10 mA 50 Q 20 mA 50 Q 4 mA to 20 mA 50 Q 0 to 48 Q 1 MQ 0 to 150 2 1 MQ 0 to 300 02 1 MQ 0 to 600 02 1 MQ 0 to 6000 9 1 MQ can be used up to 5000 Q TC type B 1 MQ TC type R 1 MQ TC type S 1 MQ TC type T 1 MQ TC type E 1 MQ TC type J 1 MQ TC type K 1 MQ TC type U 1 MQ TC type L 1 MQ TC type N 1 MQ e Voltage e Current e Resistors e Thermocouples e Resistance thermometer Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Maximum input current for current input destruction limit Connection of the signal sensor For measuring voltage e For measuring current As two wire transmitter As four wire transmitter For measur
215. S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 6 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 3 Analog Value Representation Introduction This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output ranges which you can use with the analog modules Converting Analog Values Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal Analog Value Representation with 16 Bit Resolution The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in two s complement The resulting assignment is as follows Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Value of bits 219 214 213 912 911 910 99 98 Bit 15 Can Be Interpreted as a Sign The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15 e OEF e a Resolution Less than 16 Bits If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits the analog value is stored left justified on the module The lower order bit positions not used are padded with zeros 0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 o Analog Modules Example In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with 0 are written for low resolution Table 5 4 Example Bit Pattern of a 16 Bit and a 13 Bit Analog Value 5 3
216. S7 400 i det eksplosionfarlige omrade zone 2 Zone 2 Eksplosionsfarlige omrader inddeles i zoner Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter hvor sandsynligt det er at der er en eksplosiv atmosf re Eksplosionsfare Eksplosiv gasatmosfeere Omrader rundt om flangeforbindelser med optr der kun sj ldent og varer flade pakninger ved r rledninger i lukkede kort Sikkert j Uden for zone 2 omr de Standardanvendelser decentral periferi det f lgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr installation af SIMATIC S7 400 i det eksplosionfarlige omr de Yderligere informationer Yderligere informationer om de forskellige S7 400 komponenter findes i manualen Produktionssted Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Godkendelse x 3G EExnAlIT3 76 efter EN 50021 1999 Kontrolnummer KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Bem rk Komponenter med godkendelsen 113 G EEx nA II T3 T6 m kun monteres i automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7 400 udstyrskategori 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 32 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Vedligeholdelse Skal den p g ldende komponent repareres bedes De sende den til produktionsstedet Reparation m kun udf res der S rlige betingelser i SIMATIC S7 400 skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54 denne forbindelse skal
217. SIEMENS SIMATIC 37 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Reference Manual This manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6ES7498 8AA03 8BA0 Edition 09 2003 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications 1 2 3 Power Supply Modules 7 4 Digital Modules 5 Analog Modules 6 Interface Modules r IM 463 2 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface 8 IM 467 IM 467 FO Cable Duct and Fan 9 Subassemblies RS 485 Repeater CPUs for M7 400 12 M7 400 Expansions 13 Interface Submodules Appendices Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Spare Parts and Accessories Guidelines for Handling Electro Static Sensitive Devices ESD List of Abbreviations Glossary Index Safety Guidelines gt p This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against damage These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and graded according to severity by the following texts Danger indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precau tions are not taken Warning indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Caution indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken Ca
218. Sensor Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters 25 X 290 x 210 Input voltage e Rated value 120 230 VUC Weight Approx 650 g e For signal 1 74 to 264 VAC Data for Specific Module basis c AUMORrONINpULS e For signal 0 0 to 40 VAC Length of cable 40 to 40 VDC Unshielded Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz Shielded Input current Voltages Currents Potentials e At signal 1 120 V Typ 10 mA AC Power rated voltage of the None Typ 1 8 mA DC electronics L e At signal 1 230 V Typ 14 mA AC Number of inputs 16 Typ 2 mA DC that can be triggered simultaneously Isolation e At signal 0 0 to 6 mA AC Between channels and Yes 0 to 2 mA DC backplane bus Input delay s Between the channels Yes e At 0 to sc Max 20 ms AC In groups of 4 Max 15 ms DC Permitted potential difference At 1 to O Max 30 ms AC e Between Minternal andthe 250 VAC Wa eama inputs Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 e Between the inputs of the 500 VAC Pere different groups Connection of two wire BEROs Possible Insulation resistance 4000 VAC e Permitted bias current Max 5 mA AC Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 80 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 12 W module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None Substitute value can be applied No S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications
219. Supply Modules Programming Package Output Rating Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 0 package Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Dimensions WxHxD mm 25x290x217 Weight 0 8 kg Cable cross section Output voltages e Rated values Output currents e Rated values 3 x 1 5 mm litz wire with wire end ferrule use component conductor or flexible sheath cable Max residual ripple Max switching peaks Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm Input Rating Idle conditions Input voltage e Rated value 24 VDC e Permitted range Static 19 2 VDC to 30 VDC Dynamic with IEC 60536 18 5 VDC to 30 2 VDC Overvoltage category 5 1 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 4A 24 VDC 0 5 A 5 VDC 50 mVgs 24 VDC 200 mVss 5 VDC 150 mVs 24 VDC 500 mVs 5 VDC 100 mA Base load required 24 VDC Idling proof no base load required Other Parameters Protection class in accordance with protective grounding conductor Rated input current 2A Pollution severity 2 Peak value 27A Half value width 10 ms Starting current inrush Rated voltage Ue 0 lt Ue lt 50 V In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve B2 Overvoltage resistance 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V Test Voltage 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 2200 VDC primary lt gt PE Buffering of power failures 4 ms to 5 ms Power input 48 W Power loss 16 W Backup current Backup battery option Max 100 uA at power off 1
220. Switching In an EXM 478 expansion module two interface submodule signals can be switched to another signal switching This signal switching is done during configuration of the interface submodule in the BIOS setup Refer to the interface submodule description to find out if an interface submodule requires signals from a further interface submodule that is if signal switching is necessary S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 3 Interface Submodules 13 2 Submodule IDs and Insertion Rules Submodule IDs The following table contains an overview of the submodule IDs for the interface submodules Table 13 2 Overview of the Submodule IDs for the Interface Submodules e E Insertion Rules The interface submodules cannot be operated in all submodule receptacles The following table shows the insertion rules for those interface submodules that cannot be used in all receptacles Table 13 3 Insertion Rules for Interface Submodules that Cannot be Used in All Receptacles Submodule Receptacle Numbers in the Following Modules CPU 486 3 Interface Submodule EXM 378 2 EXM 378 3 FM 456 4 CPU 488 3 EXM 478 2 3 415 0 1 0 3 all IF 962 VGA sesrecormonn eiee e e e semwa eee el 6ES7 964 2AA00 0ABO Preferred slot for IF 964 DP if only one submodule is inserted see Table 11 8 on page 11 40 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 4 A
221. T INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT Voltage selector if present 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 1 Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module 3 8 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Meaning of the LEDs The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below Section 3 5 contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to acknowledge the faults INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC Table 3 3 INTF DC 5V DC 24 V LEDs coo Meaning OOO O INTE o Lights up in the event of an internal fault 5 C Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits 24 VDC Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits BAF BATTF Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators Table 3 4 BAF BATTF LEDs o cor Meaning OOOO BAF Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT position BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty if the polarity is reversed or if the battery is missing and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT position BAF BATT1F BATT2F Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators Table 3 5 BAF BATT1F BATT2F LEDs foo o o oe O O BAF Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the BATT IN
222. T in kg 2 5 1 25 3 8 as of version 03 2 0 as of version 03 Busses Restricted Restricted I O bus I O bus S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 10 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Chapter Overview Semn oon e MC Spwonies 82 32 Resunsan Power Supa Woaies i ee Backip Baten pion dC 3 6 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0ODA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA01 0AA0 Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA01 0AA0 and PS 407 10A R 6ES7407 OKRO0 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 0RA01 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0ODA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0DA01 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 10A 6ES7405 OKA00 0AA0 Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A 6ES7405 0KA01 0AA0 and PS 405 10A R 6ES7405 OKRO0 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 0ORA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 0RA01 0AA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 1 Power Supply Modules 3 1 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules Tasks of the Power Supply Modules The power supply modules of the S7 400 supply the other modules in the rack with their operating voltages via the backplane bus They do not provide load voltages for the signal modules Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Module
223. TEP 7 or the online help function for details of how to proceed The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463 2 and IM 314 further EU 184U EU 187U central 6 6 6 6 6 S5 S5 E S5 U expansion IM 312 3 expansion IM 312 3 expansion AM 312 5 unit unit unit IM 314 IM 314 IM 314 S5 S5 S5 expansion IM 300 3 pasion IM 300 3 expansion M 300 5 zu unit uni Terminating connector 760 1AA11 All 721 connecting cables S5 U S5 expansion pews expansion IM 312 5 unit unit Central mounting rack M 314 IM 314 S7 400 S5 66 IM 463 2 TE expansion IM 300 3 expansion IM 300 5 unit U unit Terminating connector 760 1AA11 All 721 connecting cables max 600 m To further S5 expansion units distributed max 4 per IM 463 2 Figure 7 3 Connection Variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463 2 and IM 314 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 7 10 A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 7 7 Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable Table 7 6 Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721 T C om a
224. TOIEG Oa EYKATAOTABE n OuOKEUN ia TO TEPIBANUG TIPETTE va TIDOBAETTETAI OHAWON TOU KATAOKEUGOTN vid TH Cwvn 2 OUUQ Wva pe TO TIPOTUTTO EN 50021 E v oTo KAQAWOIO OTNV EIOO0OO TOU KAAWOIOU AUTOU TOU TTEDIBANUATOSG KOTW aTTO OUVONKES AEITOUPYIAG n Oeppokpaocia CETTEpAOE TOUG 70 C A OTAV KATW aTTO OUVONKES AEITOUPYIAG n BEPUOKPAOIA OTN SIAKAGOWON TOU OUPUATOG UTTOPE va eivai UEYOAUTEPN at 80 C TIPETTE O1 BEOUOKPAOIAKES IOIOTHTES TWV KOAWOIWV VO TAUTICOVTAI UE TIC TIPAYUOATIKA HETONUEVES BEOUOKPQOIEC OL XPNOIMOTIOIOUUEVES EIDOOO KAAWOIWV TIPETTE VA OCUUUOPMWVOVTAI HE TO Ba u mtpootaociac IP 54 oTnv EvoTnta 7 2 OUUMWVd HE TO TIPOTUTTO EN 50021 OXEG Ol CUOKEVEC OUUTTEPIAGUBAVOUEVWV OIAKOTITWV K Q TOU OUVOEOVTAI OTIC EIDOOOUG KAI ECOOOUG TWV OUOTNUATWV S 400 TIPETTE va g pouv EYKPINEVN TIPOOTAOGIA KATA EkpNn nc TUTTOU EEx nA EEx nC Tlp trei va An Oouv YETOG va UNV UTTOPE va vVivel UTTEOBAON TNG OVOUAOTIKNG TAONG YEOW al vidiacg UETABOANS TNG TAONS TTavwW att 40 epiox PEpyOKPAaOCIAs TrEpIBGAAOVTOG 0 C Ewes 60 C p TEe va ToTTOPE TNE p ca oTo TIEPIBANUG OE EVOIAKPITO ONUEIO WETA TO AVOIVUC HIG TVAKION UE TNV AKOAOUBN TIPOEIOOTTIOINON Npoedotroinon TO TIEPIBANUA ETTITPETTETAI va AVOIYE vo VIA HIKOO XPOVIKO OIGOTNUG TT X VI TN OIEVEPYEIA OTITIKNS SIGyvwons Mnv KavETE yENON SIAKOTITWV UNV TPABATE EUBUOUATWVETE OOUIKA OUYKPOTNUATA KAI UN OIAXWPICETE NAEKTPOMOP
225. The module processes the channels one after the other After all the measured values have been converted the module of the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on all channels You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 69 Analog Modules 5 18 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 6ES7431 1KF00 0ABO Characteristics 5 70 The analog input module SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit has the following features 8 inputs for voltage current measurement 4 inputs for resistance measurement Unlimited measuring range selection 13 bit resolution Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the reference potential of the connected sensors and Mana is 30 VAC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit Bus S7 400 Suppressor circuit current jumpering Bus control Front connector monitoring Bus S7 400 Bus S7 400 Figure 5 25 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 1 Warning The module can be damaged The shunt resist
226. Types R S Types R S ee R o we i in K 20190 4EDEy 32766 7FFEY i 22922 598Ay 3 Overrange 17770 45244 32180 7DB4y 20432 4FDOY 17690 451Ay 32162 7DA2y 20422 4FC6y Rated range 500 FE0C4 580 FDBCy 2232 sa T FEO2y FDAAyW 2222 aka Underrange F95Cy F54Cy 1032 0408 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T Table 5 29 Analog Value Representation for alaaa Type T Type T B E 15184 1004 0 10040 27384 813 2 8132 1FC44 Overrange OFAAy OFAOy 7520 1D60 y 6732 1AACyY i Rated range F5744 4540 EE44 00204 lt 270 0 lt 454 0 lt EE44 lt 3 2 lt 32 nderin 2700 4540 0020 In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow if FOC4y is violated and if E504 is violated and If FB70y is violated and outputs 8000 outputs 8000 outputs 8000H S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 21 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U Table 5 30 Analog Value Representation for Type U Ty eU decimal 8500 2134H i 2738 0 11232 2BEOy i Overrange 6010 177Ay 8742 22264 2B824 6000 W 17704 2B70y 8732 221Cy i Rated range 2000 F830y F330H 02DCy lt 200 0 lt 328 0 lt 73 2 lt
227. U and the user program The order in which the blocks of the user program are processed is defined in the sequence layers SFB gt System function block SFC gt System function Short circuit Connection with negligibly low impedance between operationally opposed live conductors The current is a multiple of the operating current this can result in thermal overloading rated short time current or mechanical overloading rated peak withstand current of the switchgear and system components Shunt resistor Parallel or shunt resistor in electrical circuits Signal module Signal modules SM form the interface between the process and the programmable controller There are input modules output modules input output modules both digital and analog Slave A slave can only exchange data with a gt master when requested by it to do so Smoothing Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering For specific modules it is possible to choose between no low medium and high smoothing The higher the smoothing the greater is the time constant of the digital filter Standard communication Communication via standard and standardized protocols such as PROFIBUS DP or PROFIBUS FMS S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 17 Glossary STARTUP The STARTUP mode is traversed during the transition from STOP mode to RUN mode STARTUP
228. a and power supply of the 0 5ms Max 50 m electronics 3ms Max 600 m Shielded input delay Between the channels In groups of 0 1 ms Max 30 m Permitted potential difference 05ms Max 70 m Between the different 75 VDC 60 VAC circuits 3ms Max 1000 m Insulation tested with e Channels against 500 VDC backplane bus and load voltage L Channel groups between 500 VDC themselves Current consumption e From the backplane bus Max 130 mA From the power supply L Max 120 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 5 W module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 34 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Status Interrupts Diagnostics Time Frequency Status display Green LED per Internal preparation time 1 for channel a sg only status recognition Interrupts Input delay of the max 50 us e Hardware interrupt Parameters can be channel groups assigned 0 05 ms 0 05 ms Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be Input delay of the assigned channel groups max 70 us Diagnostic functions 0 05 ms 0 1 ms or 0 1 ms 0 1 ms e Monitoring of the power Yes electronics channel groups gt 0 5 ms Load voltage monitor Green LED per group n Status recognition and Group error display enable process interrupt For internal fault Red LED INTF Input delay of the For external fault Red LED EXTF channel groups 0 05 ms 0 05 ms 2 Input delay for the Diagnostic informatio
229. a interrupt request to the relevant processor interrupt request in the BIOS setup Submodule ID The IF 961 DIO interface submodule has the submodule ID 02 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 30 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 6 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications The IF 961 DIO interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7961 1AA00 0ACO Permissible potential Di 3 d Weight differences Between the M 75 VDC Dimensions W x H x D terminals of the groups 60 VAC mm 18 2 x 6 x 97 Between the input WxHxD mm M terminal and the 75 VDC Weight 0 065 kg central grounding point 60 VAC Module Specific Data e Isolation checked with 500 VDC Submodule ID 024 Supply voltage Supplied from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the Cable length M7 300 400 e Unshielded 200 m at 750 us expansion modules 600 m at 3 ms delay Current consumption in the time M7 300 e Shielded 1000 m for dimensioning the 24 V Voltages Currents Potentials current supply Nominal voltage T consumption in the Load current supply L 24 VDC fora mendonnaihe Sy Permissible nominal current suppl
230. a volume per slave Consistency Configuration software DP slave 5 VDC via the backplane bus 1 3A Max 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for outputs Yes No No 96 32 1 diagnostic connection Max 244 bytes Max 128 bytes STEP 7 No Deviations from the DP Interface Integrated in the CPU Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics Possibly extended SFC run times Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 4 2 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 FO 6ES7 467 5FJ00 0ABO Dimensions and Weight PROFIBUS DP Dimensions 25 x 290 x 210 Conditions of Use Wet Any Can be used in SIMATIC S7 400 max 4 Weight 700 g IM 467 in the central PROFIBUS DP controller e Standard PROFIBUS DP IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443 5 EN 50 170 Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane e Transmission rate 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps bus parameterizable in steps 3 Current consumption 1 3A Mbps and 6 Mbps not From5VDC possible ep anemieaion FOC Addressing range Max 4 KB for inputs and 4 technolo KB for outputs eC gy Wavelength 660 nm 2 x DP master Yes Duplex socket Current consumption DPV 1 No Current consumption from Total current consumption Enable disable No the S7 400 bus 24 VDC of the components Number of connectable I O 96 The IM does not consume connected to the DP device
231. able Controllers Module Specifications 3 38 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 405 20 A Programming Package Output Rating Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 0 Output voltages package e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output currents Dimensions WxHxD mm 75x290x217 e Rated values 5 VDC 20 A Weight 2 2 kg 24 VDC 1 0 A Cable cross section 3x1 5 mm litz wire Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVgg with wire end ferrule use component 24 VDC 200 mVss conductor or flexible Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs sheath cable 24 VDC 500 mVs Cable diameter Slog mm Idle conditions 5 VDC 200 mA base Input Rating load required Input voltage 24 VDC Idling proof gi aan 24 VDC no base load required e Permitted range Static Other Parameters 19 2 VDC to 30 VDC Protection class in accordance l with protective Dynamic with IEC 60536 grounding conductor 10 VOC IO SO e VDE Overvoltage category lI Rated input current 7 2A Pollution severity 9 Starting current inrush Peak value 48 A Half value width 25 ms Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 150 V lt U lt 300 V 2200 VDC primary lt gt PE Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve B2 Buffering of power failures 4 ms to 5 ms Power input 172 8 W Power loss 46 8 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backu
232. age 5 144 0 05 Destruction limit for voltages currents connected from outside 0 05 s Voltage at outputs to MANA Current None None Connection of actuators No e For voltage output Two conductor connection 10 V OVto10V 1Vto5V 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA Four conductor connection measuring circuit e For current output Two conductor connection Min 1 KQ Max 1 uF Max 500 Q 600 Q with reduced Ucm to lt 1V Max 1 mH Yes Max 30 mA Max 19 V Max 20 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms cycle factor 1 20 Max 40 mA continuous Possible without compensation for circuit resistance Possible Possible S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 25 1 Commissioning the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 5 43 on page 5 42 Assigning Parameters to Channels You can configure each output channel of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit individually You can thus assign different parameters to each output channel 5 25 2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432 AO 8x 13 Bit Wiring the Analog Outputs You can wire the outputs as voltage or current outputs or disable them You wire the outputs by mea
233. al Assignment Diagram for Redundant Supply of Sensors The figure below shows how sensors can additionally be supplied by means of Vs with a redundant voltage source for example via another module Short circuit proof driver om sapre ts De Ee Digital input oM module to the sensors 1 L Figure 4 5 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Dimensions and Weight Voltages Currents Potentials Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC in millimeters electronics and sensor L Weight Approx 600 g e Reverse polarity protection Yes Data for Specific Module Number of inputs that can be 16 Number of inputs triggered simultaneously Length of cable Isolation e Unshielded input delay 0 1ms 0 5ms 3ms Shielded input delay 0 1ms 05ms Between the different 75 VDC 60 VAC circuits e Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference 3ms Insulation tested with e Channels against 500 VDC backplane bus and load voltage L Channel groups between 500 VDC themselves Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 130 mA From the power supply L Max 120 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 5 W module S7 400
234. al Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 4 20 6ES7421 1BL01 OAA0 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x24 VDC 4 23 6ES7421 7BHO0 0OABO Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 4 32 6ES7421 7BH01 0ABO Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC 4 41 6ES7421 5EHO0 0AA0 igi 4 56 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 6 7BH01 0AB0 i Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 4 4 6ES7421 7DH00 0ABO0 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC 4 6ES7421 1FH00 0AA0 i 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC 4 6ES7421 1FH20 0AA0 eT 15 4 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC 4 6ES7421 1EL00 0AA0 4 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 4 62 6ES7422 1BH11 0AA0 0 3 igi 5 9 i i i Gesrmesemoono oo onan 6ES7422 5EH10 0AB0 6ES7422 1BL00 0AA0 6ES7422 7BL00 0AB0 6ES7422 1FFO0 0AA0 3 i 8 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2A 4 6ES7422 1FHOO OAAO 7 1 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 23 4 Digital Output Module SM 422 4 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 6ES7422 5EH00 0AB0 4 24 Relay Output Module SM 422 4 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A 6ES7422 1HHO00 0AA0 3 5 5 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 5 6ES7422 1BH10 0AA0 6 6 8 9 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 1 Module Overview Introduct
235. al specifications 13 31 13 10 addressing 13 12 AT compatible 13 12 M7 300 400 reserved 13 13 characteristics interrupts pin assignments COM technical specifications S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 6 A5E00069467 07 IF 962 LPT 13 16 addressing AT compatible M7 300 400 reserved characteristics interrupt request pin assignments technical specifications 13 22 IF 962 VGA 13 5 addressing 13 7 characteristics 13 5 interrupts 13 7 keyboard connection pin assignments VGA 1 13 6 submodule ID 13 7 technical e onar 4138 video operating modes 13 9 IF 964 DP 13 61 13 61 61 additional information 13 62 addressing 13 64 adressing intermediate memory 13 64 characteristics 13 61 interrupts 13 64 pin assignments 13 63 technical specifications 13 65 IM 314 7 2 IM 467 8 2 cance Services configuration 8 6 connection to Hee ey DP 8 8 technical specifications 8 12 12 IM 467 FO 8 2 communication services 8 3 configuration connection to PROFIBUS DP 8 8 fiber optic cable connecting technical specifications 8 13 Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131 for digital inputs 4 15 Input delay Glossary 8 digital input module 4 7 Insertion rules interface submodule 13 4 Insulation test 1 18 Integration time Glossary 8 Interface selecting Index Interface modu
236. alog conversion takes place in the selected channel You can see the assignment of the address to the output channels and the meaning of the data bits in Table The data format of the analog output value is a 16 bit value in twos complement You can see the representation of the digital output value in Table 13 44 Table 13 40 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Analog Output Function IF 961 AlO Offset 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 DAC data channel 0 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 DAC data channel 1 Status After Switching On Both output channels contain the value 0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 47 Interface Submodules 13 7 9 Analog Input Function Analog Input Function Tables 13 41 ad 13 42 contain an overview of the read and write registers for the analog input function The data format of analog input values is a 16 bit value in two s complement You can see the representation of the digitized measured value in Table 13 43 Table 13 41 Meaning of the Input Bits in the Analog Input Function IF 961 AlO Offset 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 21 20 ADC data channel 0 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 21 20 ADC data channel 1 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 21 20 ADC data channel 2 215 214 213 212 21
237. am Table A 1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules SFC No Identifier Application 55 WR_PARM Transfer of modifiable parameters data record 1 to the addressed signal module 56 WR_DPARM Transfer of parameters data record 0 or 1 from the CPU to the addressed signal module 57 PARM_MOD Transfer of all parameters data record 0 and 1 from the CPU to the addressed signal module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 2 A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Description of the Parameters The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes The parameters of the signal modules are described in the online help of STEP 7 in this reference manual You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules Further References You can find an in depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for this purpose in the STEP 7 manuals S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 3 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules You will see which parameters you can modify from the list e in STEP7 e
238. ameterized and the If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized first module cycle not completed analog values are in the intermediate memory this message is reset S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 65 Analog Modules Table 5 47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures continued Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy Message EPROM error The module is defective Replace module ADC DAC error Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt since the previous interrupt was not acknowledged configuration error possible Configuring parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Check measuring range module assignment error module Reassign module parameter Change interrupt handling in the CPU change priority for interrupt OB shorten interrupt program Short circuit to M A short circuit to the M potential has Eliminate short circuit occurred on the sensor supply of two wire transmitters Wire break Resistance too high in the sensor Use different type of sensor or connection connection e g use conductors with a larger cross sectional core area Open circuit between module and Close circuit sensor Channel not connected open Disable channel Measuring Type parameter Connect channel Reference channel The reference junction connected at Check terminals error channel 0 is faulty due to a wire br
239. ammable Controllers Module Specifications 3 14 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short circuit or overload after 1 s to 3 s The module will try to restart after no more than 3 s If the error has been eliminated by then the module will start up This applies to the following modules PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0DA01 0AA0 PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA01 0AA0 PS 405 10A 6ES7405 0KA01 0AA0 PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA01 0AA0 release 5 PS 405 10AR 6ES7405 OKROO 0AA0 PS 407 10AR 6ES7407 OKROO0 0AAO release 7 PS 405 20A 6ES7405 0ORA01 0AA0 PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORA01 0AA0 Overload at 24 V In the event of overload at 24 V the output current is electronically limited to a value between 100 and 150 of the rated value If the voltage then goes below the undervoltage threshold of 19 2 V 0 5 corresponds to 19 2 V to 20 16 V the modules respond as follows e Inthe case of power supply modules with 4 A 0 5 A output current the 24 V voltage is disconnected and reconnected at a repeat rate of approx 0 5 s to 1 s until there is an output voltage that exceeds the undervoltage threshold e Inthe case of power supply modules with 10 A 1 A or 20 A 1 A output current the voltage depends on the load impedance and the module runs in characteristic curve mode After the overload has been eliminated the voltage returns to the rated range and the green 24 V LED flas
240. arameter assignment the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a short circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 29 Digital Modules Effect of Errors and Parameter Assignment on the Input Values The input values of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter assignment of the module The following table lists the effects on the input values You will find more diagnostic messages of the module in the Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Table 4 12 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Diagnostic Message Diagnostics Reaction to Input Value of Digital Module Parameter Error Parameter Module not Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal all channels parameterized disabled No front connector SV Parameterized substitute value rg KLV Last read valid value Incorrect parameters Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal module all incorrectly module channel disabled parameterized channels STOP operating mode Cannot be Process value not updated disabled Internal voltage failure Cannot be SV Parameterized substitute value pea KLV Last read valid value Hardware interrupt lost Cannot be Not relevant Current process value disabled Wire break for each Deactivated 0 signal channel Activated SV Parameterized substitute value KLV
241. are described in detail in Section 5 4 The corresponding table in Section 5 20 2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range In addition the necessary settings are embossed on the module Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 56 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO0 Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Measurement e Measuring type Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current four wire transmitter 2DMU Current two wire transmitter R 4L Resistance four conductor Static Channel terminal Measuring Refer to Section 5 20 2 for the range measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set Interference 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz none suppression Smoothing None High Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings ok S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 94 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Smoothing of the Measured Values You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5 6 You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431 Al8 x 14 Bit The module cycle time is a constant irrespective of how many channels a
242. are in use see Section 12 2 Three submodule receptacle numbers are used per slot on the backplane bus The submodule receptacle number is linked to the other values on this setup page If you change the submodule receptacle number the associated values also appear if they have been entered I O Base Gray Type Shows the current address of the expansion module see Chapter 12 M7 400 Expansions or CPU associated with the submodule receptacle However the double width CPU has two addresses one address for submodule receptacles in its left half and a second address higher by 100 for the submodule receptacle in its right half The information cannot be edited Type Configured Detected Gray Type At Type configured you enter the type of interface submodule already plugged into this slot or still to be plugged in Detected indicates the type of interface submodule currently at the last CPU power up occupying this slot The information cannot be edited The BIOS executes a SETPOINT ACTUAL VALUE comparison If the value set in Type configured does not agree with the value in detected or if the value OFFH has been configured in Type configured the BIOS does not execute the configuration for this interface submodule If there is no interface submodule in the submodule receptacle the value FF is displayed S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 26 A5E00069467
243. are to be buffered for the time it takes to replace the module Bus A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes Data transmission can be serial or parallel and be performed over electric conductors or fiber optic cables S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 1 Glossary Bus connector A physical connection between the bus nodes and the bus cable Bus segment A bus segment is a self contained section of a serial bus system Bus segments are interconnected by means of repeaters Central controller An 7 400 consists of a central controller CC that can be allocated expansion units EU as required The central controller is the mounting rack that contains the gt CPU Central processing unit gt CPU Cold restart Restart of the programmable controller and its user program after all the dynamic data variables of the input output image internal registers timers counters etc and the corresponding program sections have been reset to a specified value A cold restart can be automatically triggered such as after a power failure or loss of information in dynamic memory sections etc or manually by pressing the reset key Common mode voltage A voltage that is common to all inputs outputs of a group and is measured between this group and any reference point usually to ground Communication load This is the load on the cyclic program scann
244. ashes Entered Diagnostic interrupt Beyond the Measured Hardware interrupt programmed value limit 1 Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 32 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Effect of Range of Values on the Analog Output Module The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range Table 5 40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values Process Value Output Value LED Diagnostics Lies Within Rated range Rated range CPUvalue value Overrange und cai m value errange omw osa 5 5 3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit Operational Limit The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range authorized for the module referred to the rated range of the module Basic Error Limit The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 C referred to the rated range of the module Note The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the rated range of the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 33 Analog Modules Example of Determinat
245. asuring Type parameter for unused channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 63 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description Type of Sensor Module Setting U Voltage You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the 1to5V voltage measuring range 10V 2DMU Current 4 to 20 mA To supply these transmitters with two wire transmitter current you must connect 24 V to the L and M front connector terminals You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 4DMU Current 4 to 20 mA C You will find the digitized analog four wire transmitter Som values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range Default Settings The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Voltage for the measuring method and 10 V for the measuring range You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit inSTEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 106 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 22 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7QH00 0ABO0 Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit has the following feature
246. ata There are the following logic blocks organization blocks OBs function blocks FBs functions FCs system function block SFBs system functions SFCs Owing to its standardized AT computer architecture automation computers M7 300 and M7 400 represent a freely programmable expansion of the SIMATIC automation platform The hardware configuration is similar to that of a S7 300 or S7 400 The user programs for the SIMATIC M7 can also be programmed in a high level language such as C or graphically When they are in possession of access rights on the bus masters can send data to other nodes and request data from other nodes active node Measuring principle instantaneous value encoding A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for very fast measuring operations or variables that change very rapidly In this process the module accesses the variable to be measured as fast as possible and delivers an instantaneous snapshot of the signal at a particular time Due to this measuring procedure the modules are more sensitive than modules with an integrating measuring procedure Interference affecting the measured value can thus corrupt the result You must ensure when using these modules that the measuring signal is clean by adhering strictly to the installation guidelines for example Measuring principle integrating Glossary 10 A module with an integrating measuring procedure is always used for non time
247. ate e For resistive load e For inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 e For lamp load Limit internal of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up to Short circuit protection of the output e Threshold on Status Interrupts Diagnostics Green LED per channel None None Data for Selecting an Actuator Min L 0 3 V 0 5 A 5 mA to 0 6 A Max 0 3 mA Max 1 ms Max 1 ms 48 Q to 4 KQ Max 5 W Possible only outputs of the same group Possible only outputs of the same group Possible Max 100 Hz Max 2 Hz at 0 3 A Max 0 5 Hz at 0 5 A Max 10 Hz Typ 27 V Electronically cyclic Typ 0 7 A to 1 5 A 1 A supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0 Channels 0 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore form one supply group S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 20 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A 6ES7422 7BL00 0AB0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A has the following features 32 outputs fused and isolated in groups of 8 0 5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the fron
248. ation Register The BIOS setup defines in which AT compatible I O address area the COM interface is to be operated or whether it is only to be operated in the reserved I O address area and this information is stored in the configuration register Tables 13 11 to 13 13 give you an overview of the possible settings in the configuration register Table 13 11 Offset Address for the Configuration Register IF 962 COM Offset Address 00 Configuration register Read write Table 13 12 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 COM A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 13 Interface Submodules Table 13 13 Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 COM VO Add Addressing Type COM b a pis Bit 6 2 Bit 5 1 Bit 4 0 Addressing only possible in the reserved I O address area from C000p default o ee ee 2804H Note The AT compatible I O address can only be set once for each COM port of an automation computer including those permanenily installed in a programmable module COM Ports The COM ports COMa and COMb of the UART 16C552 can be addressed from offset addresses 104 or 18y in accordance with component specification 16C552 Data Formats The following data formats can be set in the IF 962 COM interface submodule Data bits 5 bits 6 bits 7 bits 8 bits Parity Even odd disable Stop bit 1 bit 1 5 bits 2 bits
249. ations A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Chapter Overview secon Desi Pe How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the A 2 User Program A2 Parameters of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules 2 Input Modules ER of the Digital ee Modules Parameters of the Analog Input Modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 1 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameter Assignment in the User Program You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7 In the user program you can use a SFC e to reassign parameters to the module and e and transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module In the M7 400 In M7 400 programmable controllers you can also parameterize the signal modules in the user program with the M7 API software refer to System Software Manuals for M7 300 400 Parameters Stored in Data Records The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1 Modifiable Parameters You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using SFC 55 The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program SFCs for Parameter Assignment The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in the user progr
250. ative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow If F31Cy is violated and f EAOCy is violated and if FDC8y is violated and outputs 8000 outputs 8000 outputs 8000H Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K Table 5 25 Analog Value Representation for Type K B E Type K Hexade hi K cimal 16220 3F5Cy 29516 734Cy 18952 4A08 Overrange 13730 35A2y 25034 61CAy 16462 404E 13720 35984 25061 61B8y 1645 2 16452 4044 l i Rated range 2700 F5744 4540 EE444 0000H lt 270 0 lt F5744 lt 454 0 lt EE44 In the case of incorrect wiring for example polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range for example incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module reports an underflow f FOC4y is violated and 1f E5D4y is violated and 1f FB70y is violated and outputs 8000 outputs 8000H outputs 8000H S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 19 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L Table 5 26 Analog Value Representation for Type L o Unis O Hexa in K pect nena Range decimal decimal 11500 2CECy 21020 521Cy 14232 37984 z Overrange 9010 23324 16538 409Ay 11742 2DDEy 9000 23284 i 16520 40884 f 11732 2DD4y Rated range 2000 F8304 3280 F3
251. attery Option 0 0 cee eee eens 3 4 Controls and Indicators 2 535 0e60 s2 ereseheres cees Gyerednsee dae 3 5 Fault Error Messages via LEDS nanananna ccc cee 3 6 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA00 0AA0 3 7 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 ODA01 OAA0 3 8 Power Supply Modules PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA01 0AA0 and PS 407 10A R 6ES7407 OKROO OAAO 0c cecceeeeeeeeesees 3 9 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORAOO OAAO 3 10 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 ORA01 OAAO 3 11 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 ODA00 OAA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Contents xii 3 12 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A 6ES7405 0DA01 0AA0 3 32 3 13 Power Supply Module PS 405 10A 6ES7405 OKA00 0AAO 3 14 Power Supply Modules PS 405 10A 6ES7405 0KA01 0AAO and PS 405 10A R 405 OKROO OAAO 00 c cece cece eee neces 3 15 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 ORA00 OAA0 3 16 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 ORA01 OAA0 Digital MOGUICS wcssecuceencew outer ece essen a obese a 4 1 Module Overview 0 6 ce ee eee nee eee een ene 4 3 4 2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 4 5 4 3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment 0000 cece eee eee 4 3 1 Parameters of the Digital Inpu
252. ay This value is used to set the delay time in milliseconds after which characters are transferred with the maximum keyboard rate Num Lock On If you activate this check box Num Lock becomes active after BIOS power up System Memory OK Button lf this check box is activated only sample tests are made of the main memory at power up so the test is especially fast Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page DEFAULT Button When this button is activated the default settings are entered in the setup page again The original settings are deleted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 37 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 13 Setup Page System Opening the Setup Page If you have selected System and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 19 Sota G SS ee eee ox cancEL Default system Cache _ _ ees ee 0 Disabled i Primary Only Eoo Cache Size i Primary and Secondary 256 Kilobytes SEE a and Cache Option eal eA i eal Shadow Cache Shadow Cache System ROM N Video RCM K KIE CHOO CBEF a CCO0 CFFF ER DOOO DGEF i
253. ay Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5A 6ES7422 1HHOO OAAO 2 0 cece eee eee e eee e ee eees 5 PNAIOG NOGUICS iriga EAER E E E E E E E EE r N B 5 1 5 1 Module Overview 0 ccc eee tenet eee eeas 5 3 5 2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Modules 00 c ccc cee cent ne ee nnes 5 3 Analog Value Representation nannaa anaana eee eens 5 3 1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels 5 3 2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels 5 4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels 0 0 00 ccc eee eens 50 Behavior of the Analog Modules 0 c cece eee eee nee 5 5 1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode 0 0005 5 5 2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values 00 5 5 3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit 5 6 Conversion Cycle Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules 5 Analog Module Parameter Assignment 0 00 ese e eee eens 5 7 1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 00000 e ae 5 7 2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 5 8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs 00 0 c eee eens 5 9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 1 eee eens 5 10 Connecting Current Sensors 0 eee eens 5 11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers
254. bel Explosion Protection Guidelines According to EN 50021 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres Type of protection n Ex II 3 G EEx nA II T3 T6 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 3 General Technical Specifications Mark for Australia and New Zealand CG Our products satisfy the requirements of Standard AS NZS 2064 Class A Note You will recognize the approval assigned to your product from the mark on the identification label The opprovals are listed below UL CSA or cULus UL Approval UL recognition mark Underwriters Laboratories UL to the UL 508 Standard e Report E 85972 e Report 143289 for the modules in Table 1 3 CSA Approval CSA certification mark Canadian Standard Association CSA to Standard C 22 2 No 142 e Certification Record 212191 0 000 e Report 111 879 for the modules in Table 1 3 or cULus Approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc nach U e UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment CX L US gt CSAC22 2 No 142 Pocess Control Equipment S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 4 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications or cULus Approval Hazardous Location Ur CULUS Listed 7RAQ INT CONT EQ FOR HAZ LOC C US Underwriters Laboratories Inc nach HAZ LOC UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Pocess Control Equipment e UL 1604 Hazardou
255. ble Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 21 CPUs for M7 400 LL Lt INS With the cursor control keys you can jump from line to line within a list box The line you are in is marked with a dark bar You can page with the cursor control keys within an edit box if there are several values available for selection within the box You activate an option button if you position the cursor at the button using the cursor control keys With the cursor control keys you can jump from character to character within an edit box With the spacebar you can confirm the selected lines as selected or activate a check box Holding the INSERT key pressed during a complete restart of the module leads to certain BIOS default settings being loaded which are required for a safe startup With this function key a context sensitive help window is displayed Figure 11 8 shows an example Press Enter or ESC to exit EXIT the list List may scroll updown Then press ENTER to open this page Use cursor up dewn keys to choose a setup page in Use Tab Shift Tab keys to move cursor to next previous item Figure 11 8 Context Sensitive Help Window The Remote Setup can either be operated with the keyboard of the remote computer or with the keyboard of the M7 400 In both cases the above key assignments apply In the edit windows HOME end e 11 22 sets the minimum valu
256. ble Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Contents 1 General Technical Specifications 0 0 cece eee eee ees 1 1 Standards and ApprovalS 0 ccc ccc een eee eens 1 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 0 0 0 eens 1 3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries 1 4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7 400 M7 400 0 eee e nen ne es 1 5 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection 0 ccc eee eee eee e eae 1 6 Using S7 400 in a zone 2 explosion risk area 2 eee 2 RACKS csnswsanne we ccetheweacene etueeamseeaernemee es tememner ee tewe eer e ewes 2 1 Function and Structure of the Racks 0 00 cece eee eee eee 2 2 The Racks UR1 6ES7400 1TA01 OAAO and UR2 6ES7400 1JA01 OAAO cece eee ene 2 3 The Rack UR2 H 6ES7400 2JA00 OAAO 2 eee eee 2 4 The Rack CR2 6ES7401 2TAO1 OAAO 0 00 e eee eee 2 5 The Rack CR3 6ES7401 2TAO1 OAAO annann annaa 2 6 The Racks ER1 6ES7403 1TA01 0AAO and ER2 6ES7403 1UA01 OAAO cccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 Power Supply Modules iii cage des iccdwitdnnis deeeedeeianenedeecedwiwnes 3 1 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules 3 2 Redundant Power Supply Modules 00 00 cece eee ee eee 3 3 Backup B
257. ble Controllers Module Specifications 8 10 A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Reusing Fiber Optic Cables Note If you insert used fiber optic cables in the plug in adapter again you must cut off the bent lengths of both fiber optic cable cores and install the Simplex connectors again This avoids any attenuation losses due to parts of the cores of the fiber optic duplex cables being bent again and overstressed Inserting the Fiber Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO Insert the fiber optic cables and attached plug in adapters into the IM 467 FO Move the protruding handle of the plug in adapter upwards Make sure that it is correctly positioned The sender fiber optic cable is plugged into the receiver socket and the receiver fiber optic cable is inserted into the sender socket of the fiber optic interface of the IM 467 FO If the IM 467 FO is the last node in the fiber optic network you must close the unoccupied fiber optic cable interface with filler connectors the connectors are already in place when the IM 467 FO is delivered Caution Do not look directly into the opening of the optical sender diodes The light beam could damage your eyes PROFIBUS DP Receiver Sender Receiver l Receiver Sender Figure 8 7 Inserting the Fiber Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO Bending Radius for the Fiber Optic Cable Make sure when you w
258. ble substitute value 1 Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1 you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 7 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 bytes 0 1 and 2 for the parameters of the digital output modules You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 7 6 Byteo TTT 11 Reaction to CPU STOP Diagnostic interrupt enable 0 76543210 Byte1 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7 76543210 Byte2 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 Figure A 3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules S7 400 M7 400 P
259. bles utilis es doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exig et tre conformes au paragraphe 7 2 selon EN 50021 Tous les appareillages y compris les interrupteurs etc raccord s aux entr es et sorties de modules de signaux s curit intrins que doivent tre homologu s pour la protection antid flagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC ll faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas tre d pass e de plus de 40 sous l influence de transitoires Plage de temp rature ambiante 0 C 60 C A l int rieur du bo tier il faut placer un endroit bien visible apr s ouverture une plaquette comportant l avertissement suivant Avertissement Ouvir le bo tier le moins longtemps possible par exemple pour effectuer un diagnostic visuel Ce faisant n actionnez aucun commutateur ne d connectez aucun module et ne d banchez pas de c bles lectriques connexions Le respect de cet avertissement n est pas imp ratif s il est certain que l environnement ne pr sente pas de risque d explosion Liste des modules homologu s Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologu s http www4 ad siemens de view cs reference ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 25 General Technical Specifications 1 6 4 Aplicacion de la S7 400 en areas con peligro de explosion zona 2 Zona 2 Las areas con peligro de explosion se clasi
260. cache memory in the Primary and Secondary Cache field the setting in the System ROM field does not change automatically e Video ROM offers you the following possible selections Shadowed that the video ROM 32 Kbytes is copied into the fast shadow RAM This accelerates video output faster screen buildup Shadowed and Cached that a cache memory is available for this memory area in addition to shadow RAM Further accelerates video output OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page DEFAULT Button When this button is activated the default settings are entered in the setup page again The original settings are deleted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 39 CPUs for M7 400 11 5 I O Addresses Main Memory and Interrupt Assignments Introduction This section gives you detailed information in the form of a table on the I O address space assignment main memory and interrupt assignments of the CPUs Memory Assignment The main memory is assigned as follows in the M7 400 Table 11 8 Main Memory Assignment If the interface submodule IF 964 DP is not plugged in the preferred slot see Table 13 3 on page 13 4 Keeping Memory Areas Free The memory areas that are not always marked
261. ccelerate data transmission Note The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line Setting Changing the Number Proceed as follows 1 Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change in the position Output voltage 0 V 2 Enter the number using the DIP switch 3 Switch the power supply module on again S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 19 Interface Modules Operator Controls and Indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty red terminator missing or broken cable Ci LED Line 1 via front connector X1 connection 1 is correct green C1 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is not switched on or green e A module has not yet completed the initialization process C2 LED Line 2 via front connector X2 connection 2 is correct green C2 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is not switched on or green e A module has not yet completed the initialization process Operator Controls and Indicators of the Receive IM INTF LED red Lights up if a rack number gt 21 or O was set Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage EXTF LED red Lights up in the event of an external fault line fault for example
262. ceed the permitted value S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 59 Analog Modules 5 14 Connecting Loads Actuators to Voltage Outputs Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four conductor and a two conductor connection Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 13 with its generally applicable information for connecting loads and actuators Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings Qy Analog output voltage S Detector lead positive S Detector lead negative Mana Reference potential of analog circuit Ri Load impedance L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage M Ground terminal Uliso Potential difference between Mana and chassis ground Four Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output 5 60 A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four conductor connection You must therefore connect the sensor leads S and S directly to the load The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load Problems or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S and the reference ci
263. ck is enabled If so disable the wire break check The reason Some transmitters try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint value provided S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 89 Analog Modules 5 20 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0AB0 Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit has the following features e Rapid A D changeover therefore particularly suitable for highly dynamic processes e 8 inputs for voltage current measurement e 4 inputs for resistance measurement e Unlimited measuring range selection e 14 bit resolution e Supply voltage 24 VDC required only for the connection of 2 wire transmitters e Analog section isolated from CPU e The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the reference potential of the connected sensors and Mana Is 8 VAC Block Diagram of the SM 431 AIl 8 x 14 Bit ws Measuring CHO gt range Ba cH gt module Bus S7 400 Bus control re module 3 xX iT gt lt in a D ENABLE 45V Bus S7 400 OV Bus S7 400 Figure 5 30 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 90 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 AI 8 x 14 Bit
264. classes ID B 3 Module filtering mode Glossary 11 Module malfunction analog input module 5 65 digital module Module overview 5 3 digital modules 4 3 Modules shipping and storage conditions 1 12 MPI Glossary 11 MSM 478 characteristics parallel port LPT technical specifications Multicomputing Glossary 11 Multipoint interface MPI M7 400 CPUs 11 15 Multiprocessor operation Glossary 11 N NAMUR recommendation 3 3 No load voltage L digital output module 4 8 parameter assignment in user j rogram A 2 Non isolated Glossary 12 Main memory assignment 11 40 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 8 A5E00069467 07 Index Non isolated sensors 5 45 6ES7 431 7QHO00 0ABO 5 107 connecting 5 45 6ES7 432 1HFO0 0ABO 5 141 6ES7 460 0AA00 0ABO 6ES7 460 0AA01 0ABO O 6ES7 460 1BA00 0ABO OB Glossary 12 6ES7 460 1BA01 0ABO 6ES7 460 3AA00 0ABO OB 40 4 14 5 68 6ES7 460 3AA01 0ABO start information 5 68 6ES7 460 4AA01 0ABO OB 82 4 13 5 67 Operating conditions cele ee eae 6ES7 461 0AA01 0AAO Operating mode Glossary 12 f CPU 5 31 6ES7 461 1BA00 0AA0 Operating system Glossary 12 OE A RATON l neg 6ES7 461 3AA00 0AA0 Operational limit 5 33 r E 6ES7 461 3AA01 0AA0 6 14 6ES7 401 2TA01 0AA0 6ES7 461 4AA01 0AA016 18 _ 6ES7 467 5FJ00 0ABO 8 2 6ES7 405 0DA00 0AAO 6ES7 467 5GJ00 0ABO 8 2 6ES7 405 0DA01 0A
265. controller optimized for the rapid exchange of signals between the CPU s and the signal modules User data for example digital input signals of a signal module and system data for example default parameter data records of a signal module are transferred via the I O bus Isolated With optically isolated input output modules the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are galvanically isolated by an optocoupler contact assembly or repeater for example Input output circuits can be connected to common potential Keep last value KLV The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode Load memory The load memory is part of a programmable module CPU CP It contains objects generated by the programming device load objects It is implemented either as a plug in memory card or a permanently integrated memory In the case of SIMATIC M7 the load memory can also be defined as a directory on the hard disk S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 9 Glossary Local data Logic block M7 Master Local data are data assigned to a code block that is declared in its declaration section and its variable declaration It includes depending on the block formal parameters static data gt temporary data In the context of SIMATIC S7 a logic block is a block that contains part of the STEP 7 user program By contrast a data block only contains d
266. controls and indicators on the IM 463 2 are arranged on the front plate The following figure shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators LEDs EXTF C1 C 2 C1 C2 OFF l c1 C2 C1 Interface selector switch Cable length selector switch X1 connector C1 interface X2 connector C2 interface Figure 7 1 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the IM 463 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 4 A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 LEDs Table 7 2 LEDs of the IM 4632 LED EXTF red Lights up in the event of an external fault Chain 1 or chain 2 has a fault power supply failed in the EU terminating connector missing wire break or interface selector switch wrongly set LED C1 green Chain 1 via front connector X1 connection 1 is in order LED C2 green Chain 2 via front connector X2 connection 2 is in order Front connector X1 Connector plug output for chain 1 and chain 2 and X2 X1 upper front connector X2 lower front connector Interface Selector Switch Table 7 3 LEDs of the IM 463 2 C1 ON You use only interface C1 C2 ON You use only interface C2 C4 C2ON C2 ON You use both interfaces use both interfaces oo C2 OFF ee ee o use neither of the two interfaces You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present Cable Length Selector Selector Table 7 4 Switch Position Interface Selector of the IM 463 2 Cable length 1 to 100 m Cable length 100 to 250 m M Cable
267. critical measuring operations The integration time is inversely proportional to the line frequency You can set the latter in STEP 7 This then gives you the integration time If the line frequency is 50 Hz the integration time is 20 ms or an even multiple of that Because the measured value is included up to exactly this time period at least one or more whole periods of the line frequency which may overlay the measuring signal are also included The average value of the error is therefore included as zero positive part of the first half period negative part of the second half period Only the user signal is thus recorded S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary Measuring range module Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adaptation to different measuring ranges Memory card Pluggable load memory Memory cards are credit card size storage media for CPUs and CPs They are implemented as RAM or FEPROMs Memory reset In a memory reset the following memories of the CPU are deleted working memory write read area of the load memory system memory In S7 and M7 the MPI parameters and diagnostic buffer are preserved In M7 the operating system is also rebooted when the memory of the M7 computer is reset by means of the mode selector Mode selector Using the mode selector the user can set the current operating mode of the CPU RUN RUN P STOP or
268. ction 5 7 Special Feature The Module is Inserted in ER 1 ER 2 Note If you use the digital module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set the parameters for enabling all the interrupts to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 Diagnostic Interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts then active error events initial occurrence of the error and departing error events message after troubleshooting are reported by means of an interrupt The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block OB 82 In the user program you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited When OB 82 is exited the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 13 Digital Modules Hardware Interrupt A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling edge or both of a signal status change You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately It can be modified at any time in RUN mode using the user program Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU OB 40 to OB 47 The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority classes with low priority In the use
269. ction Data Input voltage e Rated value For signal 1 e For signal 0 Frequency range Input current At signal 1 Input characteristic curve Connection of two wire BEROs e Permitted bias current 24 VUC to 60 VUC 15 to 72 VDC 15 VDC to 72 VDC 15 to 60 VAC 6 VDC to 6 VDC 0 VAC to 5 VAC 47 DC AC to 63 Hz Typ 4 mA to 10 mA Similar to IEC 61131 1 Possible Max 0 5 mA to 2 mA2 Time Frequency Internal preparation time for e Only hardware interrupt enable e Enable hardware and diagnostic interrupts Input delay e Parameters can be assigned e Rated value Max 450 us Max 2 ms Yes 0 5 3 10 20 ms Values go into cycle and response times Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring Rated voltage 24 V 15 V to 35 V Rated voltage 48 V 30 V to 60 V Rated voltage 60 V 50 V to 72V break monitoring IEC 61131 does not specify any data for UC modules The values have been adapted as much as possible to IEC 61131 Minimum closed circuit current is required for wire S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 12 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Parameter Assignment You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 4 3 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC The following table contain
270. ctly parameterized Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after acknowledgement Optimum Signal Propagation Delay 4 28 You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings e Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0 1 ms e All the diagnoses load voltage error wire break are deactivated e Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 9 2 Behavior of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Input Values The input values of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module Table 4 11 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC CPU Operating Mode Power Supply L Input Value of Digital Module to Digital Module POWER CAE OFF a Gms o Depends on the parameter assignment see Table 4 12 Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF LED on the module Furthermore this information is made available on the module entry in diagnosis Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment see Section 4 9 1 Short Circuit of Sensor Supply Vs Irrespective of the p
271. d In addition the supply voltage of the RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 10 4 A5E00069467 07 RS 485 Repeater Terminal Connection Diagram In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential ungrounded operation any interference currents and static charges are discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater refer to Figure 10 1 to the protective conductor A1 B1 Ai B1 Ground bus Figure 10 1 RC Network with 10 MQ for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential Isolation Between Bus Segments Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other The PG OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1 Figure 10 2 shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater Terminals for bus segment 1 PG OP interface Isolation SIEMENS ae ie Terminals for bus segment 2 0999 Figure 10 2 Isolation Between the Bus Segments S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 10 5 RS 485 Repeater Amplification of the Bus Signals The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG OP interface and the port for bus segment 2 10 4 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications of the RS 485 Repeater Technical Specification Power supply e Rated voltage 24 VDC e Ripple 20 4 to 28 8 VDC
272. d Values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5 6 The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent on the number of channels that are enabled It therefore has no effect on the step response which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing Step Response Table 5 75 How Response Times Depend on the Parameterized Interference Frequency Suppression and Smoothing of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Interference Frequency Response Time in ms with Parameterized Smoothing None Low Average High Suppression in Hz The following figures illustrate the contents of Table 5 75 They show the response time required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100 The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 136 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Step Response at an Interference Frequency Suppression of 10 Hz Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 Smoo thing None Low Average High 2400 3200 Response time in ms Figure 5 43 Step Response at 10 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al8 amp x 16 Bit Step Response at an Interference Frequency Suppression of 50 Hz Signal variation Step response for a
273. dby switch Under cover e Battery compartment e Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT e 3 pin plug in power connector e Fixing screw Figure 3 10 Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 36 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output Rating Dimensions WxHxD mm 50x290x217 Output voltages Weight 1 4 kg e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Cable cross section 3 x 1 5 mm litz wire Output currents unre GNG 16MUG Rated values 5 VDC 10A use component conductor or flexible 24 VDC 1 0A sheath cable Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVss Cable diameter 3 to 9mm 24 VDC 200 mVss Input Rating Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs Input voltage 24 VDC 500 mVs Rated value 24 48 60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC 200 mA base e Permitted range Static load required 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC Idling proof Dynamic no base load required 18 5 VDC to 75 5 VDC Other Parameters Protection class in accordance l with protective Rated input current 4 3 A 2 1 A 1 7A Starting current inrush Peak value 18A Half value width 20 ms with IEC 60536 grounding conductor Overvoltage category lI Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollut
274. der tages h jde for de omgivelsestemperaturer i hvilke udstyret er installeret Der skal v re udarbejdet en erkl ring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 iht EN 50021 Hvis kablet eller kabelindf ringen p dette hus nar op pa en temperatur p gt 70 C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen p reforegreningen kan v re gt 80 C under driftsbetingelser skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer der rent faktisk m les De benyttede kabelindf ringer skal v re i overensstemmelse med den kr vede IP beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7 2 iht EN 50021 Alle apparater inkl kontakter osv der forbindes med ind og udgangene pa S7 400 systemer skal v re godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af type EEx nA eller EEx nC Der skal tr ffes foranstaltninger der s rger for at den nominelle sp nding via transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 Omgivelsestemperaturomr de 0 C til 60 C kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt der skal kunne ses n r kabinettet bnes Dette skilt skal have f lgende advarsel Advarsel Kabinettet m kun bnes i kort tid f eks til visuel diagnose Tryk i denne forbindelse ikke p kontakter tr k eller is t ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke elektriske ledninger stikforbindelser Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages h jde for hvis man ved at der ikke er nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosf re Liste over godkendt
275. discharge These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices are labelled with the following symbol Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged In most cases the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications D 2 A5E00069467 07 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD D 2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons Charging Every person with a non conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically Figure D 1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 61000 4 2 Voltage in kV C Synthetic material 2 Wool Antistatic material for example wood or concrete pe S 7 S 8 T 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 Relative air humidity in Figure D 1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person S7 400 M7 40
276. dule If these dimensions are not conformed to proper installation in the ATM 478 AT adapter module is no longer possible Components max insertion height 14 mm es 106 5 max 3 min 108 76 al 164 max Figure 12 9 Dimension Specifications for AT Modules to be Installed in an ATM 478 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 21 M7 400 Expansions 12 4 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module 6ES7 478 2BA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The MSM 478 mass storage module is used for storing programs and larger quantities of data It also has an AT compatible parallel port LPT The MSM 478 mass storage module has the following function units e One 3 5 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk drive e One hard disk drive with a capacity of 516 x 10 bytes e One AT compatible parallel port LPT1 The MSM 478 mass storage module has a 120 pin connector on the left hand side and a 120 pin socket on the right hand side for connecting further expansion modules Figure 12 10 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module System Integration BIOS Setup 12 22 So that the BIOS of your CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 or your FM 456 can correctly access the diskette and the hard disk you must make some settings in the BIOS setup of your CPU FM To learn how to make these settings see the BIOS setup sec
277. dule 6ES7407 0RA01 0AA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 11 General Technical Specifications Additional Measures 1 3 If you want to connect an S7 400 or M7 400 system to the public power system you must ensure compliance with limit value class B in accordance with EN 55022 Suitable additional measures must be taken if you need to enhance the noise immunity of the system as a result of high external noise levels Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries Shipping and Storage of Modules S7 400 M7 400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131 2 in respect of shipping and storage requirements The following details apply to modules shipped and or stored in their original packing The climatic conditions conform to IEC 60721 Part 3 3 Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721 Part 3 2 Class 2K4 for transport The mechanical conditions conform to IEC 60721 Part 3 2 Class 2M2 Table 1 9 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules Free fall lt 1m up to 10 kg Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa corresponds to a height of 1000 to 3500 m Relative humidity 5 to 95 without condensation at 25 C Sinusoidal oscillations 5 to 9 Hz 3 5mm to IEC 60068 2 6 9 to 500 Hz 9 8 m s2 Shock to IEC 60068 2 29 250 m s2 6 ms 1000 shocks Shipping of Backup Batteries Wherever possible transport backup batteries in their original packing No
278. dule Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7KF10 0AB0O is delivered with the software S7 400 RTD User Calibration on two diskettes After installing the software you can define user specific calibration values for each channel and and each module input range You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the Customer Support FAQ site 9 122 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Isolation Backplane A D bus converter interface Internal voltage supply Figure 5 38 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Note An external protective network is required in the signal leads in accordance with IEC 61000 4 5 150 V 14 mm MOV across each and input to chassis ground S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 123 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit CONOORWN oh s NO oO h D Ol O _ N N O NO N N N oo NO N N N Oo O1 NO N
279. dule Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 1 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies 9 1 Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies In this section you will find out how to monitor the fans There is a signaling concept example at the end of the section LEDs The three red LEDs are assigned to the individual fans From left to right these are F1 for fan 1 F2 for fan 2 F3 for fan 3 Fans The fans have a redundant design The fan subassembly continues to function even if one fan fails Fan Monitoring The function of the fans is controlled by means of speed monitoring If the speed of a fan drops below the limit speed of 1750 rpm the LED assigned to it lights up In addition the relay K1 drops out If the speed of a second fan drops below the limit speed the LED assigned to it lights up in addition the relay K2 drops out The following table is the function table for the fan monitoring Table 9 1 Function of Fan Monitoring TONE SE CAE A Fan in operation or relay picked up Fan failed or relay dropped out D LEDs dark L LEDs lit i Power off S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 2 A5E00069467 07 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies Signaling Concept Example You can check the fault free functioning of the fan subassembly using digital inputs You can cause the power supply to be cut off after the failure of at least two fans by using the relay K2 For example you can use an interm
280. e S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 41 Interface Submodules 13 7 3 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs Abbreviations Used The abbreviations used in Figures 13 20 to 13 21 have the following meanings QI Analog output current QV Analog output voltage S Reference potential of the analog circuit Ri Load resistance Figures 13 20 and 13 21 show you how you must connect loads actuators to the current or voltage outputs of the analog output module Connecting Loads to the Current Output The following figure shows wiring on one channel as an example Ground bus T Figure 13 20 Connecting Loads Actuators via a Two Wire Connection to a Current Output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 42 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Connecting Loads to the Voltage Output The following figure shows the wiring of two channels as an example Figure 13 21 Connecting Loads Actuators via a Three Wire Connection to a Voltage Output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 43 Interface Submodules 13 7 4 Conversion Time and Cycle Time of the Analog Input Channels Introduction This section contains the definitions of and relationships between the conversion time and the cycle time of analog input modules Conversion Time The conversion time consists of the conversion time of the analog digital con
281. e 2A output current e 24 VDC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted A Note about Commissioning 4 62 The following technical feature applies to the digital output module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A with the order number 6ES7 422 1BH11 0AA0 but not to the digital output module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A with the order number 6ES7 422 1BH10 0AA0 To commission the module it is no longer necessary to apply load voltage 1L and 3L for example to each group of 8 outputs The module is fully operative even if only one group is supplied with L Note lt is no longer possible to switch off all the outputs by disconnecting a single L supply as might have been the case with the previous module 6GES7 422 1BH10 O0AA0 L S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A Process Module 1st supply group 2nd supply group 3rd supply group Data register and bus control 4th supply group
282. e 94 9 EG Devices and protection systems to be used as prescribed in potentially explosive areas Guidelines for Explosion Protection The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automation and Drives A amp D AS RD 42 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg EMC Directive SIMATIC products have been designed for use in industrial environments Table 1 1 Use in an Industrial Environment EMC Directive Requirements in respect of Emitted interference Immunity Industry EN 61000 6 4 001 EN 61000 6 2 001 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 2 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Low Voltage Directive The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of EU low voltage directive 73 23 EEC Adherence to this EU directive was tested in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Table 1 2 Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low Voltage Directive tame rer or Digital input module SM 421 DI 16 x UC 120 230 V 6ES7421 1FH20 0AA0 PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA00 0AA0 erst aon ane PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA00 0AA0 erst 6ES7407 0RA01 O0AA0O PS 407 10AR 6ES7407 OKRO0 0AA0 Note In the new releases some of the devices listed above fulfil the requirements of the explosion protection guidelines instead of that of the low voltage directive Please note the information on the identification la
283. e IM is installed on The permitted range is 1 to 21 If required you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using STEP 7 The default setting for the distance is 100 m Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length the sum of all the connecting cables per line as this will accelerate data transmission Note The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line Setting Changing the Number Proceed as follows 1 Put the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make a change in the position Output voltage 0 V 2 Enter the number using the DIP switch 3 Switch the power supply module on again S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 15 Interface Modules Operator Controls and Indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty red terminator missing or broken cable Ci LED Line 1 via front connector X1 connection 1 is correct green C1 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is not switched on or green e A module has not yet completed the initialization process C2 LED Line 2 via front connector X2 connection 2 is correct green C2 LED An EU in the line is not ready for operation because flashing e The power supply module is n
284. e Programming devices PGs PCs e Operator panels OPs e Additional CPUs You can address up to 127 communications partners programming devices OPs CPUs via the multipoint interface of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 A maximum of 44 connections can be made to the CPU Connectors Use only bus connectors or PG cables for connecting devices to the MPI see Chapter 6 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 15 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 Overview The BIOS Setup The BIOS setup handles the configuration of the relevant CPUs in your M7 400 system The settings and technical information concerning the configuration of this programmable module are displayed in the BIOS setup The CPUs already have a default setup It is set in such a way that the minimal configuration of a CPU with memory card drive will power up via BIOS setup without programming You can change the default settings in the BIOS setup This becomes necessary if for example you want to connect expansions to your CPU expansion module with interface submodules mass storage module with diskette and hard disk drives or AT adapter module with short AT card You must inform the operating system of these expansions If you want to make settings in the BIOS setup you can do so e Directly at the relevant module if your M7 400 is equipped with interface submodules and I O devices such as a monitor and keyboard interface submodule I
285. e SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A 2 ce eee tenes Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VOCS Acca cie cane cased bebe on haere hears Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A ccc ene eee Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 32X24 VDG 0 SA s bas sane an Ges OR ee ORS oOo eee waa emas B 10 Bytes 4 to 10 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC O 5SA Lo en eee n eens B 11 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A B 12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A cnn teen een n ees B 12 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A eee teens Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2A Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 AIl 16 x 16 Bit Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 AI 16 x 16 Bit Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Odd Diagnostic B
286. e SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Analog Value Generation Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 Measuring principle Integrative in millimeters Integration time conversion Does not go into the Weight Approx 650 g time resolution per response time Data for Specific Module channel Number of inputs e Parameters can be Yes assigned Length of cable e Shielded e Integration time in 2 5 16 7 20 100 Voltages Currents Potentials milliseconds e Basic conversion time 10 16 7 20 100 Isolation l A including integration Between channels and Yes time in milliseconds backplane bus e Resolution in bits incl 16 bits e Between the channels Yes overrange l Permitted potential difference Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10 Between the inputs Ucy 120 VAC frequency f1 in Hz Between Mana and 120 VAC e Basic execution time of 10 16 7 20 100 Minternal Uiso the module in ms all hannel Insulation tested with 1500 VAC channels enabled Smoothing of the measured Parameters can be values assigned in 4 From the backplane bus Max 1200 mA stages Power dissipation of the Typ 4 6 W Suppression of Interference Limits of Error module Interference voltage suppression forf n x f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 Current consumption e Common mode gt 130 dB interference Ucm lt 2 5 V Series mode noise peak value of noise lt nominal value of input range Cro
287. e Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 9 Interface Submodules 13 4 IF 962 COM Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 3AA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 962 COM interface submodule is used to connect devices with a serial port It contains two serial AT compatible ports COMa COMb Up to four COM ports can be accessed on AT I O addresses in one programmable module using standard PC drivers This also includes COM ports located on the programmable module itself and those located on expansions The IF 962 LPT interface submodules can be operated in the AT compatible address area and if special drivers are used also in the M7 300 400 reserved address area Connector X1 corresponds to the COMa port connector X2 to the COMb port The signal levels are defined in accordance with RS232C The cable length on the IF 962 COM interface submodule should not exceed approximately 10 m 2 4 A X 3 2 S IC Figure 13 3 IF 962 COM Interface Submodule What Can be Connected to the Ports All devices with an RS232 interface such as Printers modems terminals etc S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 10 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 4 1 Pin Assignments Socket X1 X2 COMa COMb Table 13 8 Socket X1 X2 IF 962 COM 9 Pin Sub D Plug Connector DSR RTS TS DSR Daaseteacy RTS Reqestiosed OR RI Ring nator Gnconing cay nna Operational ground GND 1
288. e Without forced max 10 W ventilation e With forced ventilation max 12 W Dimensions W x H x D mm 25 X 290 x 230 Weight without AT module 0 74 kg Calculation of Power Consumption You can calculate the power consumption of the short AT module using the following formula IAT module ly 5 v X 1 3 l 12 v ly 12v xX 3 12 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 19 M7 400 Expansions Example of Power Loss Calculation The following table contains a calculation example for the total power losses for an AT adapter module with an AT module Table 12 6 Calculation Example for Total Power Losses of an ATM 478 with AT Module Voltage Current Power Losses Consumption Power f the AT enn neem eee O C e P412v P 12v P 5y x 0 3 1 2 0 6 0 x 0 3 W Power losses of the internal power supply of the ATM 478 for supplying the AT module Power losses of the ATM 478 AT adapter module Total power losses of the ATM 478 adapter module with AT module 6 94 W In this example the power losses are 6 94 W The ATM 478 AT adapter module can be operated without forced ventilation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 20 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Permissible Dimensions of AT Modules The following illustration shows you the maximum and minimum dimensions in millimeters that AT modules must meet for the ATM 478 AT adapter mo
289. e conditions Input Rating Input voltage e Rated value 120 230 VAC e Permitted range 85 to 132 VAC 170 to 264 VAC System frequency e Rated value 50 60 Hz e Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz Rated input current e At120 VAC e At230 VAC Starting current inrush e Rated input current 264 V e Rated input current 132 V Peak value 70 A Half value width 2 ms Peak value 110 A 65 A Half value width 1 5 ms lt 3 5 mA Leakage current Overvoltage resistance VDE 0160 curve W2 In accordance with DIN with IEC 60536 Overvoltage category Pollution severity Rated voltage Ue 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V Buffering of power failures At50 Hz At60 Hz Power input Power loss Backup current Backup batteries optional Protective separation to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 VDC 20A 24 VDC 1 0 A 5 VDC 50 mVgs 24 VDC 200 mVss 5 VDC 150 mVs 24 VDC 500 mVs 5 VDC 200 mA base load required 24 VDC Idling proof no base load required Other Parameters Protection class in accordance with protective grounding conductor Test Voltage 700 VDC Secondary lt gt PE 2200 VDC primary lt gt PE 4 5 ms to 7 5 ms 6 5 ms to 8 5 ms 35 6 W Max 100 uA at power off 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Yes Power Supply Modules 3 10 Pow
290. e default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7 Table 4 7 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module Interrupt Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV SV Dynamic Module Keep last value KLV Diagnostics e Wire break Yes no No e No load voltage L Yes no No e Short circuit to M Yes no No Static Channel e Short circuit to L Yes no S e Fuse blown Yes no If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and without support from HWCONFIG S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 8 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules Programmable and Non Programmable Diagnostic Messages In diagnostics we make a distinction between programmable and non programmable diagnostic messages You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter block in STEP 7 refer to Section 5 7 Non programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled Actions Following
291. e from the table below which expansions can be connected to the programmable M7 400 modules Table 12 1 Expansion Possibilities of the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 or FM 456 Programmable M7 400 Module Slot n in the Case of Single Width Modules Slot n and n 1 n42 n 3 ore in the Case of Double Width Modules EXM 478 EXM 478 i w ail eee Si asics a a CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 FM 456 4 AIM 478 ATM 4780 f ella MSM 478 EXM 478 MSM 478 eo Rules for the Combinations The following rules apply for expansions from left to right after a CPU or application module slots n 1 n 2 n 30rn 2 n 3 n 4 1 Up to 3 EXM 478 expansion modules 2 Max 1 MSM 478 mass storage module that is always after the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 FM 456 or EXM 478 3 Up to 3 ATM 478 AT adapter modules that is always after the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 FM 456 EXM 478 or MSM 478 In total a CPU or application module can be expanded with up to three modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 5 M7 400 Expansions 12 2 EXM 478 Expansion Module 6ES7 478 2AC00 0AC0 Characteristics The EXM 478 expansion module is used to house up to three interface submodules By installing the relevant interface submodule in this expansion module such as the IF 962 VGA and IF 962 LPT you can connect for example a VGA monitor a keyboard and a printer to your automation computer The EXM 478 expansion module has a 120
292. e komponenter Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes p internettet http www4 ad siemens de view cs under bidrags ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 33 General Technical Specifications 1 6 8 S7 400 n k ytt rajahdysvaarannetuilla alueilla vyyohyke 2 Vyohyke 2 Rajahdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyohykkeisiin Vy hykkeet erotellaan r j hdyskelpoisen ilmakeh n olemassa olon todenn k isyyden mukaan Vy hyke R j hdysvaara 2 R j ht v kaasuilmakeh Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteilla varustuilla ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa lyhytaikaisesti turvallinen i vy hykkeen 2 ulkopuolella alue Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset Seuraavasta l yd tte t rkeit ohjeita SIMATIC S7 400 asennukseen r j hdysvaarannetuilla alueilla Lis tietoja Lis tietoja erilaisiin S7 400 rakenneryhmiin l yd tte ohjekirjasta Valmistuspaikka Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Hyvaksynta x 3G EExnAllT3 T6 EN 50021 mukaan 1999 Tarkastusnumero KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Ohje Rakenneryhmat hyvaksynnan 113 G EExnAllT3 16 kanssa saadaan k ytt ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijarjestelmissa SIMATIC S7 400 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 34 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Kun
293. e not stored When you switch on the fan subassembly the fans start running After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 6 A5E00069467 07 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies 9 4 The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1 TA00 0XA0 Operator Controls and Indicators on the 24 VDC Fan Subassembly Relay contacts 1 23 Relay contacts 4 5 6 Quick release lock LEDs F1 F2 F3 Fuse compartment Figure 9 4 Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 24 VDC 6ES7408 1TA00 0XA0 Characteristics The 24 VDC fan subassembly has the same construction and functional characteristics as the 120 230 VAC fan subassembly Installation Installing the 24 VDC fan subassembly is the same as for the 120 230 VAC fan subassembly Wiring You connect the 24 VDC fan subassembly to the 24 VDC supply in the same manner as for the 120 230 VAC fan subassembly You should note the polarity of the spring connections L and L S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module
294. e of the connected sensor Smoothing of the Measured Values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5 6 The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles in the case of a step response after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100 depending on the smoothing setting The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 Pa 80 100 0 Smoothing low average Module cycles high Figure 5 40 Step Response of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 127 Analog Modules Displaying Parameter Assignment Errors The SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors Table 5 72 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Incorrect Parameter Possible Display Explanation Assignment Of the module Module malfunction You can find an explanation of the diagnostic information in Wrong parameters Tables 4 8 and 5 47 on Module not parameterized Pages 4 10 and 5 65 Internal malfunction Affecting certain Module malfunction channels Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel info
295. e of the window sets the maximum value of the window displays a context sensitive help text S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 4 Opening and Exiting the BIOS Setup Opening the Setup Menu To open the Setup menu press the following keys simultaneously while the CPU is powering up and the POST window Figure 11 6 is on the screen at J esc Jor _esc_Junder Remote Setup The Setup menu then appears to allow you to select the setup pages Figure 11 9 shows the front and rear view of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 without covering flap Award Software International Inc PowerBIOs setup The setup pages are described on User Help TF Bodu les Timeout Function security Date and Time Hard Disk gt page 11 24 gt page 11 25 gt page 11 29 gt page 11 30 gt page 11 32 gt page 11 33 Book Options ove Cem gt page 11 36 gt page 11 38 Floppy Card gt page 11 35 E Basss E1 le im nele Figure 11 9 Setup Menu The Setup menu consists of e A list box from which you can select the required setup page e An OPEN button which opens the selected setup page when activated e An EXIT button which closes the Setup menu after prompting you to decide whether changes are to be saved or not The setup pages for the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 are s
296. e secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 40510A JO A Fixing screw 405 0KA00 0AA0 o INTF LEDs INTF lags BAF BATT1F BATT2F ii 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch Under cover e Battery compartment e Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT e 3 pin plug in power connector e Fixing screw Figure 3 9 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 10 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 34 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 405 10 A Programming Package Output Rating Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 0 Output voltages package e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output currents Dimensions WxHxD mm 50x290x217 e Rated values 5 VDC 10 A Weight 1 4 kg 24 VDC 1 0 A Cable cross section 3x1 5 mm litz wire Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVgg with wire end ferrule use component 24 VDC 200 mVss conductor or flexible Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs sheath cable 24 VDC 500 mVs Cable diameter Slog mm Idle conditions 5 VDC 200 mA base Input Rating load required Input voltage 24 VDC Idling proof e Rated value 24 VDC no base load required e Permitted range Static
297. e submodule receptacle numbers of the interface submodule receptacles slots You will find this information in Figure 12 4 later in this section Addressing in the M7 400 Specific I O Address Area All interface submodules can be accessed via M7 400 specific I O addresses There is a description of how to determine the I O address of an interface submodule in the specific address area starting from page 12 10 You require this information to program an interface submodule that is not addressed in the Al compatible address area S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 7 M7 400 Expansions Numbering of the Submodule Receptacles Each receptacle slot for an interface submodule has a submodule receptacle number assigned to it The submodule receptacle number depends on the configuration of your CPU or FM The submodule slot numbers are shown in Figures 12 4 and 12 5 You require these submodule receptacle numbers for configurations that you make in the BIOS setup or to determine the I O addresses of an interface submodule FM 456 4 EXM 478 S a n 1 n4 2 n 3 Figure 12 4 Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the FM 456 4 and EXM 478 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 8 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions CPU 486 3 EXM 478 CPU 488 3 Figure 12 5 Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 and EXM 478 S7 400 M7 400 P
298. e thermocouple wires The supply leads are copper wire Note Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity otherwise there will be considerable measuring errors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 53 Analog Modules Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point You can use internal or external compensation depending on where you want the reference junction to be The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the Reference Junction parameter in STEP 7 The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Explanation Ref Junction No compensation refer to Figure 5 18 for connection Internal compensation refer to Figure 5 18 for connection External compensation with a compensating box in leads of an individual thermocouple see Figure 5 19 for connection External compensation with a resistance thermometer to obtain the reference junction temperature recommended method see Figure 5 20 for connection External compensation with a resistance thermometer when thermocouples with the same reference ju
299. e two ways to control the operating mode of the IM 467 IM 467 FO By using the mode selector By using the programming device PC Mode Selector You can switch operating modes as follows using the mode selector From STOP to RUN All the configured communication services and S7 communication services are available in RUN The IM operating mode can only be controlled from the programming device PC when the switch is in the RUN position From RUN to STOP The IM goes into STOP mode Any existing S7 connections are cleared down and the DP slaves are no longer supplied Loadable Firmware The IM 467 IM 467 FO supports the updating of firmware FW by means of the FW loader The FW loader is a component of the NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS DP Authorization is not required for this After a FW update the central controller must be switched off and on again before normal operation can be resumed Note You can find additional information on loading firmware in the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS DP manual and in the readme file of the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS DP configuration software Note An optical bus terminal OBT is required to load FW in the IM 467 FO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 5 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 2 Configuration The IM 467 IM 467 FO is configured with STEP 7 The configuration data are retained even in the event of a power failure
300. eak for example The reference temperature value Reparameterize the reference transferred is not within the value temperature range Underflow Input value violates underrange error may be caused Wrong measuring range selected Configure other measuring range With the measuring ranges 4 to Check terminals 20 mA and 1 to 5 V if necessary by polarity reversal of sensor connection Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range Run time calibration A wiring fault has occurred on a Eliminate the wiring fault fault remains error channel during the calibration cycle until the next calibration in other words a maximum 6 minutes or until there is a STOP RUN transition of the CPU S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 66 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 17 Analog Module Interrupts Introduction In this Section the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described The following interrupts exist e Diagnostic Interrupt e Hardware interrupt Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of the modules starting at Section 5 18 to find out which analog modules have interrupt capability The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online help system for STEP 7 where they are described in greater detail Enabling Interrupts The in
301. eanings Q Analog output current Mana Reference potential of analog circuit Ri Load impedance L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage M Ground terminal Uliso Potential difference between Mana and chassis ground Connecting Loads to a Current Output You must connect loads to Q and the reference point of the analog circuit Mana of a current output 1 Chassis ground Figure 5 23 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 62 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Programmable and Non Programmable Diagnostic Messages In diagnostics we make a distinction between programmable and non programmable diagnostic messages You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment You perform parameter assignment in the Diagnostics parameter block in STEP 7 refer to Section 5 7 Non programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled Actions Following Diagnostic Messages in STEP 7 Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions e The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module forwarded to the CPU and can be read out by the user program e The error LED on the analog module lights e If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts in STEP 7 a diagnostic in
302. easuring circuit Uliso Potential difference between Mana and chassis ground Connection of Isolated Measuring Sensors The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential local ground They can be operated free of potential With isolated sensors potential differences might arise between the different sensors These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors To ensure that the permissible value for Ucp is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC affected environments connect M to Mana in modules with an Mana connection Isolated sensors Connection required for modules with ag Chassis ground Figure 5 7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated Al Note Do not connect M to Mana when connecting two wire transmitters for current measurement and when connecting resistance type sensors This also applies to inputs which are not used S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 44 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Non lIsolated Sensors The non isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential local ground When using non isolated sensors you must connect Mana to chassis ground Connecting Non lsolated Sensors Caused by local conditions or interference potential differences Ucy static or dynamic can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points If the potential differ
303. easuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7 Measurement Range Modules A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of sensor If necessary the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 5 4 The corresponding table in Section 5 21 2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range In addition the necessary settings are embossed on the module Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 61 Parameters of the SM 431 Al16 x 13 Bit Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Measurement e Measuring type Disabled U U Voltage 4DMU Current four wire transmitter 2DMU_ Current two wire transmitter Static Channel Measuring Refer to Section 5 21 2 for the measuring 10V range ranges of the input channels that you can set Interference 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz suppression 1 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 104 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 21 2 Measuring Methods and Measur
304. ected fully controlled two wire transmitters Power dissipation of the module Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time conversion time resolution per channel Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time in ms Resolution including sign 9 102 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 500 g Max 200 m 24 VDC only required for the supply of 2 wire transmitters Yes Max 50 mA Yes Typ 1 67 mA No No No 2 VDC 2 VACss 2 VDC 2 VACss 500 VDC Max 100 mA Max 400 mA Typ 2 W Integrative Does not go into the response time Yes 60 50 50 60 55 65 13 bits Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module in ms all channels enabled Not possible 880 1040 Suppression of Interference Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f nx f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 e Common mode gt 86 dB interference Ucm lt 2 V Series mode interference peak value of interference lt rated value of input range Crosstalk between the inputs gt 60 dB gt 50 dB Operational limit in the entire temperature range with reference to the input range e Voltage input 1V 0 65 10V 0 65 1Vto5V 1 e Current input 20mA 0 65 4mA to 20 mA 0 65 Basic error operational limit at 25
305. edge of the software You can acquire this knowledge in the manual Programming with STEP 7 Read the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation manual especially when using a S7 400 in safety relevant areas Target Group This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission operate and maintain the products described Where is this Manual valid The manual is valid for the S7 400 M7 400 programmable controller S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications NA A5E00069467 07 III Preface Changes Compared to the Previous Version Since the previous version of the Module Specifications reference manual the following changes have been made e The descriptions of the CPU and the CPU relevant products and topics have been put together in one manual CPU Specifications e The descriptions of the H CPUs and their associated products and topics have been moved to the manual S7 400 H Programmable Controller Redundant Systems Note The previous version of this Module Specifications reference manual can be recognized by the number in the footer A5E00069467 06 The current number is A5EQO069467 07 Certification The SIMATIC S7 400 product range has the following certificates e Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment e Canadian Standards Association CSA C22 2 Nummer 142 Process Contro
306. edgment Register IF 961 DIO Offset Address 2 Acknowledgment register Write only Table 13 27 Meaning of the Bits in the Acknowledgment Register IF 961 DIO eit Function Sd SO a fema o oo SSS feee OO S 27 Acknowledge nterup S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 27 Interface Submodules Interrupt Register The cause of the interrupt is stored in this register Tables 13 28 and 13 29 give an overview of the interrupt register Table 13 28 Offset Address for the Interrupt Register IF 961 DIO Offset Address 3 Interrupt register Read only Table 13 29 Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Register IF 961 DIO Interrupt Enable Register Tables 13 30 and 13 31 give an overview of the interrupt enable register Table 13 30 Offset Address for the Interrupt Enable Register IF 961 DIO Offset Address Table 13 31 Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Enable Register IF 961 DIO Reserved e pema o y Interrupt Disabled Enabled S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 28 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Selection Register Rising Edge Tables 13 32 and 13 33 give an overview of the selection register for interrupt generation at a rising edge of a digital input Table 13 32 Offset Address for the Selection Register Rising Edge IF 961 DIO Offset Address S Selection register rising edge Read write Table 13
307. ediate contactor to interrupt the mains The relay contacts are labeled as follows Relay K1 No 1 3 Relay K2 No 4 6 The following diagram explains the circuit in the fan subassembly when all fans are functioning to the digital input module In the fan assembly Evaluation digital input module to the monitor Evaluation L digital input module to the monitor o Z 24 V to the power supply module _ to the mains Status All fans operating Figure 9 1 Example of a Message Concept S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 3 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies 9 2 Cable Duct 6ES7408 0TA00 0AA0 Function The cable duct is used in installations outside the cabinet for e Cable clamping and or for e Shielding or for e Air circulation without fan assistance Front View of the Cable Duct Eye for clamping cable Shielding clamp Side elevation Scale 1 1 Figure 9 2 Front View of the Cable Channel Shielding Clamps If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied do not install them in the cable duct Technical Specifica
308. ee cette nen aeneene 4 53 4 15 Digital Inout Module SM 421 DI 32 x 120 VUC 6ES7421 1ELOO OAAO ccc eee teens 4 56 4 16 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 6ES7422 1BH10 OAA0 00008 4 59 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Contents 4 17 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 6ES7422 1BH11 OAAO 00 4 62 4 18 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 0 125 VDC 1 5A 6ES7422 5EH10 OABO ccc cece eee ee eee en eeenene 4 65 4 18 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A 469 4 19 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 6ES7422 1BLOO OAAO ccc eee eee eee nee 4 70 4 20 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 6ES7422 7BLOO OABO ccc cee ee ee eee eens 4 20 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 32 x 24VDC 0 5A 4 20 2 Behavior of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 4 21 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A 6ES7422 1FFOO OAA0 ccc ccc cee eee tener en enueunene 4 79 4 22 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A 6ES7422 11FHO0 OAAO sinus cc sdaee pow ase a sew ORde Ree Ree wen eens 4 83 4 23 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 6ES7422 5EHOO OABO 0 eee eee eens 4 87 4 23 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2A 4 90 4 24 Rel
309. ehavior of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Input Values The input values of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module Table 4 14 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC CPU Operating Mode Power Supply L Input Value of Digital Module to Digital Module POUE eee OFF Gms o o Depends on the parameter assignment see Table 4 13 Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF LED on the module Furthermore this information is made available on the module entry in diagnosis Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment see Section 4 9 1 Short Circuit of Sensor Supply Vs Irrespective of the parameter assignment the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a short circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 38 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Effect of Errors and Parameter Assignment on the Input Values The input values of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter assignment of the module The following table lists the effects on the input values You will find more diagnostic messages of the module in the Appendix entitled
310. el 0 000 cece e eee Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 120 230 VAC GES7408 1TBOO OXAO cee eee 9 5 Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 24 VDC 6ES7408 1TAO0 OXA0 ccc ccc ete nee t ere ennennene 9 7 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential 0 00 00 c cece eee Isolation Between the Bus Segments 00 cee eee eee eee Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater 0 c ee eee Front and Rear View of a CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 without Covering Flap 0 ccc eee eee n enn ees Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Mode Selector Switch 0 0 ccc ee eee eee eens Position of the Receptacles for Interface Submodules on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 0 eee 11 11 Submodule Receptacle Numbers on the CPU486 3 CPU488 3 and EXMA cite hi tiene an dee eh eed a enn oe and PS each eh ach wes 11 12 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 xxi Contents xxii 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 11 18 11 19 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 17 13 18 13 19 POST Window for a CPU 488 3 0 0 0 cee eens Warm Restart Window fora CPU
311. el 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 69 Digital Modules 4 19 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A 6ES7422 1BL00 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A has the following features 4 70 32 outputs isolated in a group of 32 Power is supplied to 8 channels in groups A supply group always consists of eight adjacent channels starting with channel 0 Channels 0 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore form one supply group Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by isolating L however you have to take note of the common ground connection 0 5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Process Module gt Woo i m OONOOARWND rT m Data register and bus control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ip DG fe te LED control Figure 4 17 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 71 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0
312. el error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 Figure B 6 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 6 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module 765 432 1 Configuring parameter assignment error Wire break Figure B 7 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 7 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules B 4 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2 The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital output modules are described below The following general rule applies When an error occurs the bit concerned is set to 1 You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called on the special module Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A 7654321 Byte 2 DOVUDEDU _ e status 0 RUN 1 STOP 765 432 1 Byte 3 alaLalalal_flo a error Figure B 8 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specificat
313. el n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit ee Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement with the SM 431 AIl 8 x 14 Bit 0 0 ee Thermocouple with Reference Junction Compensation via RTD OlirC ManMen O ano ean aed onan bea ee ead A dhe ae a eh toe Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al8x14 Bit Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 O0ABO Interference Frequency Suppression and Filter Settling Time with Smoothing of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF20 OABO Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 OABO 0 ccc eee eee ene nee Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO0 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 16 x13 Bit 0005 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 16 x13 Bit 2 ee Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Parameters of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 0085 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 0 0 ee Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 0 0 ee
314. elector switch receptacle 2 x DRAM Submodule receptacle for 9 Dongle interface interface submodules in preparation External battery supply MPI Figure 11 1 Front and Rear View of a CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 without Covering Flap S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 4 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 CPU Elements The following table gives the meanings of the individual elements of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Table 11 3 Elements of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Status and fault LEDs The status and fault LEDs indicate the operating state of your CPU See page 11 6 for more detailed explanations Submodule receptacle Along memory card can be inserted in the submodule for memory card receptacle The system and user software can be loaded from this card into the main memory during startup See page 11 8 for more detailed explanations Mode Selector The mode selector switch is a key switch See page 11 9 for more detailed explanations Submodule receptacles Interface submodules can be plugged into these submodule for interface receptacles submodules See page 11 11 for more detailed explanations Main memory The main memory is freely accessible via a cover on the left hand side of the housing This allows problem free insertion and replacement of memory submodules See page 11 13 for more detailed explanations Expansion socket Expansions such as the EXM expansion module AT adapter module
315. em default parameters or with been completed parameterize the your parameters module as required Wrong parameters One parameter or the combination Reassign module parameter of parameters is not plausible Channel information Channel error present the module available can supply additional channel information Operating mode Module was not parameterized and _ If after rebooting the CPU all the input STOP the first module cycle has not been values are in the intermediate memory completed this message is reset Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace module EPROM error Module is defective Replace module Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an Change the interrupt handling in the CPU interrupt since the previous change priority for interrupt OB shorten interrupt was not acknowledged interrupt program configuration error possible Parameter assignment Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter error the module for example impossible input delay the corresponding channel is deactivated Short circuit to M Overload of output Eliminate overload Short circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs Short circuit to L Short circuit of output to L Check the wiring of the outputs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 11 Digital Modules Table 4 9 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measure
316. emperature class T4 at 60 C ambient temperature Exception The following applies to the power supply modules in Table 1 3 e Temperature class T3C at 60 C ambient temperature e Temperature class T4 at 40 C ambient temperature In the case of the modules in Table 1 3 the T4 temperature class is achieved for the whole system if the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 C during operation There are also certain additional requirements that you can comply with by installing the system in cabinets Table 1 3 Power Supply Modules Name Ordernumber PS 407 4 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407 ODA00 0AA0 PS 407 10 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407 OKA00 0AA0 Warning Personal injury or property damage can result In hazardous areas personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an electrical circuit during operation of an S7 400 M7 400 for example by means of plug in connections fuses switches Do not create or break live electric circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of explosion If you use S7 400 under FM conditions it has to be mounted in a housing which at least corresponds to IP54 in accordance with EN 60529 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Safety Requirements for Installation The S7 400 M7 400 programmable controllers are open type equipment to the IEC 61131 2 standard and therefore adhere to the EU
317. en una carcasa met lica Estos deben garantizar como m nimo el grado de proteccion IP 54 conforme a EN 60529 Para ello se han de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales en las cuales se instala el equipo La caja debera contar con una declaraci n del fabricante para la zona 2 conforme a EN 50021 Si durante la operacion se alcanzara una temperatura gt 70 C en el cable o la entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura gt 80 C en la bifurcacion de hilos deberan adaptarse las propiedades termicas de los cables a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protecci n IP exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7 2 conforme a EN 50021 Todos los dispositivos inclusive interruptores etc conectados a las entradas y salidas sistemas S7 400 deben estar homologados para la protecci n contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensi n nominal se pueda rebasar en m s del 40 debido a efectos transitorios Margen de temperatura ambiente 0 C hasta 60 C Dentro de la caja deber colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su apertura un r tulo con la siguiente advertencia Precauci n Abrir la caja s lo brevemente p ej para el diagn stico visual Durante este tiempo Ud no deber activar ning n interruptor desenchufar o enchufar m dulos ni separar conductores el ctric
318. ence Ucp exceeds the permissible value you must provide equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points Non isolated sensors Equipotentiall bonding conductor s T Chassis groun Figure 5 8 Connecting Non lsolated Sensors to an Isolated Al Note Do not use non isolated two wire transmitters and non isolated resistance sensors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 45 Analog Modules 5 9 Connecting Voltage Sensors Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 8 with its generally applicable information on connecting sensors Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figure Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Connection of Voltage Sensors Connection required in the case of modules with Mana Figure 5 9 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Al S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 46 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 10 Connecting Current Sensors Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog input
319. ent 4 wire transmitter 2DMU Current 2 wire transmitter R 4L Resistance four conductor Static Channel connection Measuring Refer to Section 5 18 2 for the measuring 10V range ranges of the input channels that you can set Interference 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz suppression 1 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 74 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 18 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Resistance test You perform the setting with the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Wiring for Resistance Measurement The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit Table 5 49 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431 AI 8 x 13 Bit Measuring Type Permissible Condition Parameter for Channel n Resistance 0 2 4o0r6 You must disable the Measuring Type parameter for four conductor channels n 1 1 3 5 7 connection The reason The connections of channel n 1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to channel n Unused Channels Unused channels can usually be left open You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serio
320. ent Max 1 5 mA circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against 500 VDC backplane bus and load voltage L Current consumption e From the backplane bus Max 20 mA Power dissipation of the Typ 6 W module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 22 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 9 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 7BHO00 0ABO0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following features 16 inputs isolated in 2 groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two three four wire proximity switches BEROs IEC 61131 type 2 2 short circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors Sensor supply Vs O K status display Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt Programmable input delays Parameterizable substitute values in the input range The status LEDs indicate the process status S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 23 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Front connector monitoring INT z E Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 1L XTF Monitoring of internal voltage 1L gt p gt iL 0 amp yas
321. ent of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Measuring Type Parameter Permissible Condition for Channel n Resistor 0 2 4 6 8 10 You must disable the Measuring Type parameter four conductor terminal 12 or 14 for channels n 1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Resistor 0 2 4 6 8 10 The reason The connections of channel n 1 are used three conductor terminal 12 or 14 to supply the resistance that is connected to channel Thermal resistor 0 2 4 6 8 10 linear four conductor termi 12 or 14 nal Thermal resistor 0 2 4 6 8 10 linear four conductor termi 12 or 14 nal Thermocouple linear You can select the reference junction It is only advisable to specify a reference junction with thermocouples Circuit for Reference Junction Compensation for Thermocouples If you select RTD on Channel 0 as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for thermocouples the following applies Table 5 68 Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Reference Junction Permissible Condition Parameter for Channel n RTD on Channel 0 You must connect and parameterize on channel 0 a resistance thermometer with linearization a 3 or 4 conductor terminal in climatic range This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned The reason If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction a resistance type sensor must be connected there to establish the absolute temperatures in
322. ent of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module 7654321 0 Configuring parameter assignment error Short circuit to L Short circuit to M Wire break External auxiliary supply missing Figure B 13 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 765 432 1 eve 2 o 0 alal al alo APT status 0 RUN 1 STOP 7654321 nes ole elalal_ alo oer error Figure B 14 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 12 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 7654321 Byte 4 SE E rane type B 16 72 digital output 7 0 Byte 5 eee he Number of eno bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long if 0 Byte 6 ee ie Ie Number of channels of the same type in one module 16 channels 76543210 Byter L 1 111111 Channel error channel 0 7 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 7654321 0 Byte8 Channel error channel 8 Channel error channel 9 Channel error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 Figure B 15 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The fi
323. equest Enter here the DMA request A and B for the interface submodule see the Interface Submodules chapter The values positioned on the left are setpoints You can edit these The value indicated in gray type to the right of these is the actual value determined at the last CPU power up It cannot be edited Config Index Here you can address the 40 H configuration space of the interface submodules OH to 3FH You will find the address in the Table Offset Address for the Configuration Register of each interface submodule in the Interface Submodules chapter S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 27 CPUs for M7 400 Value Gray Type Under the address set with Config Index you can now enter the configuration value You will find this value and its significance in the chapter Interface Submodules under the relevant interface submodule The configuration value positioned on the left is the setpoint You can edit this value When you have entered it confirm by pressing the key or the key combination _ shit J tab so that it is accepted The configuration value shown to the right of this in gray type black type in Remote Setup is the actual value determined at the last power up of the CPU It cannot be edited If there is no submodule in the submodule receptacle the value FF is displayed SIG Source SIG Dest OK Button Here you enter
324. er 10 6 Technical specifications M7 400 CPUs 11 3 Temperature coefficient Glossary 19 analog input module 5 41 Temperature unit analog input module 5 41 Terminating connector 7 3 7 13 Test voltages 1 18 Thermo emf 5 53 Thermocouple design 5 53 principle of operation 5 53 Thermocouple connection to analog input module 5 53 Three conductor connection 5 52 Glossary 1 9 Time M7 400 11 32 Timeout mode M7 400 Transducer four wire 13 37 two wire 13 37 Transmission rate Glossary 19 Two conductor connection 5 52 Two wire transducers connection Two wire transmitter Glossary 19 Two wire transmitters 5 48 Type configured M7 400 lossary 19 U ULTA Underflow analog input module 5 66 Ungrounded operation RS 485 repeater 10 4 User program Glossary 19 parameter assignment in A 2 V Value M7 400 Varistor Glossary 19 Vibrations 1 15 Video ROM Voltage sensors connecting 5 46 connection 13 39 W Warm restart Glossary 20 Warm restart M7 400 11 18 Wire break Glossary 20 analog input module 5 66 digital module 4 12 Wire break check digital input module 4 7 digital output module 4 8 Working memory Glossary 20 WR_DPARM SFC 56 A 2 WR_PARM SFC 55 A 2 Wrong parameters digital module 4 11 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 12 A5E00069467 07
325. er number 6ES7460 1AA01 OAA0 and in the IM 460 0 with the order number 6ES7460 1AA00 0AA0 as of version A5 Dimensions W x H x D mm 25 x 290 x 280 600 g 610g Current consumption from the S7 400 bus 5 VDC Typ 130 mA IM 460 0 Max 140 mA Typ 260 mA IM 461 0 Max 290 mA Power loss e IM 460 0 Typ 650 mW Max 700 mW e IM 461 0 Typ 1300 mW Max 1450 mW S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 9 Interface Modules 6 3 The Interface Modules IM 460 1 6ES7460 1BA00 0ABO 6ES7460 1BA01 0ABO and IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 0AA0 6ES7461 1BA01 0AA0 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 0AA0 6ES7461 1BA01 0AA0 IM 460 1 IM 461 1 IM 461 1 X 2 LEDs e O ats 461 XXXXX XXXX DIP switch DIP switch Under cover Connector X1 Interface C1 Connector X2 Interface C2 OUT Figure 6 3 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 10 A5E00069467 07 Function Interface Modules The interface module pair IM 460 1 send IM and IM 461 1 receive IM are used for a local link up to a maximum 1 5 m in total A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these interface modules Please particularly remember the following points The current requirements of the module plugged into the EU must not exceed 5 V 5 A Yo
326. er Supply Module PS 407 20A 6ES7407 0RA01 0AA0 Function The PS 407 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 20 A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A 10 42 e Fixing screws 407 0RA01 0AAO o INTF BAF 2 BATTE LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F 5 VDC 24 VDC o 5 VDC o 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover BATT 1 BATT 2 Battery compartment ame Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 6 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A Power Connection In contrast to the instructions on installing a power supply module in the S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation manual an AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 20A to both an AC and DC supply S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 28 A5E00069467 07 Polarity Reversal of L and L Power Supply Modules The polarity reversal of L and L with supply voltages of between 88 VDC and 300 VDC has no effect on the function o
327. er Supply Module in Invalid Slot If you insert the power supply module of a rack in an invalid slot it will not power up In this case proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly 1 Disconnect the power supply module from the mains not just the standby switch 2 Remove the power supply module 3 Install the power supply module in slot 1 4 Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again N Caution Damage can result If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules the module may be damaged Slots 1 to 4 are permissible as long as you Start at slot 1 and leave no gaps Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permissible slots Compliance with the NAMUR Recommendation If you use one of the modules listed below you can achieve mains buffering in accordance with the NAMUR recommendation with a central power supply in accordance with NAMUR or an uninterrupted power supply Table 3 1 Compliance with the NAMUR recommendation Name Ordernumber Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 ODA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 407 20 A 6ES7407 ORA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 4054A 6ES7405 ODA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 10 A 6ES7405 OKA00 0AA0 Power Supply Module PS 405 20 A 6ES7405 ORA00 0AA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 3 Power Supply Modules 3 2 Redundant Power Sup
328. er Up with Error Message If one of the following errors occurs e Memory test error e Hard disk configuration error e CMOS checksum error the INTF LED remains lit as well as the STOP LED A window appears on the screen with the relevant error message The window disappears after approximately two seconds and the power up continues With an incorrect CMOS checksum the default settings are loaded Behavior in the Event of Serious Errors In the case of serious errors the power up is stopped Serious errors include e No memory plugged in e More than one IF962 VGA interface submodule has been plugged in INTF LED lights up e The CMOS memory location 15 OxF contains an invalid shutdown code during the warm restart These errors prevent screen output since the video unit is not initialized The INTF LED lights up Ensure that the MEM 478 DRAM memory submodules required for operation are plugged into the CPU or check to see if more than one IF262 VGA interface submodule has been plugged into the CPU If you do not find an error there must be an invalid shutdown code If this is the case reset the CPU using power off on Warm Restart After a warm restart of the CPU the following window appears signaling an accelerated system power up see Section 11 4 2 BIOS Hot Keys PavwerBIos Version 1 00 Copyright 1984 1996 Award Software Inc 03 13 96 Inte l 82430HX 3A59T000 01 0000 Siemens AG M7 CPU M7 BIOS A2 00m Pres
329. ergized Table 5 35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V Bec Hex OTOTOV osv a A oc athe te a av 0 003617 i 361 7uV ee 7u Rated range mo fo o E4FF i Not possible The output value is limited tc 117 593 32512 8100 ne OV ho we 32513 80FF Underflow off circuit and 118 519 32768 8000 0 00 V 0 00 V deenergized S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 26 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges Table 5 36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 20 mA 118 5149 32767 7FFF 0 00 mA Overflow off circuit and deenergized P 32512 7FOO 32511 7EFF 23 52 mA ys 27649 6CO1 27648 6C00 20 mA 20736 5100 15mA Overrange 723 4 nA 0 0 mA Rated range Le FFFF 723 4 mA 20736 AF00 15mA 27648 9400 20 mA m 27649 93FF 8100 23 52 mA eee Underflow off circuit and deenergized a Underrange Table 5 37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA 118 5149 ae REP 0 00 mA 0 00 mA Overflow off circuit 117 589 32511 7EFF 23 52 mA 22 81 mA 0 003617 723 4 nA 4mA 578 7 nA ee output value is SS 32513 80FF ns a Underflow off circuit 118 519 32768 8000 0 00 mA 0 00 mA and deenergized S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 27 Analog Modules
330. es Table 5 14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 4 to 20 mA Bes Hex amma SSCS mn easte reo 117 589 Overrange are eco 0 003617 4 a Rated range 578 7 nA ab p pm erson Err ee Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Sensors Table 5 15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Sensors from 48 Q to 6 kQ ae Re end 56 89 Q Ka 355 54 Q 711 09 Q 7 11 kQ rs sere Pf ares feo T ep p negative values physically not possible S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 14 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt x00 Standard Table 5 16 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 200 500 1000 Pt x00 Pt x00 Pt x00 Standard Standard Standard in C in F in K 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 0 1 C 0 1 F 0 1 K 10000 27104 18320 47904 12732 31BCy Overrange 8501 2135H 15621 3D05y 11233 2BE1y 8500 21344 15620 3D044 11232 2BE0y Rated range 2000 F830y 3280 F330y 732 2DCy F82Fy F32Fy 731 2DBy Underrange F682y FO2Ay 302 12Ey Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt x00 Climatic Table 5 17 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 200 500 1000 Pt x00 Pt x00 Climatic Climatic in C in F 1 Digit Hexadecimal 1 Digit Hexadecimal 0 01 C 0 01 F gt 155 00 32767 7FFFy gt 3
331. es Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L e Reverse polarity protection Power supply of the transmitters e Supply current e Short circuit proof Constant measured current for resistance type sensor Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L Permitted potential difference Between inputs and Mana Ucm Between the inputs Ecm Between Mana and Minternal Ujso 5 110 As of STEP 7 V 2 0 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 500 g 16 8 Max 200 m Max 50 m 24 VDC only required for the supply of two wire transmitters Yes Max 50 mA Yes Typ 1 67 mA 120 VAC 120 VAC 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested with Between bus and L M Between bus and analog section Between bus and chassis ground Between analog section and L M Between analog section and chassis ground Between L M and chassis ground Current consumption e From the backplane bus From load voltage L with 16 connected fully controlled two wire transmitters Power dissipation of the module 2120 VDC 2120 VDC 500 VDC 707 VDC 2120 VDC 2120 VDC Max 700 mA Max 400 mA Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time conversion time resolution per channel e Parameters can be assigned Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz Integration time in ms Basic conversion time in ms Additional co
332. f TERE JTAUDS Triggering a digital input Possible Insulation tested with 1500 VDC l Switch rate rene Consumption e For resistive load Max 10 Hz e From the backplane bus Max 600 mA e For inductive load Max 0 5 Hz From load voltage L Max 0 mA to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 without load J Power dissipation of the Typ 20 W POP AMPLOAG ai module Short circuit protection of the Fuse 8A 125 V 2AG Status Interrupts Diagnostics oe PeT GURUN e Min current required for Status display Green LED per fuse to blow Min 40 A channel e Max response time Typ 33 ms Interrupts a io ieii 5 7 Replacement fuses Fuse 8 A quick acting iagnostic Interrup arameters can be l assigned e Littelfuse 225 008 Diagnostic functions Parameters can be assigned Group error display For internal fault Red LED INTF For external fault Red LED EXTF S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 89 Digital Modules Changing Fuses 1 Warning This can result in injury If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module you could be injured by an electric shock Consequently always remove the front connector before you change the fuse 4 23 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Parameter Assignment You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 5 7 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 1
333. f lt 500 Hz 1 g acceleration Shocks Semisinusoidal 50 g 11 ms Note The ambient conditions specified are limit values determined by the hard disk drive The values must not be exceeded on the hard disk drive S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 25 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Chapter Overview San O bescipion Pass Interface Submodules Overview 13 2 Submodule IDs and Insertion Rules 13 3 IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 1BA00 0ACO 13 4 IF 962 COM Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 13 10 6ES7962 3AA00 0AC0 13 5 IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 13 16 6ES7962 4AA00 0ACO 13 6 IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 13 23 6ES7961 1AA00 0ACO 13 7 IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 13 33 6ES7961 2AA00 0ACO 13 8 IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 13 56 6ES7961 3AA00 0ACO IF 964 DP Interface Submodule for S7 400 and M7 400 13 61 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 1 Interface Submodules 13 1 Interface Submodules Overview Introduction The interface submodules are designed for use in the M7 300 and M7 400 automation computers They can be operated in the M7 400 programmable modules and in the EXM 378 EXM 478 expansion modules The interface submodules are contr
334. f 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of a load e To increase performance Triggering a digital input Switch rate e For resistive load e For inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 Short circuit protection of output Threshold on Replacement fuses Data for Selecting an Actuator Min L 1 0 V 1 5A 10 mA to 1 5 A Max 3 A for 10 ms Max 0 5 mA Max 2 ms Max 13 ms Possible only outputs of the same group Possible only outputs of the same group Possible Max 10 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Electronically protected Typ 04 A to 5 A Fuse 8 A 250 V quick blow 1 To achieve maximum performance capability distribute the high current load between the two groups To reset a deactivated output first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1 If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated output and the short circuit remains additional interrupts are generated provided the diagnostic interrupt parameter was set S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 67 Digital Modules Note If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact a voltage pulse may occur at the outputs The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0 5 ms Changing Fuses q Warning This can result in injury If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module you could be injured by an electric shock Consequently always remove
335. f necessary you must take additional installation measures equipotential bonding conductor to ensure this Figure 13 14 shows the connection of non isolated measured value sensors Non isolated measured value sensors MsENSOR Ground bus Figure 13 14 Connection of Non lsolated Measured Value Sensors Connection of Voltage Sensors Figure 13 15 shows the connection of voltage sensors to the analog input module Figure 13 15 Connection of Voltage Sensors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 39 Interface Submodules Connection of Current Sensors as Two Wire and Four Wire Transducers Figures 13 16 and 13 17 show you how to connect current sensors as two wire and four wire transducers to analog input modules The 24 V voltage is supplied to the two wire transducer via a protected output L1 L2 The two wire transducer converts the measured variable to a current of 4 to 20 mA The range 4 to 20 mA is converted to the required format by a software driver function Four wire transducers have a separate supply voltage Sensor e g pressure gauge Two wire transducers Two wire transducers Figure 13 16 Connection of Two Wire Transducers Sensor e g pressure gauge Four wire transducer Figure 13 17 Connection of Four Wire Transducers S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 40 A5E0
336. f steps for commissioning 4 5 wire break check 4 7 short circuit to L Digital input modules parameters A 4 STOP mode wire break 4 12 wrong parameters S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 4 A5E00069467 07 Digital output module destination CPU for Interrupt 4 8 diagnostic data B 8 diagnostic interrupt enable 4 8 diagnostics 4 8 fuse blown 4 8 keep last value 4 8 no load voltage L 4 8 parameters 4 8 A 7 short circuit to L 4 8 short circuit to M 4 8 SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A 4 83 SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 4 87 _ SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 4 59 4 62 SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A structure of data record 1 A 8 substitute 1 substitute a value 4 8 wire break check 4 8 Direct access Glossary 4 Direct communication Glossary 5 DMA request M7 400 11 27 DP master Glossary 5 DP slave Glossary 5 Drive A M7 400 Drive B M7 400 E Edge Glossary 5 EEPROM Glossary 5 Einsatz der ET 200 S7 300 in Zone 2 Electromagnetic compatibility 1 9 EMC directive 1 2 EMV 7 2 EPROM Glossary 5 EPROM error analog input module 5 66 digital module Equidistance Glossary 5 Equipotential bonding Glossary 6 Error of an analog module 5 34 4 70 4 73 Index EXM 478
337. f the power supply The connection should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual Chapter 6 Technical Specifications of the PS 407 20 A Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output Rating Dimensions WxHxD mm Weight Cable cross section Cable diameter Input Rating Input voltage e Rated value e Permitted range System frequency e Rated value e Permitted range Rated input current e At120 VAC 110 VDC e At 230 VAC 230 VDC Starting current inrush Leakage current Overvoltage resistance 75x290x217 2 2 kg 3x1 5 mm litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar use only flexible sheath cable 3 to 9 mm 110 230 VDC 120 230 VAC 88 to 300 VDC 85 to 264 VAC long range input 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 1 5A 0 8 A Peak value 88 A half value width 1 1 ms lt 3 5 mA In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve W2 Output voltages e Rated values Output currents e Rated values Max residual ripple Max switching peaks Idle conditions 5 1 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 20A 24 VDC 1 0 A 5 VDC 50 mVss 24 VDC 200 mVss 5 VDC 150 mVs 24 VDC 500 mVs 5 VDC 200 mA base load required 24 VDC Idling proof no base load required Other Parameters Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 with protective grounding conductor Overvoltage category Pollution severity Rated voltage U 0 lt Ue lt 50 V
338. fic Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L1 e Reverse polarity protection Total current of the outputs 1 Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the outputs of the different groups Insulation tested with Current consumption e From the backplane bus e From load voltage L without load Power dissipation of the module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts e Diagnostic Interrupt Diagnostic functions Group error display For internal fault For external fault Diagnostic information readable Substitute value can be applied 25 X 290 x 210 Approx 800 g 16 Max 600 m Max 1000 m 20 VDC to 138 VDC Yes with fuse With fan subassembly Max 16A 21A Max 8A 14A Yes Yes 8 250 VAC 1500 VAC Max 700 mA Max 2 mA Typ 10 W Green LED per channel Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF Yes Yes programmable Output voltage e At signal 1 Output current e At signal 1 Rated value Permitted range Permitted surge current e At signal 0 leakage current Output delay for resistive load e From 0 to 1 At 1 to 0 Parallel connection o
339. fican en zonas Las zonas se diferencian segun la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmosfera capaz de sufrir una explosion Zona Peligro de explosi n Ejemplo S La atm sfera explosiva de gas Areas alrededor de uniones abridadas con s lo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuber as en locales brevemente cerrados rea segura No Fuera de la zona 2 Aplicaciones est ndar de la periferia descentralizada A continuaci n encontrar importantes informaciones para la instalaci n del SIMATIC S7 400 en reas con peligro de explosi n Otras informaciones Encontrar otras informaciones relativas a los distintos m dulos S7 400 en el Manual Lugar de fabricaci n Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Homologaci n x Il 3 G EEx nA II T3 T6 seg n norma EN 50021 1999 N mero de comprobaci n KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Nota Los m dulos con la homologaci n 913 G EEx nA II T3 T6 pueden utilizarse nicamente en los aut matas programables SIMATIC S7 400 de la categor a de equipo 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 26 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Mantenimiento Para una reparacion se ha de remitir el modulo afectado al lugar de fabricacion Solo alli se puede realizar la reparacion Condiciones especiales iF El SIMATIC S7 400 se ha de montar en un armario el ctrico de distribuci n o
340. following warning must be put up inside the housing in an easily visible position when the housing is opened Warning The housing can only be opened for a short time e g for visual diagnostics If you do this do not operate any switches remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables plug in connections You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous i e there is no risk of explosion List of Approved Modules You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet http www4 ad siemens de view cs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 23 General Technical Specifications 1 6 3 Utilisation du S7 400 dans un environnement a risque d explosion en zone 2 Zone 2 Les environnements a risque d explosion sont r partis en zones Les zones se distinguent par la probabilite de presence d une atmosphere explosive Zone _ Risque d explosion Exemple o Formation rare et br ve d une Environnement de raccords joints plats atmosph re gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux ferm s Zone s re Non A l ext rieur de la zone 2 Utilisation standard de p riph rie d centralis e Vous trouverez ci apr s des remarques importantes pour l installation du SIMATIC S7 400 dans un environnement pr sentant un risque d explosion Informations compl mentaires Des informations compl men
341. for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule The I O address is the sum of the base address and the offset address The registers and their meanings and the offset addresses are described below Table 13 17 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule Offset Address Configuration register Read write 104 174 UART 16C552 parallel port Read write S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 19 Interface Submodules Default Settings in the BIOS The following I O addresses and interrupt numbers are set as defaults in the BIOS for LPT ports _ Port VO Address erupto With mass storage module MSM 478 Without mass storage module MSM 478 Configuration register 13 20 The BIOS setup defines in which AT compatible I O address area the LPT interface is to be operated or whether it is only to be operated in the reserved I O address area and this information is stored in the configuration register Tables 13 18 to 13 20 give you an overview of the possible settings in the configuration register Table 13 18 Offset Address for the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Offset Address On Configuration register Read write Table 13 19 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Write Any O or 1 Read Always 1 Addressing type LPT S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specificat
342. for Use at up to 1500 m Name reer number Power supply module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA00 0AA0 Power supply module PS 407 10A 6ES7407 0KA00 0AA0 No condensation corresponds to RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 61131 2 The power supply modu les in Table 1 12 achieve the following va lues 1080 to 869 hPa corres ponds to a level of 1000 to 1500 m Test 10 ppm 4 days Test 1 ppm 4 days S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7 400 The M7 400 may be used under the following ambient climatic conditions Table 1 15 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7 400 Climatic Condi Permitted Range tions Temperature When using a CPU 486 3 or 488 3 When using an MSM 478 without 5to 55 C diskette operation but with ventila tion When using an MSM 478 with 5to 40 C diskette operation or without ventilation when using an ATM 478 the permissible temperature range Is restricted by the AT module used Relative Max 95 No condensation corresponds to humidity RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Atmospheric 1080 to 795 kPa corresponds to Note the restriction on the power pressure a height of 1000 to 2000 m supply in Table 1 12 Concentration of Test contaminants SO lt 0 5 ppm 10 ppm 4 days RH lt 60 no condensation HoS lt 0 1 ppm 1 ppm 4 days
343. g Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Parameters of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2A Analog Input Modules Characteristics ata Glance Analog Output Modules Characteristics ata Glance Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Example Bit Pattern of a 16 Bit and a 13 Bit Analog Value Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values 0 cece eae Bipolar Input Ranges 0c ccc eee eee eee eee Unipolar Input Ranges eee Life Zero Input Ranges 0 ccc ee eee eee nena Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 10 Vto 1V 0 cece eee Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 500 mV to 25 mV Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5V and0to 10V Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges 20 MAto 3 2MA 006 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 4 to 20 mA Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Sensors from 48 W to 6 KW ee eee tenn eens Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 200 500 1000 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 200 500 1000 Analog Value Re
344. g sensors Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings lox Constant current lead positive Ic_ Constant current lead negative M Measuring line positive ML Measuring line negative Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 5 50 The resistance thermometers resistors are wired in a four conductor three conductor or two conductor connection With four conductor and three conductor connections the module supplies a constant current via terminals Ic and Ic so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is compensated It is important that the connected constant current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer resistor Measurements with four conductor or three conductor connections supply a more precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a two conductor connection S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Four Conductor Connection of a Resistance Thermometer The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M and M_ terminals When you connect watch out for the polarity of the connected cable connect Ic and M as well as Ic _ and M to the resistance thermometer Make sure that the connected cables Ic and M and SO and SE and cables Ic and M and AGND and SE are connected
345. g which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of the electrical equipment Functional grounding short circuits interference voltage that would otherwise have an impermissible impact on the equipment Function block A function block FB in accordance with IEC 1131 3 is a code block with gt static data Because an FB has a memory its parameters outputs for example can be accessed from any position in the user program Fuse blown Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules When the parameter is enabled the failure of one or more fuses is detected by the module With corresponding parameter assignment a diagnostic interrupt is triggered Global data Global data are data that can be addressed from any code block FC FB OB In detail this refers to bit memories M inputs I outputs Q timers counters and data blocks DB Absolute or symbolic access is possible to global data Global data communication Global data communication is a method of transferring global data between CPUs Ground The ground is the total number of all the interconnected inactive parts of a device that cannot take on a hazardous voltage in the event of a fault Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set to zero at any point In the proximity of grounding electrodes the ground can have a potential other than zero The term reference ground is frequently used to describe such circum
346. gned for a limited number of write accesses Memory Card A memory card emulates a diskette from which an operating system can also be booted In addition a memory card can also be used to exchange user software and user data Memory cards with Flash EPROM are available for the CPUs see the ordering data Drive Assignment The memory card is accessed by the operating system in the same way as a conventional drive You can set the drive assignment in the BIOS setup Section 11 4 11 page 11 35 Boot Sequence You can set the boot sequence in the BIOS setup Section 11 4 12 page 11 36 Formatting Memory cards are formatted with the program FTLFORM EXE included with the system software Read the relevant sections in the M7 SYS User Manual Note The memory capacity specified for the memory card is the actual physical memory Capacity gross Formatting reduces the gross memory capacity to approximately 80 net that is then available to the operating system for storing data programs UNDELETE Files which were deleted from the memory card cannot be restored using UNDELETE programs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 3 Mode Selector Switch Mode Selector Switch The mode selector switch of the CPUs is a keyswitch You can see the positions of the mode selector switch in the following figure Fig
347. gnmen Aggregate current Ambient conditions 1 climatic 1 15 mechanical 1 14 Analog functions STEP 7 blocks 5 1_ Analog input module ADC DAC error 5 66 channel error 5 65 channel information available 5 65 configuring error 5 66 connecting resistance thermometers 5 50 connecting resistors 5 50 connecting sensor 5 43 connecting thermocouple 5 53 diagnostic data B 14 diagnostic interrupt 5 40 diagnostic message in measured value diagnostics 5 40 EPROM error 5 66 external malfunction 5 65 ground short circuit 5 66 hardware interrupt lost 5 66 incorrect parameters 5 65 interference frequency su opression 5 41 internal matfunction 5 65 isolated 5 43 limit value 5 40 measurement 5 41 measuring range 5 41 measuring range module incorrect missing 5 65 measuring type 5 41 module malfunction 5 65 PUs 11 40 no external auxiliary voltage 5 65 no front connector 5 65 non isolated 5 43 overflow 5 66 parameter assignment error 5 66 parameter assignment missing 5 65 parameters 5 40 A 10 potential difference 5 43 RAM error 5 66 15 66 reference channel error reference junction 5 41 reference temperature 5 41 run time calibration error 5 66 SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 5 99 SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 5 107 SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 5 70 SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 5 77 5 90 SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 5 130
348. gure 13 4 IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 16 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 5 1 Pin Assignments X1 Socket Table 13 15 Socket X1 IF 962 LPT 25 Pin Sub D Socket Connector chin Cig Crt o pe ooe o pe o N 1 4 4 j 2 0 1 3 5 6 7 8 9 5 2 Note Operational ground GND signal at the COMa or COMb ports is referenced to internal ground Suitable measures may be required on the process side to avoid ground loops S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 17 Interface Submodules 13 5 2 Addressing and Interrupts Addressing The IF 962 LPT interface submodule can be addressed in the following two ways e Inthe AT compatible I O address area e Inthe M7 300 400 reserved I O address area from C000p Addressing in the AT Compatible I O Address Area The LPT ports can be operated in the AT compatible I O address area The settings are made in the BIOS Setup You can see the addresses that can be set in the BIOS Setup from the following table Table 13 16 Addressing the LPT Ports a OA re O3BCy to 3BEy Automatically configured by the BIOS and 0378p to 37F can be set in the BIOS setup 0278 to 27Fy The BIOS searches the addresses in the order 03BCy 03784 and 0278 and assigns LPT1 LPT2 and LPT3 in ascending order There is no fixed assignment of the I O
349. gure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module 765 432 1 Configuring parameter assignment error Fuse blown Figure B 16 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 13 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules B 5 Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2 The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog input modules are described below The following general rule applies When an error occurs the bit concerned is set to 1 You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called on the special module Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 7 65 432 1 Byte 2 DOVUUEDE E Measuring range module incorrect or missing Operating status 0 RUN 1 STOP 7654321 Byte 3 rot Tol TT Lopo per error RAM error ADC DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B 17 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 14 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 7654321 Byte 4 KE E Channel type B 16 71 analog input 7 0 Byte 5 eee he Number of eno bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long if 0 Byte 6 ee I te Number
350. h a time delay of 0 1 ms Data for Selecting a Sensor 24 VDC 11 V to 30 V 30 V to 5 V 6 mA to 12 mA lt 6 mA To IEC 61131 type 2 Possible Max 3 mA Time Frequency Max 70 us Max 120 us Max 5 ms Yes 0 1 0 5 3 ms lt 2 kHz Both values go into cycle and response times Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring 10 to 18 kQ S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 9 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Parameter Assignment You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 5 7 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below Table 4 10 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No Peo naven OFO 1to4 Static Module Interrupt Diagnostics Channel e Wire break Yes no No Static Channel e No load voltage Yes no No group L sensor supply Trigger for hardware interrupt en h e Rising edge Yes no PynamIG enanng e Falling edge Yes no Input delay 3 ms DC 0 1 ms DC 0 5 ms DC AC Reaction to Error Substitute a Value SV SV Dynamic Module Keep Last Value KLV 1
351. haltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehause eingebaut werden Diese mussen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 nach EN 60529 gewahrleisten Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu berucksichtigen in denen das Gerat installiert wird Fur das Gehause muss eine Herstellererklarung fur Zone 2 vorliegen gem EN 500271 Wenn am Kabel bzw an der Kabeleinfuhrung dieses Gehauses unter Betriebs bedingungen eine Temperatur gt 70 C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung gt 80 C sein kann mussen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsachlich gemessenen Temperaturen ubereinstimmen Die eingesetzten Kabeleinfuhrungen m ssen der geforderten IP Schutzart und dem Abschnitt 7 2 gem EN 50021 entsprechen Alle Ger te einschlie lich Schalter etc die an den Ein und Ausgangen von S 400 Systemen angeschlossen werden m ssen fur den Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein Es m ssen Ma nahmen getroffen werden dass die Nennspannung durch Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 uberschritten werden kann Umgebungstemperaturbereich 0 C bis 60 C Innerhalb des Geh uses ist an einem nach dem ffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen Warnung Das Geh use darf nur kurze Zeit ge ffnet werden z B f r visuelle Diagnose Bet tigen Sie dabei keine Schalter ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und trennen keine elektrischen Leitunge
352. hannel e Parameterizable Yes Basic conversion time in 22 25 ms e Additional conversion time Max 200 for measuring resistance inms e Resolution including sign 16 16 bit e Noise suppression 60 50 for interference frequency f1 in Hz Smoothing of the measured Parameters can be values assigned in 4 stages Basic response time of module 22 25 ms all channels enabled Suppression of interference Limits of Error Noise suppression forf nx f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 etc e Common mode gt 100 dB gt 50 dB interference Ucy lt 120V Series mode interference peak value of interference lt rated value of the input range Crosstalk between the inputs gt 70 dB Operational limit over entire temperature range referred to 0 to 60 C input range RTD input 1 0 C Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to input range e RTD input Temperature error with reference to the input range 0 5 C 0 007 K 0 2 C Linearity error with reference to the input range Repeat accuracy inthe steady 0 2 C state at 25 C referred to the input range Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts e Hardware interrupt when Parameters can be limit has been exceeded assigned e Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic functions Parameters can be assigned Group error display For internal fault Red LED INTF Red LED
353. he CPU if a floppy disk drive is entered in Drive A e Activate the option button MemCard if you want to work with a memory card e Otherwise activate the option button NONE The other Drive B settings are not significant at the present time Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 35 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 12 Setup Page Boot Options Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Boot Options and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 18 Bot tions _ ES T r Press Fl key for help of Cancel Default L ES ek Boot Sequence Keyboard Stat Typematic Settings Enabled Chere Typanatic Rate 6 tchar s sean Delay 250 msec Num Lock on pO E EEEE malt o System Memory 1 No Halt Keyboard Errors Y Disk Errors All Errors E SSS ret Faaa ee teres I H Quick Memory Test Figure 11 18 Boot Options Setup Page What is the Purpose of the Setup Page On this page you set the
354. he IM 4632 tine dco oie gaa a Wadley Maia wind rivri dirii LEDs of the IM 468 2 0 ee teens Switch Position Interface Selector of the IM 463 2 Settings Address Areas on the IM 314 0 ccc eee Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721 ccc eee Assignment of the Terminator 760 1AA11 0 cee eee ee Operating Modes of the IM 467 467 FO ccc cee CPU and IM 467 467 FO 1 een ee eens Function of Fan Monitoring 0 ccc eee eens Maximum Cable Length of a Segment 0 cee eee Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater Performance Features of the CPUS nananana nananana nannan Technical Specifications of the CPUS 00 0c cece eee Elements of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 0005 Meaning of the Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 Positions of the Mode Selector Switch 0 c cece eee eee Main Memory Expansion Possibilities 0 0 00 ccc eee eee BIOS Hot Keys with German and English Key Assignments Main Memory Assignment 0c cece ee eee eee eens Interrupt Assignment 0 cc eee teen e eens Expansion Possibilities of the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 or FM 456 Division of Addresses Within an Expansion Module Base Addresses of the Interface Submodules w
355. he rules for connections in the section after next Treat conection Ramat connection Send IM 460 0 460 1 460 3 460 4 Max number of connectable EMs per 4 1 4 4 chain Max curenitansterperneface f a S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 2 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks IM 460 4 IM 460 3 IM 460 1 IM 460 B 60 0 E Central rack CR ly ote o fo UT e Expansion without 5 V local
356. here are no slot rules The IM 467 IM 467 FO and the CP 443 5 Extended cannot be used together The transmission rate of 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps can be set in steps using software Configuration and programming are possible via PROFIBUS DP You must not however change the PROFIBUS DP parameters IM 467 with 9 pin subminiature D female connector for connection to PROFIBUS DP 6ES7467 5GJ02 0ABO0 IM 467 FO with fiber optic cable for connection to PROFIBUS DP 6ES7467 5FJ00 0ABO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Mode selector PROFIBUS DP interface _ 9 pin subminiature D Figure 8 1 Configuration of the IM 467 467 FO Communication Services The IM 467 IM 467 FO offers two communication services e PROFIBUS DP The IM 467 IM 467 FO is a PROFIBUS DP master in accordance with EN 50 170 It is configured entirely with STEP 7 It behaves in basically the same way as the integrated PROFIBUS DP interfaces on the CPU modules see the technical specifications of the IM 467 IM 467 FO for the differences DP communication does not require any function calls in the STEP 7 user program e S7 functions The S7 functions guarantee optimal and easy communication in a SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 automation solution The following S7 functions are enabled for the IM 467 IM 467 FO Programming device functions via PROFIBUS DP Operator control and m
357. hes The CPU sets the EXTF LED external fault and saves the fault in the diagnostic buffer You can trigger other responses such as CPU STOP or a message to a control room in OB 81 power supply error If OB 81 is not parameterized the CPU continues as normal Overload at5 V In the event of an overload at 5V the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output current can retain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300ms The power supply modules with 4 A output current can retain an output current of 8 A for 300 ms The CPU will then go to DEFECT afterwards If the LED DC 5 V flashes on the power supply and is resettable with the FMR button you will be able to perform a restart The CPU will remain in STOP afterwards and will then require a memory reset S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 15 Power Supply Modules BAF BATTF The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT INDIC switch is in the BATT position It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults Table 3 9 BAF BATTF BATT INDIC LEDs on BATT Cause of Fault Battery empty or missing No backup voltage available Battery empty or missing Battery has been stored for too long Battery in order No backup voltage available short circuit D LED is dark L LED lights up Insert new battery Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Insert new battery Press FMR m
358. hown below The setup pages below show the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 23 CPUs for M7 400 Exiting the BIOS Setup To exit the BIOS setup activate the EXIT button shown in Figure 11 9 or press _esc_ The Setup Exit dialog box then appears see Figure 11 10 setup Exit _ Do you wish to save the changes to CMOS SAVE EXIT RETURN Press F1 key for help Figure 11 10 Setup Exit Dialog Box Here you have the following choices e SAVE saves the parameters to the CMOS and then runs a cold restart e EXIT exits the setup without saving the parameters to the CMOS and then runs a cold restart oower off on with initialization of all blocks e RETURN returns to the setup All changes that were made since Setup was opened are abandoned 11 4 5 Setup Page User Help Opening the Setup Page If you have selected User Help and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 11 J user Help Ra ne eel Use TAB SHFT TAB Keys to toggle through items EE E Ee eee eet OK Press ENTER to save changes and close page _ a CANCEL Select and press ENTER or press ESC to close page without saving ees a Bo SS B
359. i ved tai liit mit n rakenneryhmi l k erota mit n s hk johtoja pistoliittimi T t varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida kun on tiedossa ett mink nlaista r j hdysvaarannettua ilmakeh ei ole olemassa Hyv ksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista Lista hyv ksiytyist rakennesarjoista l ytyy internetist osoitteesta http www4 ad siemens de view cs kayttajatunnuksella 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 35 General Technical Specifications 1 6 9 Anvandning av S7 400 i explosionsriskomrade zon 2 Zon 2 Explosionsriskomraden delas in i zoner Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att en atmosf r med explosionsfara f religger Explosionsfara Explosiv gasatmosfar uppst r Omr den kring flansforbindelser med endast sallan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rorledningar i slutna utrymmen Sakert Nej Utanf r zon 2 omr de Standardanv ndning av decentral periferi Nedan f ljer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av SIMATIC S7 400 i ett explosionsriskomrade Ytterligare information Ytterligare information om de olika S7 400 komponentgrupperna finner du handboken Tillverkningsort Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche RheinbriickenstraRe 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Godkannande x 3G EExnAlIT3 T6 enligt EN 50021 1999 Kontrollnummer KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Anvisning Komponentgrupper med godkannande 1
360. iagnostics Wire break Yes no No Reference channel Yes no No Static Channel error Underflow Yes no i Overflow Yes no Measurement e Measuring method Disabled U Voltage 4DMU Current four wire transmitter Static Channel TC L Thermocouple linear Measuring range Refer to Section 5 24 2 for the Type J measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set Reference 273 15 to 327 67 C 100 C temperature 327 68 to 327 67 F 100 C Dynamie Module Temperature unit4 Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius Interference 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 10 Hz 60 Hz Static Module suppression S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 135 Analog Modules Table 5 74 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit continued Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type e Smoothing None None Low Average High Reference junction None Internal Static Module reference to the cold Internal junction Reference temperature value dynamic 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings 3 The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor 4 Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature Smoothing of the Measure
361. igheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking gt 80 C kan zijn moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP veiligheidsgraad hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7 2 volgens EN 50021 Alle apparaten schakelaars enz inbegrepen die worden aangesloten op de in en uitgangen van S7 400 systemen moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen zodat de nominale spanning door transi nten met niet meer dan 40 kan worden overschreden Omgevingstemperatuurbereik 0 C tot 60 C Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing Waarschuwing De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend bijv voor een visuele diagnose Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar trek of steek geen modulen en ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen steekverbindingen Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven indien bekend is dat er geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst Lijst van de toegelaten modulen De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet http www4 ad siemens de view cs onder de bijdrage ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 31 General Technical Specifications 1 6 7 Brug af
362. ignment Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit Voltage output Current output CHO Word0 ON OORWN O h s NO oO aN Sz O CH2 Word 4 l N oe co N O NO CH3 Word 6 N N N oo NO i N Oo1 NO oO NO N N 00 N amp O oO oo NO Word 10 CH5 Word 10 ao oo if oo ol ow oO oO NJ oo 00 Word 12 CH6 Word 12 oo co D O fay i NO i Word 14 CH7 Word 14 D gt gt D Ol D O A A CO N Figure 5 48 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 142 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit Programming package Analog Value Generation Associated programming As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Resolution including sign 13 bits package C
363. ime all channels Per software f i Hz 1 Interference Suppression Error Limits for n l Outputs Common mode C ross talk attenuation interference Vpp lt 1 V gt 60 dB between the outputs SOIA MONE Operating error limits over interference the entire temperature Peak value of range related to the output interference lt nominal range value of the input range Cross talk e E Voltage output between the inputs e Current output Operating error limits Basic error limit operating in the entire temperature error limits at 25 C related range related to the input to output range range e Voltage output e Voltage input e Current output e Current input Output ripple related to full Basic error limits operating scale of the output range error limits at 25 C related bandwidth 50 kHz 0 1 to input range Data for Selecting an Actuator e Voltage input 0 7 Output ranges nominal 10V e Current input 0 7 values 20 mA Linearity error related to 0 05 Load impedance input range e At voltage output min 2 kW Repetition accuracy in e At current output max 500 W settled state at 25 C related to the input range 0 2 Data for Selecting a Sensor Voltage output Input ranges nominal 10 V100 kQ Short circult protection Yes ranges input resistance 20 mA 50 Q e Short circuit current max 40 mA Permissible input voltage Current output for voltage input e Idle voltage max 13 1 V
364. inal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al8 x 14 Bit Step Response of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF20 O0ABO Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 88 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 0 8 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al16x 16 Bit Step Response of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7QHO0 0ABO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 5 7 1 1 2 7 3 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 Contents Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Step Response of the SM 431 AIl 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 80 Terminal Assignment Diagram SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Step Response at 10 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 2 ee Step Response at 50 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 0 0 eee Step Response at 60 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 0 ee Step Response at 400 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al
365. ing Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Circuit Variants of the Channels Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 and 14 15 as shown in the following table Table 5 62 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit Meas Type Disabled Voltage Voltage Voltage Current Current Channel n 1 1V 1to5V 10V 4 DMU 2 DMU Meas Type Channel n forage stv ff a a i four wire transmitter Current two wire transmitter Example If you select current two wire transmitter for channel 6 you can only disable the measuring method or set current two wire transmitter for channel 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 105 Analog Modules Unused Channels Unused channels can usually be left open Put the measuring range modules in position B You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by connecting M and chassis ground Disable the Me
366. ing of a CPU caused by communication operations for example via PROFIBUS DP To prevent communication operations overloading cyclic program scanning you can set the maximum permissible load that communication can place on the scan cycle by parameter assignment in STEP 7 Communication processor Programmable module for communication tasks such as networking point to point connection S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 2 A5E00069467 07 Glossary Comparison point Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules Using this parameter you can determine the reference junction the point where the temperature is known when thermocouples are used The following can be reference junctions resistance thermometer on channel 0 of the module compensating box reference temperature Compensating box Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocouples on analog input modules The compensating box is a compensation circuit for compensating temperature fluctuations at the reference junction Configure Select and put together different components on a programmable controller and install the requisite software for example operating system on M7 automation computer and adapt to the specific use for example by assigning parameters to the modules CP gt Communication processor CPU The CPU central processing unit is a CPU module of the gt programmable contr
367. ing on Remove all modules and plug in individually o v o bonores D LED is dark L LED lights up S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 18 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules 3 6 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 ODA00 0AA0 Function The PS 407 4 A power supply module is designed for connecting to an AC line voltage of 120 230 VAC and supplies 5 VDC 4 A and 24 VDC 0 5 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A 3 407 0DA00 0AAO o INTF o BAF o BATTF o 5VDC 24VDC e Fixing screw LEDs INTF BAF BATTF 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover Battery compartment Switches BATT INDIC BATT OFF Voltage selector switch 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 2 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 19 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 407 4A Programming Package Output Variables Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 0 Output voltages package e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Dimensions WxHxD mm 25x290x217 Output currents e Rated va
368. ing resistance With two conductor terminal With three conductor terminal With four conductor terminal Load of the two wire transmitter Characteristic linearization e For thermocouples e For resistance thermometer Temperature compensation e Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for definable reference junction temperature Unit for temperature measurement S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Pt 100 1 MQ Pt 200 1 MQ Pt 500 1 MQ Pt 1000 1 MQ Ni 100 1 MQ Ni 1000 1 MQ Max 18 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms cycle factor 1 20 40 mA Possible Possible Possible Possible cable resistance is also measured Possible Possible Max 750 Q Parameters can be assigned Types B R S T E J K U L N Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Yes programmable No Possible Possible Possible Degrees Celsius 5 113 Analog Modules 5 22 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7 Measuring Range Module A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel to each type of sensor If necessary the measuring range modules must
369. ing table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT INDIC switch is in the 2BATT position It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults Table 3 11 BAF BATT1F BATT2F BATT INDIC LEDs on 2BATT Cause of Fault Remedy a ar BATT1IF BATT2F Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in compartments 1 missing and 2 No backup voltage available Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Both batteries empty or missing Insert new batteries in compartments 1 and 2 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton No backup voltage available Fault after plugging in a module short circuit or overload Plugged in module defective Fault after switching on Remove all modules and plug in individually Insert new battery in compartment 1 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 2 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton No backup voltage available Fault after plugging in a module short circuit or overload Plugged in module defective Fault after switching on Remove all modules and plug in individually Insert new battery in compartment 2 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Both batteries in order e Fault after plugging in a module No backup voltage available Plugged in module defective short circuit e Fault after switch
370. ion Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels Behavior of the Analog Modules 5 Conversion Cycle Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Analog Module Parameter Assignment 5 39 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs 5 4 9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 5 4 5 10 Connecting Current Sensors 5 5 11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 5 4 9 9 5 6 5 7 9 8 5 5 16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 6 5 17 Analog Module Interrupts 6 5 18 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 5 70 6ES7431 1KFO0 0ABO Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit a 6ES7431 1KF10 0AB0 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 3 6ES7431 1KF20 0AB0 5 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 6ES7431 0HH00 0ABO Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 5 107 6ES7431 7QH00 0AB0 7 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit 5 122 6ES7431 7KF10 0ABO Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit 5 130 6ES7431 7KFO0 0ABO 5 Analog Output Module SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit 5 141 6ES7432 1HF00 0AB0 5 19 5 20 21 9 22 9 23 5 24 25 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 1 Module Overview Introduction The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog modules This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task Table
371. ion The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital modules This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task Table 4 1 Digital Input Modules Characteristics at a Glance SM 421 SM 421 SM 421 SM 421 SM 421 SM 421 SM 421 DI 32 x 24 DI 16x24 DI16x120 DI16x24 DI16x 120 DI16x120 DI32x120 VDC VDC VAC 60 VUC 230 VUC 230 VUC VUC 1BLO0x 7BH00 5EH00 7DH00 1FH00 1FH20 1EL00 Module Characteristics Number of 32 DI 16 DI 16 DI 16 DI 16 DI 16 DI 32 DI inputs isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in groups of groups of 8 groups of1 groupsof1 groups of 4 groups of 4 groups of 8 32 Rated input 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VUC to 120 VAC 120 230 120 VAC voltage 60 VUC 230 VDC VUC VDC Suitable for Switches Two wire proximity switches BEROs Programmable No Yes No Yes No No No diagnostics Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No No Interrupt Hardware No Yes No Yes No No No interrupt upon edge change Adjustable input No delays Substitute value output Special Features Quick and Channel Interrupt For high For high packaging with specific capability variable variable packaging density interrupt isolation with low voltages voltages density ili variable capability ea Input characterist ic curve to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Control
372. ion RTD 3L Thermal resistor linear three conductor connection TC L Thermocouple linear For the settable measuring ranges of 10 V the input channels please refer to the individual module description 0 C es 0 273 15 to 327 67 C Dynamic Module Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit Kelvins Platinum Pt 0 00385 Q Q C 0 003916 02 02 C 0 003902 02 0 C 0 003920 02 0Q C Nickel Ni 0 00618 02 Q C 0 00672 02 Q C 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 10 Hz none Degrees Celsius 0 00385 Static Module Channel None Low Average High None Internal RTD on channel 0 Reference temperature value dynamic If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 41 Analog Modules 5 7 2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below depending on the functionality Refer to the section on the module concerned starting from Section 5 25 to find out which subset the module is capable of using The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7 Table 5 43 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Va
373. ion of the Output Error of a Module 5 34 An analog output module SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output The output range 10 V is used The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 C The operational limit thus applies The technical specifications of the module state e Operational limit for voltage output x 0 5 An output error therefore of 0 05 V 0 5 of 10 V over the whole rated range of the module must be expected This means that with an actual voltage of say 1 V a value in the range from 0 95 V to 1 05 V is output by the module The relative error is 5 in this case The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated range of 10 V 0 05 V 0 05 V A 5 4 0 625 Operational limit Figure 5 3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 6 Conversion Cycle Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Conversion Time of Analog Input Channels The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for e Resistance test e Wire break monitoring The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input channel integrating method instantaneous value conversion In the case of
374. ion severity 2S VDE 0160 curve B2 Pollution severity 2 Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 150 lt Ue lt 300 V 2300 VDC primary lt gt PE Buffering of power failures gt 20ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 ata repeat rate of 1 s Power input 104 W Power loss 29 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup batteries optional 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 37 Power Supply Modules 3 15 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 0RA00 0AA0 Function The PS 405 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to a DC line voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 20 A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A NO Fixing screws 405 0RA00 0AAO o INTF san LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F ge 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch Under cover e Battery compartment on Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screws Figure 3 11 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A S7 400 M7 400 Programm
375. ions 1 2 A5E00069467 07 IM 463 2 7 2 Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units Introduction When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7 400 via the IM 463 2 there are rules to observe with regard to cable length maximum expansion use of a terminating connector and permissible potential differences Cable Length The maximum cable length per IM 463 2 from the CR of the S7 400 to the last S5 expansion unit is 600 m You set the actual cable length at the IM 463 2 see Section 7 3 Maximum Expansion You can use up to four IM 463 2s in one S7 400 CR At each IM 463 2 interface C1 and C2 you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a distributed configuration You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration Addressing of the S5 modules All S5 address areas are available P Q IM3 IM4 Note Note that every S5 address can only be used once even across different chains Terminating Connector You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each chain with the 6ES5760 1AA11 terminating connector Permissible Potential Differences For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration you must ensure that the potential difference between two devices is not more than 7 V Use an equipotential bonding conductor S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 3 IM 463 2 7 3 Operator Controls and Indicators Introduction All
376. ions A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Table 13 20 Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register IF 962 LPT Addressing Type Addressing only possible in the reserved I O address area pe fe fromCO000y default rm o 8 o Note The AT compatible I O address can only be set once for each LPT port of a programmable module The LPT port in the M7 400 expansion module MSM 478 is always at the I O address 03BCy For this reason the I O address O3BCy must not be set for the IP 962 LPT interface submodule if an MSM 478 is in use Parallel Port The parallel port of the interface submodule s UART 16C552 can be addressed from offset address 10y in accordance with component specification 160552 Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies an interrupt request IRQa You can define the assignment of the IRQa interrupt request to the relevant processor interrupt request in the BIOS setup Submodule ID The IF 962 LPT interface submodule has the submodule ID 444 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 21 Interface Submodules 13 5 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications 13 22 The IF 962 LPT interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power
377. ions B 8 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A 7654321 Byte 4 LLL apne type B 16 72 digital output 7 0 Byte 5 Fe cae ie ee Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long i 0 Byte 6 Peal cee er Number of channels of the same type in one module 16 channels 7654321 0 Byter IIIT Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 7654321 0 Bytes 11111 Channel error channel 8 Channel error channel 9 Channel error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 Figure B 9 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module 765 432 1 Configuring parameter assignment error Short circuit to M External auxiliary supply missing Figure B 10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 9 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 765 432 1 srez TOLO al alo on status 0 RUN 1 STOP Module internal supply voltage failure 7654321 nes ToL ololol Tol
378. iption Type of Sensor Module TC L Thermocouple You will find the digitized analog linear values in Section 5 3 1 in the temperature temperature range measurement RTD 4L thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic linear four conductor Pt 200 climatic connection Pt 500 climatic teal aoe Pt 1000 climatic Ni 100 climatic Ni 1000 climatic RTD 3L thermal resistor Pt 100 standard linear three conductor Pt 200 standard connection Pt 500 standard Ha be Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard Default Settings The module has the following default settings in STEP 7 e Channels 0 to 7 Voltage for the measuring method 10 V for the measuring range You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 88 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Wire Break Check for Temperature or Resistance Measurement The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements TC RTD or resistance measurements Always parameterize the wire break check in these cases as this ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts the data for overrun 7FFFH Special Characteristics of the Wire Break Check for the Voltage Measurement Methods In some transmitters incorrect measured values may be obtained due to the fact that the wire break che
379. ire the fiber optic duplex cable cores and insert them into the plug in adapter that the permissible bending radius of 30 mm is not violated See also the installation guidelines on fiber optic cables in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 11 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 4 Technical Specifications 8 4 1 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 6ES7467 5GJ02 0AB0 PROFIBUS DP Conditions of Use Dimensions 25 x 290 x 210 W x H x D mm Weight PROFIBUS DP Standard Transmission rate Transmission technology Current consumption Current consumption from the S7 400 bus 24 VDC The IM does not consume any current at 24 V and it only makes this voltage available at the MPI DP interface 8 12 700g PROFIBUS DP EN 50 170 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps parameterizable in steps RS 485 via 9 pin subminiature D female connector Total current consumption of the components connected to the DP interfaces with a maximum of 150 mA Can be used in SIMATIC S7 400 max 4 IM 467 in the central controller IM 467 cannot be used together with the CP 443 5 Supply voltage Current consumption e From 5 VDC Addressing range DP master e DPV 1 e Enable disable Number of connectable I O devices slaves Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming device and operation and monitoring Dat
380. irect Connector AT Connector Fin Sianatname n Sorene mw o o en ween aN S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 17 M7 400 Expansions 12 18 Table 12 5 Pin Assignments of the 98 Pin Standard Direct Connector AT Connector continued O mm Sanat Name Pin Signa Name AT Expansion w f m o m a emn a o o sare sta eas o o o o oe E S E E a D16 C16 SD13 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 3 2 Technical Specifications of the ATM 478 AT Adapter Module Technical Specifications of the ATM 478 The table below contains the technical specifications of the ATM 478 AT adapter module ATM 478 Supply of the AT Module 6ES7 478 2CA00 0ACO Supply voltage max current Performance Features 5 V 4 75 V to 5 25 V 4A Number of connectable 5 V 4 4 V to 5 3 V 70 mA AT modules short 412V 11 7Vto12 3V 500 mA 12 V 10 9 V to 13 5 V 100 mA The supply voltages 5 V 12 V and 12 V are monitored In the event of a fault the INTF LED Supply voltage on the CPU or application module lights up Connection of expansion modules es Technical Specifications Current consumption without AT module 0 12 A Current consumption of See calculation of the AT module current consumption Power losses without AT module 0 6 W Permissible power losses with AT module
381. itable for tempera ture mea surement Tempera ture sensor types can be parame terized Lineariza tion of the sensor character istic Curves Smoothing of the mea sured val ues Table 5 2 Analog Output Modules Characteristics at a Glance SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit SM 431 Al 8x RTD 16 Bit 7KF10 Between channel and central ground point 120 VAC Resistance thermome ter can be parameter ized Lineariza tion of the sensor character istic curves Smoothing of the mea sured val ues SM 431 Al 8x 16 Bit 7KF00 Between the chan nels or be tween the channel and central ground point 120 VAC Internal measuring resistor Field con nection with inter nal refer ence tem perature included with the module Smoothing of the mea sured val ues 1HF00 8 outputs 13 bits Channel by channel e Voltage e Current Analog section isolated from e CPU e The load voltage Module Characteristics Number of outputs Resolution Output type Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Substitute value output Potential relationships S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 4 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 2 Analog Output Modules Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 432 AO8 x 13 Bit Characteristics 1HF00 Max permissible common mode voltage Between the channels and the channels against Mana 3 VDC
382. ith FM 456 4 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules with CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 Pin Assignments of the 98 Pin Standard Direct Connector ATCOANCCION cxedecocctucaetency accel eteeeelce ceheseeeeeedee ana Calculation Example for Total Power Losses of an ATM 478 WIAT MOQUIC cos eee een eae oe peace ane center EEE ene A a 12 20 MSM 478 Parallel Port Socket X1 25 Pin Sub D Socket 12 24 Format of the Interrupt Entry in the BIOS Setup of the Interface Submodule 0 0 eee ees 13 3 Overview of the Submodule IDs for the Interface Submodules 13 4 Insertion Rules for Interface Submodules that Cannot be Used in All Receptacles 00 0 13 4 Socket X1 VGA Screen Connection IF 962 VGA 15 Pin High Density Sub D Socket Connector 2 00005 13 6 X2 Socket Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961 VGA 6 Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector 0 00 0 ccc ee eee Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule Video Modes of the IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 xxvii Contents XXVIII 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 17 13 18 13 19 13 20 13 21 13 22 13 23 13 24 13 25 13 26 13 27 13 28 13 29 13 30 13 31 13 32 13 33 13 34 13 35 13 36 13 37 13 38 13 39 13 40 13 41 13 42 13 43 13 44 13 45 A 1 A 2 A 4 B
383. itute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7 76543210 Byte6 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 Only in 6ES7 421 7BH00 0ABO Figure A 2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 6 A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules The comparison shows e Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and e Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 refer to the STEP 7 manuals Table A 3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Data or Parameters Can Be Assigned with Destination CPU for Destination CPU for Interrupts Pa toreru Diagnostic interrupt enable Reaction to CPU STOP Ena
384. l Equipment e Factory Mutual Research Approval Standard Class Number 3611 You can find details on the certificates and approvals in the reference manual Module Specifications CE Labeling The SIMATIC S7 400 product range complies with the requirements and protection objectives of the following EU directives e EC low voltage directive 73 23 EEC e EC electromagnetic compatibility directive 89 336 EEC C Tick Mark The SIMATIC S7 400 product range complies with the requirements of the AS NZS 2064 standard Australia and New Zealand Standards The SIMATIC S7 400 product range complies with the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131 2 Place of this Documentation in the Information Environment This manual forms part of the S7 400 and M7 400 documentation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications IV A5E00069467 07 Preface System Documentation Package S7 400 M7 400 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Automation System S7 400 CPU Data S7 400 Instruction List Finding Your Way To help you find special information quickly the manual contains the following access aids e Atthe start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual e An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on each
385. l Information on Smoothing Refer to the specific section on the analog input module from Section 5 18 to determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any special features that have to be taken into account Conversion Time of the Analog Output Channels The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital to analog conversion Scan Time of Analog Output Channels The analog output channels are converted sequentially in other words the analog output channels are converted one after the other The scan time in other words the time elapsing until an analog output value is again converted is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels refer to 5 4 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 37 Analog Modules Basic Execution Time of the Analog Output Channels Tip The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in STEP 7 Overview of the Settling Time and Response Time of the Analog Output Modules t3 ta response time tz cycle time corresponds to n x conversion time n activated channels te settling time ty new output value is present to output value transferred and converted t3 specified ou
386. l find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 5 7 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below Table 4 13 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No e Destination CPU for 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt No Channel N Static Channel O group Diagnostics e Wire break e No load voltage L sensor supply Trigger for hardware interrupt e Rising edge e Falling edge Input delay Reaction to Error Enable substitute value 1 Yes no Yes no 3 ms DC 0 1 ms DC 0 5 ms DC AC Substitute a Value SV Keep Last Value KLV iad _ Static Channel group a ee ea 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings Assignment of the Encoder Supplies to Channel Groups The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups inputs O to 7 and inputs 8 to 15 In these two channel groups you parameterize the diagnostics for the encoder supply too 4 36 S7 400 M7
387. lane bus Between the channels Yes In groups of 4 Permitted potential difference inputs e Between the inputs of the 500 VAC different groups Insulation resistance 4000 VAC Current consumption From the backplane bus Max 0 1 A Power dissipation of the Typ 3 5 W module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 52 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 14 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC 6ES7421 1FH20 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC is characterized by the following features 16 inputs isolated in groups of 4 Rated input voltage 120 230 VUC Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131 type 2 Suitable for switches and two wire proximity switches BEROs The status LEDs indicate the process status S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 53 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC Process OONDOIRWND gt Data register and bus control Figure 4 12 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 54 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a
388. lays after parameter assignment The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7 Table 4 6 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameter Value Range Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No j peemation Cee toh 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Diagnostics e Wire break Yes no No e No load voltage Yes no No Static shanna L sensor supply Trigger for hardware interrupt e Rising positive edge Yes no Me Dynamic Channel e Falling negative edge Yes no j Input delay 0 1 ms DC 3 DC Static Channel 0 5 ms DC 3 ms DC 20 ms DC AC Reaction to error Substitutea value SV Dynamic Module Keep last value KLV 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is It possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and without HWCONFIG support S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 7 Digital Modules 4 3 2 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules The parameterized digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below depending on the functionality Refer to the section on the relevant digital module starting from Section 4 16 to find out which subset it is capable of using Th
389. le This functionality is achieved using the relevant driver software What Can the IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule Do The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule is a high speed counter module There is a counter on the submodule that can operate in the following counting ranges e Oto 4 294 967 295 or e 2147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 The maximum input frequency of the counter signals is 500 kHz 5 V or 200 kHz 24V You can use the IF 961 CT1 interface submodule for the following counting tasks e Endless count e Single up down count e Periodic up down count You can start and stop the count either via the user program or via external signals Comparison Values You can store two comparison values on the submodule assigned to the two outputs of the submodule If the counter status reaches one of the comparison values the relevant output can be set to initiate control sequences directly in the process Initial Value You can specify an initial value load value for the IF 961 CT1 The counter is then set to the initial value when a signal is present at the 24 V digital input on the submodule Gate Functions The count can be started and stopped in dependence on other events via gate functions The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule has two gate functions e A software gate controlled via the program e A hardware gate controlled via the digital inputs of the interface submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Modu
390. le IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 6 10 IM 460 3 6 14 IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 6 14 IM 460 4 6 18 IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 6 18 IM 461 3 6 14 signal switching 13 3 Interface modules IM 460 0 6 7 IM 460 1 IM 461 0 IM 461 1 IM 461 4 6 18 Interface selector switch 7 5 Interface submodules addressing 13 2 in the AT compatible I O address area in the M7 400 specific I O address area base address 12 10 12 11 113 4 12 13 13 3 insertion rules interrupt assignment numbering of the submodule receptacles shared interrupt 13 3 signal switching submodule ID 13 4 Interference pulse shaped 1 10 sinusoidal 1 10 Interference frequency suppression Glossary 8 analog input module 5 41 Internal fault INTF 3 14 Internal malfunction analog input module 5 65 digital module Internal voltage failure digital module Interrupt Glossary 8 Interrupt assigment M7 300 CPUs 11 40 Interrupt response time Glossary 9 Interrupt source M7 400 11 27 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Index 7 Index Interrupt triggering channels of the digital module 4 14 Interrupts enabling 4 13 5 67 of analog modules 5 67 of the digital modules 4 13 INTF LED analog module 5 63 digital module 4 9 IP 20 1 18 Isolated Glossary 9 Isolated measuring sensor 5 44 Isolated measuring sensors connecting 5 44
391. le 1111 Digital module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 3 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules B 3 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2 The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital input modules are described below The following general rule applies When an error occurs the bit concerned is set to 1 You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called Diagnostics of the Modules Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 7654321 Byte 2 roro Lal Lalo a status 0 RUN 1 STOP Module internal supply voltage failure 7654321 Byte 3 a EPROM error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B 2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 4 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421 DI16 x 24 VDC 7654321 Byte 4 KE E rane type B 16 70 digital input 7 0 Byte 5 eee he Number of eno bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long if 0 Byte 6 ee I te Number of channels of the same type in one module 16 channels 76543210 Byter 11111111 Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 76548321 0 Bytes 111 TTI Channel error channel
392. le 12 4 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules with CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 Interface Submodule Base Address in Submodule Receptacle Cn40y CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 Number 0 Slot n Co40y CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 Nummer 3 Sloto n 1 Cp80 1st EXM 478 inslotp n 2 2nd EXM 478 in slotq n 3 3rd EXM 478 in slotr n 4 n r Number of the module slot in the mounting rack in hexadecimal notation S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 12 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 2 2 Interrupt Assignments Signal Switching EXM 478 Introduction Up to three interrupts per interface submodule are permitted in an EXM 478 expansion module The various possible methods of interrupt assignment or interrupt operation are described below Interrupt Assignment When configuring the interface submodules in the BIOS setup you can assign ISA interrupts to the three interrupts of an interface submodule IRQa IRQb IRQc For this purpose enter the ISA interrupt provided in the relevant screen form If you enter the value FO instead of the ISA interrupt this interrupt is processed via a shared interrupt See below for details Shared Interrupt Since the number of interrupts is limited due to AT compatibility it is possible to assign several individual interrupts of the interface submodules to a shared interrupt in the EXM 478 expansion modules The shared interrupt is shared by all interface submodule interrupts
393. le 5 59 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO Measuring Type Parameter Permissible Condition for Channel n Resistor 0 2 40r6 You must disable the Measuring Type parameter for four conductor terminal channels n 1 1 3 5 7 The reason The connections of channel n 1 are used to supply the resistance that is connected to channel n S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 97 Analog Modules Unused Channels Unused channels can usually be left open Put the measuring range modules in position B You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by connecting M and Mana Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 60 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0AB0 Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description Type of Sensor Module U Voltage ae eee A You will find the digitized analog T in Section 5 3 1 in the 1to5 a voltage measuring range 10V 2DMU Current 4 to 20 mA To supply these transmitters with two wire transmitter current you must connect 24 V to the L and M front connector terminals You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 4DMU Current 4 t
394. le Controllers Module Specifications 6 8 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Operator Controls and Indicators of the Receive IM INTF LED red Lights up if a rack number gt 21 or O was set Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage red EXTF LED red Lights up in the event of an external fault line fault for example if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack Socket for external On the IM 461 0 order number 6ES7461 OAA00 O0AAO you can backup voltage connect external backup voltage 5 V to 15 V or central backup see EXT BATT Installation Manual Chapter 9 to this socket when you want to replace the mounting rack power supply This will ensure backup of the corresponding EU without interruption If you use this IM in a cabinet you should for reasons of space use an angled connector for the incoming supply Front connector X1 Upper connector input for the connecting cable from the previous interface module Front connector X2 Lower connector output for the connecting cable to the next interface module or for the terminator Technical Specifications of the IM 460 0 and IM 461 0 Maximum line length total 3m 5 m in the IM 461 0 with the order number 6ES7461 0AA01 0AA0 in the IM 461 0 with the order number 6ES7461 OAA00 0AA0 as of version A4 in the IM 460 0 with the ord
395. le Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 129 Analog Modules 5 24 Analog Input Module SM 431 AIl 8 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7KF00 0AB0 Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit has the following features 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage current temperature measurement Unlimited measuring range selection Linearization of the thermocouple characteristic curves 16 bit resolution Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC Internal measured resistance Field connection 6ES7431 7KO00 6AA0 with internal reference temperature included with the product Calibration Software The analog input module SM 431 Al x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7KFOO OABO is delivered with the software S7 400 Thermocouple User Calibration on two diskettes After installing the software you can define user specific calibration values for each channel and and each module input range You will find further information under ID 12436891 at the Customer Support FAQ site 9 130 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Block Diagram of the SM 431 AIl 8 x 16 Bit A D converter Internal supply V4 CH Backplane bus
396. le Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 73 Analog Modules Connection of the signal sensors Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions e For measuring voltage Substitute value can be applied No For measuring current Data for Selecting a Sensor z Input range rated values input resistance None As two wire transmitter As four wire 1 V 200 kQ transmitter 10 V 200 kQ 1 V to 5 V 200 kQ 20 mA 80 Q 4 mA to 20 mA 80 Q 0 to 600 Q of use up to 500 Q 40 mA continuous e Voltage For measuring resistance With two conductor terminal With three conductor terminal With four conductor terminal Characteristic linearization e Current e Resistors Maximum input current for current input destruction limit Possible Possible with external transmitter supply Possible Possible cable resistance is also measured Possible No 5 18 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7 Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 48 Parameters of the SM 431 Al8 x 13 Bit Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Measurement e Measuring Disabled U method U Voltage 4DMU Curr
397. le Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Wire Break Check The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements TC RTD or resistance measurements Always parameterize the wire break check in these cases as this ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts the data for overrun 7FFFH Special Characteristics of the Wire Break Check for the Voltage Measurement Methods In some transmitters incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire break check is enabled If so disable the wire break check The reason Some transmitters try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint value they provide Points to Note About the Wire Break Check when Current Sensors Are Connected A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431 Al16 x 16 Bit except in life zero areas You can therefore only parameterize the wire break check for the Current four wire transmitter measuring method and the 4 to 20 mA measuring range Checking for Reference Channel Errors when Connecting Thermocouples If you have connected a thermocouple you can then enable the Reference channel error diagnosis if you have parameterized an RTD on Channel 0 or Reference Temperature Value reference junction Points to Note About Checking for Underflow with some Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges There is n
398. le Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 57 Interface Submodules Interrupts The IF 961 CT1 can initiate an interrupt when comparison values are reached or in the event of overflow underflow or zero pass of the counter Diagnostic Interrupt The IF 961 CT1 can initiate a diagnostic interrupt for the following events e Missing or incorrect counter module parameters e Hardware interrupt lost e Signal A B or N faulty Which Signals Can the IF 961 CT1 Count The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule can count signals generated by incremental encoders with 5 V differential signals or with 24 V signals The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule can also count 24 V signals generated for example by a light barrier Additional Information You will find more information about the interface submodule IF 961 CT1 in 108 IF 961 CT1 Counter Function Module Programming and Parameter Assignment Manual S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 58 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 8 2 Addressing and Interrupts Addressing The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule is addressed with the M7 300 400 reserved I O address area starting from C000p Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable mod
399. led Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Table 4 8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules Diagnosis Be Assigned Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel channel Yes group No load voltage L EXTF Channel channel Yes group Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures for Digital Modules Table 4 9 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostic Message Possible Error Cause Module malfunction An error detected by the module has occurred Internal malfunction The module has detected an error within the programmable controller External malfunction The module has detected an error outside the programmable controller There is a channel Indicates that only certain channels error are faulty No external auxiliary Voltage required to operate the Supply missing voltage voltage module is missing load voltage sensor supply No front connector Jumper between connections 1 and Install jumper 2 in the front connector missing Parameters have not The module requires the information Message queued after power on until been assigned to the as to whether it should work with parameter transmission by the CPU has module syst
400. length 250 to 450 m 600 Cable length 450 to 600 m i Warning Danger of data loss Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in RUN mode can result in loss of data Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 7 5 IM 463 2 7 4 Installing and Connecting the IM 463 2 Introduction To install an IM 463 2 in a CR of the S7 400 proceed in the same way as when installing other S7 400 modules see Installation Manual Chapter 5 To connect an IM 463 2 follow the steps outlined below 1 Prepare the connecting cable 2 Plug in the connecting cable 3 Select the interface 4 Select the cable length Preparing the Connecting Cable You can use the 721 connecting cable However you must change the connector housing on the connection side of the IM 463 2 Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463 2 You can prepare a connecting cable for an IM 463 2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 connecting cable see Catalog ST 54 1 To prepare the connecting cable follow the steps outlined below s Remove one connector housing on the 721 connecting cable 2 Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463 2 3 Attach this connector housing to the 721 connecting cable 4 Close the connector housing S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers
401. lers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 3 Digital Modules Table 4 2 Digital Output Modules Characteristics at a Glance Module f f SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 16 x 20 125 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A 16 x 20 120 VDC 1 5 A VAC 5 A 1FHOO VAC 2 A Characte 5EH10 1FF00 5EH00 ristics Number of 16 DO outputs isolated in isolated isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in groups of 8 and reverse groups of groups of 8 groups of 1 groupsof4 groups of 1 polarity 32 protection in groups of Rated load 24 VDC 20 to 125 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 120 20 to voltage VDC 230 VAC 230 VAC 120 VAC No Yes No Yes No No diagnostics Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No Interrupt Special For high For variable High Particularly For high For variable Features currents voltages packaging quick and currents currents density with with with interrupt channel channel capability specific specific Table 4 3 Relay Output Module Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 422 DO 16 x 30 230 VUC Rel 5 A Characteristics 1HH00 Programmable Substitute N Yi Yes value output Number of Outputs 16 outputs isolated in groups of 8 Load Voltage 125 VDC 230 VAC Special Features S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 4 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Introduction The following table contains the tasks that you ha
402. lly applicable information for connecting sensors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 55 Analog Modules Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module either directly or by means of compensating lines Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channels Compensating leads Same material as thermocouple Figure 5 18 Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using the Reference Temperature Value to an Isolated Al Connecting the Compensating Box The compensating box is looped in in the leads of each thermocouple The compensating box must have an isolated supply The power supply must have adequate filtering for example by means of a grounded shielding winding Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channels Each channel requires its own compensating box Note Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C for analog input modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 56 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Recommended Compensating Box We recommend you to use a comparison point with integrated power supply unit from Siemens as a compensating box You will find the necessary ordering data in the table below
403. log input module 5 65 digital module CE mark 1 2 Central controlle Channel error analog input module 5 65 digital module Channel information available analog input module 5 65 digital module Cold restart Glossary 2 Commissioning analog modules sequence of steps 5 6 Commissioning digital modules sequence of steps 4 5 Common mode voltage Glossary 2 1 Wi S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 2 A5E00069467 07 Communication bus 2 5 Communication load Glossary 2 Communication processor Glossary 2 Config index M7 400 Configure Glossary 3 Configuring error analog input module 5 66 preparing 7 6 Connecting cable 721 Connection distributed 7 2 loads actuators rules 6 4 Conversion time analog input channel 13 44 analog input channels 5 35 analog output channel 5 37 13 45 Converting analog values 5 7 CP Glossary 2 CPU Glossary 3 CPU 488 4 M7 400 performance features technical specifications CPU 488 5 M7 400 performance features technical specifications CPUs M7 400 expansion socket 11 14 function elements main memory and interrupt assignment memory card 11 8 mode selector switch multipoint interface MPI performance features status and fault LEDs submodule receptacles for interface submodules 11 11 suitable submodules technical specifications OSA 1 4 Current sensors con
404. lue Range Parameter Type Output e Type of output Disabled U Voltage Current Static Channel e Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the 10 V output channels please refer to the individual module description 1 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 42 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs Introduction You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the measuring method voltage and current sensors and resistors This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow Cables for Analog Signals To reduce electrical interference you should use twisted pair shielded cables for the analog signals The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends lf there are potential differences between the cable ends an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield which leads to an interference of the analog signals In such a case you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only Non lsolated Analog Input Modules In the case of the non isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and chassis ground You
405. lues 5 VDC 4A Weight 0 78 kg 24 VDC 0 5 A Cable cross section 3x1 5 mm litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar use only flexible sheath cable Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVss 24 VDC 200 mVss Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs 24 VDC 500 mVs Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm Idle conditions 5 VDC 100 mA Base Input Rating load required Input voltage P eae a ee no pase ioa Ul e Rated value 120 230 VAC q e Permitted range 85 to 132 VAC Other Parameters 170 to 264 VAC Protection class in accordance l with protective with IEC 60536 grounding conductor System frequency e Rated value 50 60 Hz e Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz Rated input current Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage e At120 VAC Ootes any D bate PE secondary lt e At 230 VAC re 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V 2200 VDC Inrush current primary lt gt PE e With rated voltage of 264 V Peak value 15 A Half value width 2 ms i e With rated voltage of 132V Peak value 18 A At 50 Hz 4 5 ms to 7 5 ms Half value width 2 ms e At60 Hz 6 5 ms to 8 5 ms Leakage current lt 3 5 mA Power input 46 5 W Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Power loss 13 9 W VDE 0160 curve W2 Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup battery option 1 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Overvoltage category lI Pollution severity Buffering of power failures Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Prog
406. mA Rated load voltage L 79 to 132 VAC shes ceay 1s 80 to 132 VDC At 0 to 1 5 to 25 ms l e At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms e Reverse polarity protection Yes l Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 1 Number of inputs that can be 32 l triggered simultaneously Connection of two wire BEROs Possible Isolation e Permitted bias current Max 1 mA Between channels and Yes backplane bus Between the channels Yes In groups of 8 Permitted potential difference Between Minternai and the 120 VAC inputs Between the inputs of the 250 VAC different groups Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Current consumption e From the backplane bus Max 0 2 A Power dissipation of the Typ 6 5 W module Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 58 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 16 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A 6ES7422 1BH10 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A has the following features e 16 outputs isolated in two groups of 8 e 2A output current e 24 VDC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted i Caution To commission the module the rated load voltage must be applied at least once to each group of 8 outputs e g connection of 1L and
407. manently assigned to the processor interrupt Submodule ID The IF 964 DP interface submodule has the submodule ID 8Cy S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 64 A5E00069467 07 13 9 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Interface Submodules The IF 964 DP interface submodule receives its supply voltage in the S7 400 from the central processing unit and in the M7 400 from the programmable modules or from the expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7964 2AA00 0AB0 6ES7964 2AA01 0ABO Performance Features Performance Features 9 6 Kops to 12 Mbps Transmission rate Cable length At9 6 Kbps e At12 Mbps Number of stations Backup memory dual port RAM Physical interface Galvanic isolation 9 6 Kbps to 12 Mbps 1200 m max 100 m max lt 125 256 Kbytes RS485 Yes Transmission rate Cable length e At 9 6 Kbps At12 Mbps Number of stations Backup memory dual port RAM Physical interface Galvanic isolation 1200 m max 100 m max lt 125 256 Kbytes RS485 Yes Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Supply voltage Current consumption in the M7 300 for dimensioning the 24 V power supply The module does not consume an
408. me calibration error User calibration doesn t correspond to the parameter assignment Figure B 27 Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 19 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Spare Parts and Accessories Spare Parts and Accessories Number wheel for slot labeling C79165 Z1523 A22 Spare slot covers qty 10 6ES7490 1AA00 0AA0 For Power Supplies Spare connector for PS 405 DC Spare connector for PS 407 AC Backup batter Fos SSS Key for CPU mode selector switch 2 Mbyte memory submodule 4 Mbyte memory submodule For Digital Modules Analog Modules re Cover foil 10 x for labeling strips of the SMs Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules Measuring range module for analog modules Front connector screw type connection Front connector spring connection Front connector crimp connection Crimping tool for crimp contacts Crimp contacts package of 250 Extraction tool for crimp contacts 6ES5 497 8MA11 Fuses 8 A quick blow e Wickmann 194 1800 0 e Schurter SP001 1013 e Littelfuse 217 008 Labeling sheet for the front connector petrol blue 6ES7492 2AX00 0AA0 Labeling sheet for the front connector beige 6ES7492 2BX00 0AA0 Labeling sheet for the front connector yellow 6ES7492 2CX00 0AA0 Labeling sheet for the front connector red 6ES7492 2DX00 0AA0 S7 400
409. measurement e Resistance test e Temperature measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Circuit Variants for the Channels Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 and 14 15 as shown in the following table Table 5 66 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Voltage Current Current R 4L R 3L RTD 4L RTD 3L TC L 4 DMU 2 DMU pf Meas Type Disabled Channel n 1 Meas Type Channel n Disabled Voltage X Current four wire transmitter Current two wire transmitter Resistance four conductor Resistance three conductor Thermal resistor four conductor Thermal resistor three conductor Thermocouples S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 117 Analog Modules Example If you have select current two wire transmitter for channel 6 you can only disable the measuring method or set current two wire transmitter for channel 7 Circuit for Resistance and Temperature Measurement The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Table 5 67 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurem
410. meter assignment faults Computational faults Timer faults Memory card faults I O faults Use the programming device for precise fault finding read out diagnostic buffer SD green ccess to memory Lights up if read or write access to the memory card is card taking place HD green Hard disk access Lights up if read or write access to the hard disk of the mass storage module is taking place USR1 Special LED for Can be assigned by the user see Programming yellow the user program Manual User USR2 Special LED for yellow the user program User RUN RUN state LED Lights up if the system software is loaded and user green programs are running I O access enabled STOP STOP state LED Lights up when the user program of the yellow programmable module is not controlling the process I O access disabled e Flashes when a memory reset is requested or is being performed S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 7 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 2 Memory Cards Introduction The CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 offer the possibility of operating a memory card in the same way as a diskette In this section you will learn how you can use these options Note If the power fails during a write access to the memory card the entire contents of the memory card can be damaged under unfavorable conditions Please note that in contrast to a diskette a memory card is only desi
411. mmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 47 Digital Modules Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups You can only set the input delay for each group of channels In other words the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15 Note The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 must be equal to the value 0 or 8 otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly parameterized Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after acknowledgement Optimum Signal Propagation Delays You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings e Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0 5 ms e The Diagnostics parameter is disabled e The Diagnostic Interrupt parameter is disabled S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 48 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Circuit as for active high or active low input Channel x of the DI 421 16 x 24 60 VUC Input threshold Figure 4 10 Circuit as for Active High or Active Low Input S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 49 Digital Modules 4 13 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC 6ES7 421 1FHO0 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC is characterized by the following features e 16 inputs isolated e
412. module is designed for connecting to an AC line voltage of 120 230 VAC and supplies 5 VDC 20 A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A PS 407 20A TO 2 Fixing screws 407 0RA00 0AAO fo INTF o BAF 5 earr LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F 5 VDC 24 VDC o 5VDC o 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover BATT 1 BATT 2 Battery compartment Saris Switches BATT INDIC 5 hn 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT Voltage selector switch 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 5 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 20A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 26 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 407 20 A Programming Package Output Rating Associated programming As of STEP7 V 2 0 Output voltages package e Rated values Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Output currents Dimensions WxHxD mm 79X290x217 1 93 kg 3x1 5 mm 2 litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar use only flexible sheath cable Weight Cable cross section Cable diameter 3to 9mm e Rated values Max residual ripple Max switching peaks Idl
413. module the number of module cycles after which in the case of a step response the smoothed analog value is applied at almost 100 depending on the smoothing setting The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 m 0 80 100 Smoothing low average Module cycles high Figure 5 37 Step Response of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit 6ES7431 7QH00 0AB0 Displaying Parameter Assignment Errors The SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors Table 5 65 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Of the module Module malfunction You can find an explanation of Internal malfunction the diagnostic information in a Tables 4 8 and 5 47 on Pages rong parameters 4 10 and 5 65 Affecting certain Module malfunction channels Internal malfunction There is a channel error Wrong parameters Channel information available Vector channel error Channel parameter assignment error S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 116 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 22 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels e Voltage measurement e Current
414. n Steckverbindungen Diese Warnung kann unberucksichtigt bleiben wenn bekannt ist dass keine explosionsgef hrdete Atmosph re herrscht Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet http www4 ad siemens de view cs unter der Beitrags ID 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 21 General Technical Specifications 1 6 2 Use of the S7 400 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area Zone 2 Hazardous areas are divided up into zones The zones are distinguished according to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere Explosion Hazard Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces short time Safe area Outside zone 2 Standard distributed I O applications Below you will find important information on the installation of the SIMATIC S7 400 in a hazardous area Further Information You will find further information on the various S7 400 modules in the manual Production Location Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche RheinbriickenstraRe 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Certification x 3G EEx nA II T3 T6 in accordance with EN 50021 1999 Test number KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Note Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 T6 certification can only be used in SIMATIC S7 400 automation systems belonging to equipment category 3
415. n the Submodule Receptacles Each receptacle for an interface submodule has a submodule receptacle number assigned to it The submodule receptacle number depends on the module slot and on the arrangement of the receptacle on the expansion module or the CPU You can see the submodule receptacle numbers in Figure 11 5 You require these submodule receptacle numbers for configurations that you undertake in the BIOS setup or for determining the I O addresses of an interface module see the Chapter M7 400 Expansions CPU 486 3 EXM 478 CPU 488 3 Figure 11 5 Submodule Receptacle Numbers on the CPU486 3 CPU488 3 and EXM478 Submodule Covers Unused submodule receptacles are protected by submodule covers S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 12 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 5 Memory Submodules Suitable for the Main Memory Introduction You must order the MEM 478 DRAM memory submodules for the main memory of the CPUs separately They are also shipped separately These memory submodules must be inserted before plugging into the mounting rack Main Memory Expansion You can see from Table 11 6 which memory submodules you can use in which CPU Table 11 6 Main Memory Expansion Possibilities MEM478 DRAM Memory CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 Submodules Warning DRAM memory submodules can be damaged If you use memory submodules for the main memory other than the DRAM submodules designed for
416. nators Connecting Cable Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface modules See Appendix C Accessories and Spare Parts Table 6 3 Connecting Cable for Interface Modules Interface Modules Connecting Cable IM 460 0 and IM 461 0 6ES7468 1 P bus and communication bus are IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 transferred IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 6ES7468 3 P bus is transferred mounting rack is supplied with current via the IM IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 6ES7468 1 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 5 Interface Modules Installation and Removal of the Modules During Operation Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and associated connecting cables Caution Data may be lost or corrupted Removing or inserting the interface modules and or their associated connecting cables under voltage can result in the loss or corruption of data Switch off the power supply modules to the CC and EUs you are working on before you carry out any changes Feeding in External Backup Voltage to the EXT BATT Socket Not Possible in Modules as of Order Number 0AA01 When changing the battery in the power supply modules of the S7 400 you can ensure uninterruptible backup in the CC if you apply between 5 VDC and 15 VDC to the EXT BATT socket of the CPU This only provides backup power to the CC
417. ncan Yes channel groups be displayed 0 05 ms 0 1 ms or 0 1 ms 0 1 ms max 60 us Channel error display F None max 80 us Monitoring for e Wire break l lt 1mA Input delay of the max 190 us channel groups Substitute value can be applied Yes gt 0 5 ms Sensor Power Supply Outputs Internal preparation time for Number of outputs 9 diagnostics diagnostic interrupt Output voltage Input delay e with load Min L 2 5 V Aal can be Yes assigne Output current e Rated value 120 mA Permitted range GOSU a a Hela of Additional redundant supply Possible 0 1 ms Rated value 0 1 0 5 3 ms lt 2kHz Short circuit protection Yes electronic Values go into cycle and response times A Input voltage Resistance circuit of the sensor 10 to 18 kQ Rated value 24 VDC for wire break monitoring For signal 1 11 V to 30 V The filter times are added to the overall runtime of the e For signal 0 30 Vto5V selected input delay 2 Substitute functionality diagnostics and diagnostic Input current interrupt are not to be selected At signal 1 6 mA to 12 mA At signal 0 lt 6 mA Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131 type 2 Connection of two wire BEROs Possible e Permitted bias current Max 3 mA S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 35 Digital Modules 4 10 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI16 x 24 VDC Parameter Assignment You wil
418. nction are divided amongst several modules see Figure 5 20 for connection Constant reference junction temperature thermometer ice bath see Figure 5 18 for connection 5 54 When you want to acquire only the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction If you employ internal compensation the internal temperature of the module is used for comparison purposes You have already acquired and compensated the reference junction temperature using a compensating box which you have looped into an individual thermocouple No further processing is necessary owing to the module You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a resistance thermometer pt 100 and have it calculated by the module for any thermocouple Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures the reference junction temperature Read in the climatic temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the other modules using SFC55 If the reference junction temperature is constant and known you can specify this value in parameter assignment in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Mod Internal RTD on Channel 0 RTD on Channel 0 Reference temperature value ule Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Theory of Operation of Internal Compensation With internal compensation you can establish the reference point across the terminals of the analog input modules In this
419. ncy max e With resistive load lamp load e At inductive load Inductive cutoff voltage limited internally to Short circuit protection of the output 0 1A from 5 mA to 0 1 A max 100 mA max 2 4 W No Yes 500 Hz 2 0 Hz at 0 1 A L 39V yes electronically S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7961 2AA00 0ACO0 Characteristics The IF 961 AlO interface submodule has the following characteristics e 4 analog inputs each as voltage and current input e 2 analog outputs each as voltage and current output e 24 VDC external power supply of the analog circuit section e Hardware interrupt capability and diagnostic capability gt AN 2 X 3 Q O lt x S N O rer ee eee C 9 Figure 13 9 IF 961 AIO Interface Submodule Special Feature of the Measuring Range Selection and Output Range Selection You select the measuring type current measuring or voltage measuring of an input channel via the wiring of the analog inputs see Figure 13 10 You select the output type current or voltage output via the wiring of the analog outputs see Figure 13 10 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 33 Interface Submodules 13 7 1 Pin Assignments and Terminal Connection Diagram X1 Socket
420. nd cable Test voltage 10 V with 80 amplitude shields to IEC 61000 4 6 modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 80 MHz S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 10 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Emission of Radio Interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011 Limit value class A Group 1 Table 1 6 Interference emission of electromagnet fields Frequency Range Limit Value From 20 to 230 MHz 30 dB uV m Q From 230 to 1000 MHz 37 dB uV m Q Measured at a distance of 30 m 98 4 ft Emitted interference via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011 Limit value class A group 1 Table 1 7 Interference emission via the mains AC power supply Frequency Range Limit Value From 0 15 to 0 5 MHz 79 dB uV Q 66 dB uV From 0 5 to 5 MHz 73 dB uV Q 60 dB uV M From 5 to 30 MHz 73 dB uV Q 60 dB uV M System Perturbation The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of the following standards for system perturbation Harmonic currents EN 61000 3 2 Voltage fluctuations and flickering EN 61000 3 3 Table 1 8 Power Supply Modules that Comply with System Perturbation Standards Name Sire Number PS 407 4 A Power Supply Module 6ES7407 0DA01 0AA0 PS 407 10 A Power Supply Module 6ES7407 0KA01 0AA0 PS 407R 10 A Redundant Power Supply Module 6ES7422 0KR00 0AA0 PS 407 20 A Power Supply Mo
421. nd start one Check box You can switch on the associated function by activating the check box V and switch it off again by deactivating the check box Option button By activating an option button gt k you can select one of a range of options Activating another option button has the effect of deactivating the previous option button S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 Key Control within the Setup Menu The following keys are used for control within the Setup menu and the associated setup page conforming to the Windows Standard With this key you jump to the first line of a list box edit box check box or option button lf the cursor is at a button OK CANCEL or at a selected line inverse video within a list box you can activate the function with _ENTER J If the cursor is not at a button when you press this executes the same function as an activated OK button Return to the Setup menu with any changes made in the setup page being retained This key executes the same function as a CANCEL button Return to Setup menu with any changes in the setup page being deleted With this key you can move the cursor from one box to the next box or to the next button SHIFT J TAB _JWith this key you can move the cursor from one box to the next box or to the next button only locally not under Remote Setup S7 400 M7 400 Programma
422. necting 5 47 Cycle time analog input module 13 44 Index D Data static Glossary 3 temporary Glossary 3 Data block Glossary 3 Data record for diagnostic data B 2 Data record 1 analog input module configuration digital output module configuration A 8 structure for digital input module A 4 Data records for parameters A 2 Date M7 400 11 32 Declaration Glossary 4 Default setting Glossary 4 Degree of M ete IP 2011 18 Delay time M7 400 11 29 Destination CPU for interrupt Glossary 4 digital output module 4 8 Device security M7 400 11 30 Diagnostic buffer Glossary 4 Diagnostic data Glossary 4 bytes 0 and 1 B 3 data record B 2 of the analog input modules B 14 of the digital input modules B 4 of the digital output modules B 8 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC B 4 of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC B 6 of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A B 10 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit B 14 of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit B 18 of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit B 16 Diagnostic interrrupt enable digital input module 4 7 digital output module 4 8 Diagnostic interrupt of analog modules 5 67 of digital modules 4 13 Diagnostic messages 4 9 5 63 of analog input modules 5 64 of the digital modules 4 10 reading out 4 9 5 63 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications
423. nizing radiation e In hostile environments caused for instance by Dust accumulation Corrosive vapors or gases Strong electric or magnetic fields e In installations requiring special monitoring for example Elevators Electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas An additional measure might be for instance installation of the S7 400 M7 400 in a Cabinet or in a housing Ambient Mechanical Conditions The ambient mechanical conditions for S7 400 M7 400 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations Table 1 10 Mechanical Conditions Frequency Range in Hz Test Values 10 lt f lt 58 0 075 mm amplitude 58 lt f lt 500 1 g constant acceleration S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 14 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Table 1 11 Ambient Mechanical Conditions for the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module in Operation Frequency Range in Hz Test Values 10 lt f lt 58 0 035 mm amplitude 58 lt f lt 500 0 5 g constant acceleration Reducing Vibrations If the S7 400 M7 400 is subject to high levels of shock or vibration you must take suitable measures to reduce the acceleration or amplitude We recommend that you install the S7 400 M7 400 on vibration damping materials for example rubber metal antivibration mountings Tests for Ambient Mechanical Conditions The following table contains important information on the type and
424. nossapito Korjausta varten taytyy kyseinen rakenneryhma lahettaa valmistuspaikkaan Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siella Erityiset vaatimukset li SIMATIC S7 400 t ytyy asentaa kytkentakaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon N iden t ytyy olla v hint n kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia Talloin on huomioitava ymp rist olosuhteet johon laite asennetaan Kotelolle t ytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vy hykett 2 varten EN 50021 mukaan Kun johdolla tai t m n kotelon johdon sis nviennill saavutetaan gt 70 C l mp tila tai kun k ytt olosuhteissa l mp tila voi piuhajaotuksella olla gt 80 C t ytyy johdon l mp tilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja l mp tiloja K ytettyjen johtojen sisaanohjauksien t ytyy olla vaaditun P kotelointiluokan ja kohdan 7 2 EN 50021 mukaan mukaisia Kaikkien laitteiden kytkimet jne mukaan lukien jotka liitet n virheilta suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja l hd ille t ytyy olla hyv ksyttyj tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC r j hdyssuojausta varten Toimenpiteet t ytyy suorittaa ettei nimellisj nnite voi transienttien kautta ylitty enemm n kuin 40 Ymparistolampotila alue O C 60 C Kotelon sis lle avauksen j lkeen n kyv lle paikalle on kiinnitett v kilpi jossa on seuraava varoitus Varoitus Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi esim visuaalista diagnoosia varten l t ll in k yt mit n kytkim
425. nostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules Effective for Be Assigned Mode probem Ne Moe f o Internal malfunction ne Mae mw S a a L Eemal auan spp miesa EF Woas o Front connector missing Ex Module mo C a Ghana nfomatonavalabl NTFERTF moie No Coding key incorrect ormissing INTF Moe mo Thermocouple connection fault EXTF Moe mo STOP operaing mode Wale no EPROMeror INT Module NO Ramer nme woe mo ee 1 Hardware interrupt lost Hardware interrupt lost lost O NTF Module e a e Short circuitto M o circuit to M EXTR Channel Wie eee nam er eterno canneleror exte Channel ves Undertow e eme Yes m e e User connection not wired connection not wired Channel pen aonar recon EE cma No Open conductorin dreston EXTF Chame no Fun tme caibraton eror Exte Chame no Underrange or overrange EXTF No Open conductor in the current Lal aw i source User calibration doesn t Kal aol correspond to the parameter assignment S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 64 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7 Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures for Analog Input Modules Table 5 47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Causes of Errors
426. nput current for current input destruction limit Connection of the sensor e For measuring voltage e For measuring current As four wire transmitter Characteristic linearization e For thermocouples Temperature compensation e Internal temperature compensation Unit for temperature measurement 25mV 50 mV 80 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5V a5 V 10V 25 mA Types B N E R S J L T K U 35 V continuous 75 V for max 1s duty factor 1 20 32 mA Possible Possible Types B N E R S J L T K U Yes programmable Possible Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 24 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7 Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 5 7 An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below Table 5 74 Parameters of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No Pe on Olas 10k 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Trigger for hardware interrupt er ee Dynamic Channel e High limit 32767 to 32768 Low limit 32768 to 32767 D
427. nput image is read and processing of the STEP 7 user program is continued from the point at which it was last terminated STOP power off Other types of startup are the cold restart and reboot warm restart Retentivity Data areas in data blocks and also timers counters and memory markers are retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER DOWN S7 basic communication Communication functions integrated in the CPU of the SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 that can be called by the user The call is executed in the user program by means of gt system functions The user data volume can be up to 76 bytes small data volume S7 basic communication is implemented via MPI S7 communication Communication functions integrated in the CPU of the SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 that can be called by the user The call is executed in the user program by means of system function blocks The user data volume can be up to 64 Kbytes large data volume S7 communication offers a network independent interface between devices of the type SIMATIC S7 M7 C7 and the programming device PC Scan time The scan time is the time required by the gt CPU to scan the user program once SDB gt System data block Segment Bus segment S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 16 A5E00069467 07 Glossary Sequence layer Sequence layers form the interface in M7 between the operating system of the CP
428. ns Pulse Shaped Interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules when there are pulse shaped disturbance variables A requirement for this is that the S7 400 M7 400 system complies with the relevant requirements and guidelines on electric design Table 1 4 Pulse Shaped Interference Pulse Shaped Interference Test Voltage Degree of Severity Electrostatic discharge Discharge to air 8kV To IEC 61000 4 2 Contact discharge 6 kV Bursts fast transient interference in accor 2 kV power supply line dance with IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV signal line gt 30 m 1 kV signal line lt 30 m Energy rich single impulse surge to IEC 61000 4 5 e Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV supply line DC voltage with protective elements 2 kV signal line data line gt 30 m only possibly with protective elements e Symmetrical coupling 1 kV supply line DC voltage with protective elements 1 kV signal line gt 30 m only possibly with protective elements Sinusoidal Interference The following table shows you the EMC behavior of the S7 400 M7 400 modules when there is sinusoidal interference Table 1 5 Sinusoidal Interference Sinusoidal Interference Test Values Degree of Severity RF irradiation electromagnetic fields To IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m with 80 amplitude modulation of 1 KHz over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz To IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m with 50 pulse modulation at 900 MHz RF conductance on cables a
429. ns of the Type of Output parameter in STEP 7 Unused Channels To ensure that output channels of the SM 432 AO 8 x 13 Bit remain de energized you must disable the Type of Output parameter and leave the terminal open Output Ranges You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7 Table 5 78 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432 AO8 x 13 Bit Selected Type of Output Output Range Voltage You will find the digital analog values in Section 5 3 2 in the voltage and Current output ranges Current 0 to 20 mA 4to 20 mA 20 mA Default Settings The default settings of the module are Voltage for the output type and 10 V for the output range You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 432 AO 8 x13 Bit in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 145 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules Chapter Overview ion eis O e Common Features of the Interface Modules 6 20 The Interface Modules IM 460 0 6ES7460 0OAA00 0AB0 6ES7460 0AA01 0ABO and IM 461 0 6ES7461 OAA00 0AA0 6ES7461 0AA01 OAAO The Interface Modules IM 460 1 6ES7460 1BA00 0ABO 6ES7460 1BA01 0ABO and IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 0AA0 6ES7461 1BA01 0AA0 The Interface Modules IM 460 3 6ES7460 3AA00 0AB0 6ES7460 3AA01 0ABO and IM 461 3
430. nsors e Sensor supply Vs O K status display e Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF e Programmable diagnostics e Programmable diagnostic interrupt e Programmable hardware interrupt e Programmable input delays e Parameterizable substitute values in the input range The status LEDs indicate the process status Note The spare parts of this module is compatible with SM 421 DI 16 x DC 24 V 6ES7 421 7BHO0 0ABO To be able to use the new function input delay 50 us you require STEP 7 V 5 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 32 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI16 x 24 VDC Front connector monitoring Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 1L Monitoring of internal voltage gt d pm iL yas JAAD Pim K Short circuit protection ya Monitoring of sensor supply 1Vs TAEK Backplane bus interface lt eo M Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 2L _ Monitoring of internal voltage p 2L yat
431. nstalling a power supply module described in the S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation manual an AC connector is used for connecting the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R to both an AC and a DC supply Polarity Reversal of L and L The polarity reversal of L and L with supply voltages of between 88 VDC and 300 VDC has no effect on the function of the power supply The connection should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual Chapter 6 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 24 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Dimensions WxHxD mm Weight Cable cross section Cable diameter Input Rating Input voltage e Rated value e Permitted range System frequency e Rated value e Permitted range Rated input current At 120 VAC At 110 VDC At 230 VAC At 230 VDC Starting current inrush e At 230 VAC At 300 VDC Leakage current Overvoltage resistance PS 407 10A PS 407 10A R 50x290x217 1 36 kg 3 x 1 5 mm litz wire with wire end ferrule with insulating collar use only flexible sheath cable 3 to 9 mm 110 230 VDC 120 230 VAC 88 to 300 VDC 85 to 264 VAC long range input 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 1 2A 1 2A 0 6 A 0 6 A 0 9 A 1 0 A 0 5 A 0 5 A Peak value 230 A half value width 20
432. nterrupt e High limit 32767 to 32768 Dynamic Channel e Low limit 32768 to 32767 Diagnostics e Wire break Yes no No e Underflow Yes no No Overflow Yes no No Measurement e Measuring type Disabled z RTD 4L Thermal resistor linear four conductor Static Channel terminal RTD 3L Thermal resistor linear three conductor terminal e Measuring range Refer to Section 5 23 2 for the Pt 100 measuring ranges of the input standard channels that you can set e Temperature unit Degrees Celsius degrees Degrees Static Module Fahrenheit Celsius e Temperature For platinium Pt 0 00385 coefficient for 0 00385 2 0 C temperature 0 003916 02 0 C measurement with 0 003902 9 9 C thermal resistor RTD 0 003920 02 0 C Static Channel For nickel Ni 0 00618 2 02 C 0 00672 Q Q C S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 126 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 71 Parameters of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x16 Bit continued Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type e Interference 60 Hz 50 Hz none 60 Hz suppression Smoothing None None now Static Channel Average High 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings 3 The limit values must be within the temperature rang
433. nversion time for measuring resistance in ms Additional conversion time for open circuit monitoring in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance in ms e Resolution including sign Smoothing of the measured values Basic execution time of the module in ms all channels enabled Integrative Does not go into the response time Yes 400 60 50 2 5 16 7 20 6 20 1 23 5 12 40 2 47 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 16 16 16 bit Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages 96 322 376 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Suppression of Interference Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression for f nx f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 0 to 600 Q three conductor measurement 0 to 5000 Q three conductor e Common mode gt 100 dB interference Ucm lt 120 Vss measurement in the range of Series mode interference gt 40dB 6000 Q peak value of interference lt rated value of input range TC type B 11 5K TC type R 7 3K Thermocouples Crosstalk between the inputs gt 70 dB Operational limit in the entire temperature range with reference to the input range e Voltage input 25 mV 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5 V 5V 1Vto5V 10V Current input 0 mA to 20 mA 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 0 35 0 32 0 31 0 3 0 3 0 3
434. ny analog input signal in percent 100 Smoo thing None Low Average High 40 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 20 Response time in ms Figure 5 44 Step Response at 50 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al8 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 137 Analog Modules Step Response at an Interference Frequency Suppression of 60 Hz Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 Smoo thing None Low Average High 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 267 533 Response time in mS Figure 5 45 Step Response at 60 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Step Response at an Interference Frequency Suppression of 400 Hz Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 Smoo thing None Low Average High 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 Response time in ms Figure 5 46 Step Response at 400 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 138 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Displaying Parameter Assignment Errors The SM 431 Al8 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability Below you will find an overview of the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors Table 5 76 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431 Al8 x
435. o eas error Figure B 11 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 10 A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 7654321 Byte 4 SE E rane type B 16 72 digital output 7 0 Byte 5 eee he Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel 8 bits long if 0 Byte 6 ee I te Number of channels of the same type in one module 32 channels 7654321 0 Bye7 Channel error channel 0 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 76542321 0 pyes 1111111 Channel error channel 8 Channel error channel 9 Channel error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 76548321 0 pyteo 111111 Channel error channel 16 Channel error channel 17 Channel error channel 22 Channel error channel 23 76543210 Byte10 111111 Channel error channel 24 B Channel error channel 25 Channel error channel 30 Channel error channel 31 Figure B 12 Bytes 4 to 10 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 B 11 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Data record 1 with bytes 11 to 42 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The figure below shows the assignm
436. o 20 mA You will find the digitized analog four wire transmitter 20 mA values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range R 4L Resistor 600 Q You will find the digitized analog four conductor values in Section 5 3 1 in the terminal resistance measuring range Default Settings The module has the following default settings in STEP 7 e Channels 0 to 7 Voltage for the measuring method 10 V for the measuring range You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bitin STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 98 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 21 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit 6ES7431 OHHO0 0ABO Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 13 x 16 Bit has the following features 16 inputs for voltage current measurement Unlimited measuring range selection 13 bit resolution Non isolated between the analog section and bus The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and the reference potentials of the connected sensors and central ground point is 2 VDC VAC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 99 Analog Modules Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 13 Bit L L MO
437. o avoid ground loops S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 4 2 Technical Specifications of the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module Technical Specifications of the MSM 478 The table below contains the technical specifications of the MSM mass storage module 478 With Mass Storage Module MSM 478 6ES7 478 2AB00 0ACO Ambient Operating Conditions Temperature Without forced ventilation from 0 to 40 C With forced ventilation without diskette from 0 to 55 C with diskette from 0 to 40 C Temperature change max 10 K h Relative humidity 8 to 80 at 25 C no condensation Performance Features Diskette 3 5 1 44 Mbytes Hard disk gt 516 x 10 bytes Parallel port 1 LPT1 Connection of expansion modules Ye Technical Specifications Height in relation to sea Supply voltage 5 VDC level 50 m to 2 000 m Mechanical vibrations Current consumption 1A measured at the drive 10 lt f lt 58 Hz 0 035 mm constant amplitude Power losses SW 58 lt f lt 500 Hz 0 1 g constant acceleration Dimensions Shocks Semisinusoidal 5 g W x H x D mm 25 x 290 x 210 measured at the drive 11 ms Weight 1 08 kg Environmental Conditions for Storage Transport Temperature from 10 to 60 C Temperature change max 20 K h Relative humidity 8 to 80 at 25 C no condensation Mechanical vibrations 5 lt f lt 9 Hz 3 5 mm amplitude 9O lt
438. o the IM 467 Maximum Cable Lengths for PROFIBUS DP reno E T e Ta Kbps Segment in m 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Max Number of Bus Segments 1 1 Bus segments are interconnected by means of RS 485 repeaters S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 8 A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Connector Pin Assignment The electrical interface used to connect to PROFIBUS DP 9 pin subminiature D female connector is specified in the following table Figure 8 4 Ass with Signal Name PROFIBUS DP Designation RS 485 PE RxD TxDP RTS AG M5V2 P5V2 BATT RxD TxD N Oononoarkkt ON Protective earth Data transfer line B Control A Data reference potential Supply plus Data transfer line A Connector Pin Assignment 8 3 2 Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP Only in the case of 6ES7467 5FJ00 0ABO The IM 467 FO with an integrated fiber optic cable interface is available for connecting to the optical version of PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS FO bus cable Figure 8 5 Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 9 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 3 3 Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to the IM 467 FO Accessories Required e Pack of Simplex connectors and polishing sets 6GK1901 OFBO0 0AA0O
439. odule ID Technical Specifications 2 0 0 eee eee ene IF 962 COM Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6GES7962 3AA00 0ACO Pin Assignments ser aidaie a srateiy6 acare Sni arate Moucere aceararutacea audea sce wrnen dares eens Addressing and Interrupts Technical Specifications 0 0 cee ene n ees IF 962 LPT Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 4AA00 0ACO PIN NS SIONS MS ooh epee bana dpe ain oe dot mse Sek sheer a ects wr nid Bier dc oes a Addressing and Interrupts Technical Specifications nanna naana ee eee een nes IF 961 DIO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7961 1AA00 0ACO Pin Assignments 0 2 2 5 Sade oredr ae deen Ga doe main wa heeds eee awk ew Addressing and Interrupts Technical Specifications 0 0 cee ete en nes IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6GES7961 2AA00 OACO 0 ee teens Pin Assignments and Terminal Connection Diagram 5 Connecting Measured Value Sensors to Analog Inputs Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs 0005 Conversion Time and Cycle Time of the Analog Input Channels Conversion Time Cycle Time Settling Time and Response Time of the Analog Output Channels Starting Up the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule POOKESSING 2 55 feces cee el eegsioeeas see es een ee E Gens eens teeues Analog Output Function 0 0 0 ccc ee eee ne aes Analog Input Function Analog Value Repre
440. of channels of the same type in one module 16 channels 7654321 0 Byter 11111111 Channel error channel 0 2 Channel error channel 1 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 76543210 Byte8 Channel error channel 8 Channel error channel 9 Channel error channel 14 Channel error channel 15 Figure B 18 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Data record 1 with bytes 9 to 24 contains the channel specific diagnostic data The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module Configuring parameter assignment error Short circuit to M Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Figure B 19 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit 7654321 nez OTO oTo Tolo status 0 RUN 1 STOP 7654321 eye 3 oL ol Tol T00 EPROM error ADC DAC error Hardware interrupt lost Figure B 20 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 7 of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit 765 432 1 enes LTT AE type B 16 71 analog input 7 0 Byte 5 E ed eh Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel 16 bits long 7 0 Byte 6
441. of the Supply Voltage The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24VDC 0 5 A is always indicated by the EXTF LED on the module Furthermore this information is made available on the module entry in diagnosis Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment see Section 4 20 1 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 78 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 21 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A 6ES7422 1FF00 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A has the following features e 8 outputs isolated in groups of 1 e Output current 5 A e 120 230 VAC rated load voltage The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is not inserted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 79 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5A Process OONOOaRWDND i c ie S gt 2 xe c Sam a O Sam m LED control Figure 4 19 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 80 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 5A Programming package Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2 0 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D
442. of the power supply The connection should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual Chapter 6 Technical Specifications of the PS 4074 A Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output Rating Dimensions WxHxD mm 25x290x217 Output voltages Weight 0 76 kg e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Cable cross section 3x1 5 mm 2 litz wire Output currents ae sa a e Rated values 5 VDC 4A use only flexible 24 VDC 0 5 A sheath cable Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVss Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC 200 mVss Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs Input voltage 24 VDC 500 mVs Rated value 110 230 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC 100 mA Base 120 230 VAC load required Permitted range 88 to 300 VDC 24 VDC Idling proof 85 to 264 VAC no base load required an long range input Other Parameters Protection class in accordance l with protective with IEC 60536 grounding conductor System frequency e Rated value 50 60 Hz Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz Overvoltage category lI Rated input current Pollution severity 2 At 120 VAC Sa ane Test Volt oltage est Voltage At 120 VDC ee 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC At 240 VAC secondary lt gt PE At 240 VDC 150 V lt Ue 300 V 2200 VDC Leakage current lt 3 5 mA primary lt gt PE Buffering of power failures gt 20 ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 at a Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE
443. og input values 5 36 analog input module 5 41 Spare amr Standard communication Glossary 17 Standards 1 2 Startup Glossary 18 Status LEDs M7 400 CPUs 11 6 STEP 7 Glossary 18 STEP 7 blocks for analog functions 5 1 STOP mode digital module 4 11 STOP operating mode analog input module Submodule IDs interface submodule 13 4 Submodule receptacles for interface submodules M7 400 CPUs 11 11 expansion modules 11 11 Substitute 1 digital input module 4 7 digital output module 4 8 Substitute a value digital input module 4 7 digital output module 4 8 Substitute value Glossary 18 Suitable submodules M7 400 CPUs 11 13 SYNC Glossary 18 System cache M7 400 11 38 System data block SDB Glossary 18 System diagnostics Glossary 18 System function SFC Glossary 18 System function block SFB Glossary 19 System perturbation System ROM System ROM M7 400 11 39 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Index 11 Index T Technical specifications IF 961 AlO 13 54 IF 964 DP 13 65 IM 460 0 and 461 0 6 9 IM 460 1 and 461 1 6 13 IM 460 3 and 461 3 6 17 IM 460 4 and 461 4 6 21 PS 405 10 A 3 35 PS 405 10A 3 37 PS 405 10A R 3 37 PS 405 20 A 3 39 3 41 PS 405 4 A 3 31 3 33 PS 407 10A 3 25 PS 407 10A R 3 25 PS 407 20 A 3 27 3 29 PS 407 4 A 3 22 PS 407 4A RS 485 repeat
444. ogrammable Controllers Module Specifications 8 6 A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Prerequisites The IM 467 IM 467 FO is supported by all the CPU operating systems beginning with the release numbers listed below You will also find the following information in the table e The number of IM 467 IM 467 FO that can be operated on a CPU e Support of multiprocessor operation Table 8 2 CPU and IM 467 467 FO CPU MLFB Number Release Multiprocessor No of IM Operation 467 Possible Possible 412 6ES7412 1XF03 0ABO 4 412 2 6ES7412 2XG00 0ABO 414 2 6ES7414 2XG03 0ABO 416 3 6ES7414 3XL00 0ABO 417 4 6ES7417 4XL00 0ABO 416 2 6ES7416 2XK02 0AB0 Had Eee Note The 3 MB and 6 MB transmission rates are not enabled for the IM 467 FO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP There are two ways of connecting to PROFIBUS DP e Electrical connection via a bus connector e Optical connection using a fiber optic cable 8 3 1 Bus Connector Only with 6ES7467 5GJ02 0ABO The bus cable is connected to the IM 467 by means of this connector See the detailed description in the chapter on networking in the S7 400 M7 400 Hardware and Installation manual Switch for the bus terminating resistor Bus connector PROFIBUS DP bus cable Figure 8 3 Connecting the Bus Connector t
445. olled 2 wire transmitters Typ 4 9 W Analog Value Generation Actual value conversion Does not go into the response time Yes None 400 60 50 52 us 14 14 14 Can be parameterized none a lot 15 us 0 420 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Suppression of interference Limits of Error Interference voltage suppression parameterized for f nx f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 filter 400 60 50 Hz e Common mode interference Ucm lt 11 Vss Series mode interference gt 40 dB peak value of interference lt rated value of input range Crosstalk between the inputs gt 70 dB Operational limit in the entire temperature range with reference to the input range e Voltage input 1V 10V 1Vto5V Current input 20mA 4mAto20mA Resistance test 0 600 Q 1 0 Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to input range e Voltage input 1V 10V Ted Current input 20mA 4mAto 20 mA Resistance test Oto 600 Q 0 7 Temperature error with 0 03 K reference to the input range Linearity error with reference 0 05 K to the input range Repeat accuracy in the steady 0 2 state at 25 C referred to the input range Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None Substitute value can be applied No Analog Modules
446. olled via the ISA bus The interface submodules are labeled on the front plate and so can be identified even when installed Handling Interface submodules and their front connectors must only be plugged in or removed when the power is switched off Avoid confusing front connectors since this can destroy the interface submodules or the connected devices ESD Guidelines The interface submodules are not enclosed on the underside For this reason you must observe ESD guidelines when handling these modules Slots Submodule Receptacle Numbers To link the interface submodules into your system for example BIOS Setup you require the submodule receptacle numbers See the descriptions of the M7 400 programmable modules or the M7 300 400 expansion modules for the numbering of the individual submodule receptacles Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area In the M7 300 400 automation computers the I O address area C000p is reserved for addressing the interface submodules The base address at which an interface submodule can be addressed depends on the submodule receptacle of the M7 400 programmable module or the M7 300 400 expansion module containing the interface submodule You can find the submodule receptacle dependent base address of the interface submodule in the description of the M7 400 programmable module or the M7 300 400 expansion module The sections below describe the registers and their meanings as well as the
447. oller that stores and runs the user program It contains the operating system memory processing unit and communication interface Data block Data blocks DB are data areas in the user program that contain user data Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks whereas instance data blocks are assigned to a specific FB call Data static Static data is data that can only be used within a function block The data is saved in an instance data block belonging to the function block The data stored in this way is retained until the next function block call Data temporary Temporary data are local data of a block that are stored in the L stack during execution of a block and that are no longer available after execution S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 3 Glossary Declaration Assigning variables parameters or local data of a block for example with a name data type comment etc Default setting The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other value is used Destination CPU for interrupt Parameter in STEP 7 If several CPUs are installed the user can use this parameter to select the destination CPU for hardware and diagnostic interrupts Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which the diagnostic events are stored in the order in which they occur For troubleshooting the user can read out
448. oltage 2L 2M current supply 0 15 A Number of inputs 4 Nominal voltage load Low level 30 Vto 5V current supply High level 11Vto 30V 2L 2M 24 VDC Input current typ 7 mA Current consumption Depends on the Galvanic isolation Yes to all others 2L 2M load of the digital except the digital outputs outputs Type ID 03H Input filter Power losses 1 5 W can be set 50 kHz 200 kHz W x H x D mm 18 2 x 67 x 97 Supply voltage 2L 2M Weight 0 07 kg Number of outputs 2 Counter Inputs 5 V Galvanic isolation Yes to all others Number of counter except the digital channels 1 alternative to 24 V Inputs Level In accordance to Output voltage RS422 Low level max 3 V Terminating resistance approx 220 ohms High level 2 l 1 5V Differential voltage min 0 5 V Switching current Nominal value 0 3 A Sensor voltage No Range 5 mA to 0 3 A Sensor monitoring Yes Switching time max 300 ms Counter range 32 bits Cutoff voltage inductive Limited to Max counter frequency 500 kHz 2L B9V Short circuit protection Yes via electronic fuse S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 60 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 9 IF 964 DP Interface Submodule for S7 400 and M7 400 Order Numbers You can use the IF 964 DP interface submodule with order number 6ES7964 2AA00 0AB0 up to 07 99 in the M7 400 You can use the IF 964 DP interface submodule with order number 6ES7964 2AA01 0AB0 a
449. omentary contact pushbutton Depassivate battery see Installation Manual Chapter 7 Fault after plugging in a module Plugged in module defective Fault after switching on Remove all modules and plug in individually S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 16 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules BAF BATT1F BATT2F The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT INDIC switch is in the 1BATT position It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use Table 3 10 BAF BATT1F BATT2F BATT INDIC LEDs on 1BATT Cause of Fault Remedy sa rr BATTIF BATT2F Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in No backup voltage available compartment 1 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1 Press FMR momentary contact pushbutton Battery has been stored for Depassivate battery too long see Installation Manual Chapter 7 Battery 1 in order e Fault after plugging ina No backup voltage available module Plugged in short circuit module defective Fault after switching on Remove all modules and plug in individually ee eee CC D LED is dark L LED lights up S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 17 Power Supply Modules The follow
450. ometer Connection of the sensor e For measuring voltage e For measuring current As two wire transmitter As four wire transmitter For measuring resistance With two conductor terminal With three conductor terminal With four conductor terminal Load of the two wire transmitter Characteristic linearization e For thermocouples For resistance thermometers Temperature compensation Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for definable reference junction temperature Unit for temperature measurement Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Maximum input current for current input destruction limit 5 82 Max 18 V continuous 75 V for 1 ms cycle factor 1 20 40 mA continuous Possible Possible Possible Possible cable resistance is also measured Possible Possible Max 750 Q Parameters can be assigned Types B R S T E J K U L N Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Yes programmable No Possible Possible Possible Degrees Celsius S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 19 1 Commissioning the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7
451. ominal voltage 5 VDC 4 75 to 5 25 VDC Typical current consumption 2 75 A Pp BOA OA Maximum permissible power 3 25 A 3 5 consumption Maximum permissible power losses 16 25 W 17 OOO OWS W Maximum permissible power losses with interface submodules 19 25 W 20 5 W Forced ventilation Forced ventilation required N 1300 g Dimensions W x H x D mm 50 x 290 x 219 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 3 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 Function Elements Introduction In this section you will become familiar with the individual function elements of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 You require the information here to be able to respond to displays start up and operate an M7 400 automation computer and handle further components for example memory cards expansions In addition you will find information on the watchdog the BIOS setup and the address assignments and interrupt assignments General View Figure 11 1 shows the front and rear view of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 without covering flap The positions of the indicators operator controls and other elements required for operation can be seen from this figure Front view Rear view Receptacle for memory card 7 Expansion socket Status and fault LEDs 8 Cover for memory submodule Mode s
452. on Local time Mon Fri 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 E Mail adsupport siemens com GMT 1 00 The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English viii United States Johnson City Technical Support and Authorization Local time Mon Fri 8 00 AM to 500 PM Phone 1 423 262 2522 Fax 1 423 262 2289 E Mail simatic hotline sea siemens com GMT 5 00 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Asia Australia Beijing Technical Support and Authorization Local time Mon Fri 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM Phone 86 10 64 75 75 75 Fax 86 10 64 74 74 74 E Mail adsupport asia siemens com GMT 8 00 Preface Service amp Support on the Internet In addition to our documentation we offer our Know how online on the internet at http www siemens com automation service amp support where you will find the following The newsletter which constantly provides you with up to date information on your products The right documents via our Search function in Service amp Support A forum where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences Your local representative for Automation amp Drives via our representatives database Information on field service repairs spare parts and more under Services S7 400 M7 400 Programma
453. onitoring functions via PROFIBUS DP Communication takes place without any additional configuration on the IM 467 IM 467 FO S7 functions can be used on their own or in parallel with the PROFIBUS DP protocol If they are used in parallel with DP communication this affects the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle time S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 3 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO 8 1 1 LED Indicators and the Mode Selector The LED plate on the front panel of the IM 467 IM 467 FO has the following four indicators Figure 8 2 LEDs of the IM 467 467 FO IM Operating Mode 8 4 The LEDs indicate the operating mode of the IM in accordance with the following table Table 8 1 Operating Modes of the IM 467 467 FO yellow green red red a a a STOP with internal error IM not configured for example Flashing Waiting for FW update takes 10 sec after power up Waiting for FW update IM Flashing currently contains an incomplete FW version RUN and PROFIBUS DP bus fault RUN but there are faults on the DP line the DP slave is not Flashing taking part in data transfer or the module in the DP slave is faulty for example Module error Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing System error S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467 IM 467 FO Controlling the Operating Mode There ar
454. ons W x H x D mm Current consumption from the S7 400 bus 5 VDC e IM 460 1 e IM 461 1 Power loss e IM 460 1 e IM 461 1 Terminator Power supply for EU Backup current S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 25 x 290 x 280 600 g 610g Typ 50 mA Typ 120 mA max 85 mA max 100 mA Typ 250 mW max 425 mW Typ 500 mW max 600 mW 6ES7 461 1BA00 7AA0 5 V 5 A per line 6 13 Interface Modules 6 4 The Interface Modules IM 460 3 6ES7460 3AA00 0AB0 6ES7460 3AA01 0ABO and IM 461 3 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 6ES7461 3AA01 0AA0 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 6ES7461 3AA01 0AA0O IM 461 3 LEDs DIP switch External backup voltage DIP switch Under cover Connector X1 Interface C1 Connector X2 Interface C2 Figure 6 4 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 14 A5E00069467 07 Function Interface Modules The interface module pair IM 460 3 send IM and IM 461 3 receive IM are used for a remote link of up to a maximum 102 m exactly 100 m plus inputs outputs of 0 75 m in the line The communication bus is transferred at the full transmission rate Parameterization Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module you must set the number of the mounting rack that the receiv
455. ontact protection internal None ifferences a B i arr Sanne Connecting two outputs in parallel etween the outputs o the different ata e For redundant actuation of Possible only outputs a load with identical load Insulation resistance 4000 VAC voltage Current consumption e To increase performance Not possible To AOM MS HACKPANG DUSE MAKINA Triggering a digital input Possible Ser a of the Typ 4 5 W SeAich ais e Mechanical Max 20 Hz Status Interrupts Diagnostics ae ee eee Status display Green LED per channel 5 A or inductive load to Z dana None IEC 947 5 1 13 DC 15 Diagnostic functions None AC Relay Features e For lamp load 1 Hz Relay response times e Power up Max 10 ms Typ 5 5 ms e Power down Max 5 ms Typ 3 ms Debouncing time Typ 0 5 ms S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 93 Digital Modules Note Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at the relay contacts This will increase the life of the relay contacts To do this connect an RC element or a varistor parallel to the relay contacts or to the load The dimensions depend on the size of the load see Chapter 4 of the installation manual S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 94 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 Structure of the Chapter The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects 1 Overview containing the
456. onversion time per channel Dimensions and eign e Inthe ranges 1Vto5V 420 us Dimensions W x H x D 25 x 290 x 210 and 4 mA to 20 mA aa eIGrS e in all ranges 300 us veld Approx ets Basic response time of module Data for Specific Module all channels enabled Number of outputs Inthe ranges 1Vto5V 3 36 ms Length of cable and 4 mA to 20 mA e Shielded Max 200 m e Inall the other ranges 2 4 ms Voltages Currents Potentials Settling time Supply voltage of the 24 VDC e For resistive load 0 1 ms electronics L e For capacitive load 3 5 ms Rated load voltage L 24 VDC For inductive load 0 5 ms e Reverse polarity protection Yes Suppression of Interference Limits of Error Isolation Interference voltage suppression for f n x f1 1 eBay a F z f1 interference frequency n 1 2 etween channels an es backplane bus Common mode gt 60 dB 3 interference Between the channels No Ucy lt AC 3 Vee 50 Hz Between channels and Yes load voltage L Crosstalk between the outputs gt 40 dB Permitted potential difference Operational limit in the entire temperature range with e Between the outputs Ecm 3 VDC reference to the output range Between S and Mana Voltage outputs Ucm 3 VDC 10V 0 5 Between Mana and OVto10V 0 5 Minternal Uiso 75 VDC 60 VAC 1Vto5V 0 5 Insulation tested e Current outputs Between bus and L M 2120 VDC OT E m Between bus and analog A section 212
457. or flexible 24 VDC 0 5A sheath cable Max residual ripple 5 VDC 50 mVss Cable diameter 3 to 9mm 24 VDC 200 mVss Input Rating Max switching peaks 5 VDC 150 mVs Input voltage 24 VDC 500 mVs Rated value 24 48 60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC 100 mA Base e Permitted range Static load required 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC Idling proof Dynamic no base load required 18 5 VDC to 75 5 VDC Other Parameters Protection class in accordance l with protective Rated input current 2 A 1 A 0 8 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160 curve B2 Overvoltage category lI Pollution severity Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage 0 lt Ue lt 50 V 700 VDC secondary lt gt PE 150 V lt Ue lt 300 V 2200 VDC primary lt gt PE Buffering of power failures gt 20ms Complies with the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 of August 1998 ata repeat rate of 1 s Power consumption 24 VDC 48 W Power loss 16 W Backup current Max 100 uA at power off Backup battery option 1 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 33 Power Supply Modules 3 13 Power Supply Module PS 405 10A 6ES7405 0KA00 0AA0 Function The PS 405 10A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 10 A and 24 VDC 1 A on th
458. or of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage sensor to the M MI terminals of a channel Make sure that the front connector wiring corresponds to the following terminal assignment diagram S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 71 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit O Q Figure 5 26 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit 5 72 o N ogoaGARARARA ON Voltage Current measure Resistance mea measurement ment surement MV0 MV0 MO CHO Wordo M cho oF MIO Mo Mo Mo CHO Word0 MV1 MV1 ICO Ml1 CH1 Word2 mit CHI M1 M1 IC0 MV2 MV2 M1 CH2 Worda M CHe oF MI2 M2 M2 M1i CH2 Word 4 MV3 MV3 IC1 H3 Worde M CH CH3 ord 6 MI3 3 M3 M3 IC1 MANA MV4 MV4 M2 cHa words 44 ch or Ml4 M4 M4 M2 CH4 Word 8 MV5 MV5 IC2 H w MI5 CH CH5 ord 10 MI5 5 M5 M5 IC2 MV6 MV6 M3 MI6 CH6 Word 12 MI6 CH6 M6 M6 M3 MV7 MV7 iene Word 1g MIZ CH
459. or when the Input Delay Equals 0 1 ms and an Error Occurs If you have parameterized the following e An input delay of 0 1 ms or 0 05 ms e KLV or SV as the response to an error e Substitute 1 In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal the following could occur before the last valid value or the substitute value 1 is output e An 0 signal may be briefly output e If parameterized a hardware interrupt may be generated S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 40 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 11 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC 6ES7421 5EHO0 0AA0 Characteristics The SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC has the following features e 16 inputs isolated e 120 VAC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and two wire proximity switches BEROs IEC 61131 type 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 41 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC Process Module CH A daptation E a 7 E H A daptation OooNgQ aGAAOUON CH Adaptation CH Adaptation daptation Son a O o 2 pe thn O aes a O D i Q C gt Adaptation Figure 4 8 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VDC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 42 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 421 DI
460. os conexiones enchufables Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud sabe que en la atm sfera existente no hay peligro de explosi n Lista de los m dulos homologados En internet hallar Ud una lista con los m dulos homologados http www4 ad siemens de view cs bajo el ID de asignaci n 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 27 General Technical Specifications 1 6 5 Impiego dell S7 400 nell area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 Zona 2 Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone Le zone vengono distinte secondo la probabilit della presenza di un atmosfera esplosiva Zona Pericolo di esplosione L atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in brevemente ambienti chiusi Area sicura No Al di fuori della zona 2 Applicazioni standard di periferia decentrata Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l installazione del SIMATIC S7 400 nell area a pericolo di esplosione Ulteriori informazioni Ulteriori informazioni sulle diverse unit S7 400 si trovano nel manuale Luogo di produzione Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Autorizzazione x 3G EExnAlIT3 T6 secondo EN 50021 1999 Numero di controllo KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Avvertenza Le unit con l autorizzazione 113 G EEx nA I
461. ose ice scdtewsdwmenterstieeemeneewiween wnebeesseunese 12 1 OvervieW 2 ee en een teen nent n ee nees 12 2 EXM 478 Expansion Module 6ES7 478 2AC00 0ACO 12 2 1 Addressing the EXM 478 Expansion Module 000005 12 2 2 Interrupt Assignments Signal Switching EXM 478 04 12 2 3 Technical Specifications of the EXM 478 Expansion Module 12 3 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 6GES7 478 2CA00 0ACO 12 3 1 Pin Assignments of the AT Module 00 c eee eee 12 3 2 Technical Specifications of the ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 12 4 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module 6ES7 478 2BA00 0ACO 12 4 1 LPT1 Parallel Port 0 0 0 0 cee eee 12 4 2 Technical Specifications of the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications XVI A5E00069467 07 13 Interface Submodules 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 6 13 6 1 13 6 2 13 6 3 13 7 13 7 1 13 7 2 13 7 3 13 7 4 13 7 5 13 7 6 13 7 7 13 7 8 13 7 9 13 7 10 13 7 11 13 7 12 13 7 13 13 8 13 8 1 13 8 2 13 8 3 Contents Interface Submodules Overview Submodule IDs and Insertion Rules IF 962 VGA Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6ES7962 1BA00 0ACO0 0 cee eee nee PSS OMICS 4 mat a ndcaca axcdate naw dip arden 6h are FO E he Os Addressing Interrupts and Subm
462. ot switched on or green e A module has not yet completed the initialization process Operator Controls and Indicators of the Receive IM INTF LED red Lights up if a rack number gt 21 or 0 was set Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage EXTF LED red Lights up in the event of an external fault line fault for example if the terminator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process or if the CC is switched off DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack Socket for external On the IM 461 3 order number 6ES7461 3AA00 0AA0 you can backup voltage connect an external backup voltage 5 V to 15 V or a central backup EXT BATT to this socket when you want to replace the mounting rack power supply This will ensure a backup of the corresponding EU without interruption If you use the receive IM in a cabinet you should for reasons of space use an angled connector for the incoming supply Front connector X1 Upper connector input for the connecting cable from the previous P interface module Front connector X2 Lower connector output for the connecting cable to the next pore perac module or ortho temnto o S S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 16 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 Interface Modules Dimensions W x H x D mm 25 x 290 x 280 Current consumption from the S7 400 bus 5 VDC e
463. ow so ec wed ob a oe aa ag ad Da ge Rae 4 34 4 8 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421 DI16 120 VDC 4 42 4 9 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DITO X24600 VUC rage rete ssee ints ENTENEN EIERE ET EENE ANERE 4 45 4 10 Circuit as for Active High or Active Low Input 00005 4 49 4 11 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 D116 X 120 230 VUO reris EITA reaa ea ew adwewaa neue ewe e da be wees 4 51 4 12 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC ere 4 13 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421 Dre 120 VOC aecwe core dak cased eons ye ean EEEN 4 57 4 14 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DONG X24 VDC 2A saaes ones rere nes eee uane nes womee werden eres 4 60 4 15 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2A 2 occ ccc ccc n tenet te nnees 4 16 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VOG 5A 6 66 600642008 bee ede pees seweaneweeGarra dex 4 66 4 17 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC O 5A ooo cece ccc cece eee e eet erreren 4 18 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDO 0 5 A oo ccc ccc ccc cece cee eet e eee nee eens S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 XIX Contents XX 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 5 1 5 2 5 3 9 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 9 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14
464. ow underflow in life zero areas A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted as a wire break You can therefore not parameterize the underflow check for the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit for the following measuring methods and ranges Table 5 70 Points to Note when Checking for Underflow Measuring Method Measuring Range Voltage 1to5V Current four wire transmitter 4to20 mA Current two wire transmitter 4 to 20 mA Points to Note About the Short Circuit to M Diagnosis You can only parameterize the check for Short Circuit to M for the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit for the Current 2 wire transmitter measuring method S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 121 Analog Modules 5 23 Analog Input Module SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit 6ES7 431 7KF10 0ABO Characteristics The analog input module SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit has the following features 8 differential inputs for the resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer can be parameterized Linearization of the resistance thermometer characteristic curves 16 bit resolution Update rate of 25 ms for 8 channels Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC Calibration Software The analog input mo
465. owing a short circuit reclosing under a full load is not guaranteed To prevent this you can do one of the following things e Change the signal at the output or e Interrupt the load voltage of the module Briefly disconnect the load from the output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 18 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A 6ES7422 5EH10 0AB0 Characteristics The SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A has the following features 16 outputs each channel is fused reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 8 1 5 A output current Rated load voltage 20 to 125 VDC Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 65 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Process Module Byte 0 OOnN DOR WN Data register and bus control LED control Figure 4 16 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 66 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Speci
466. p batteries optional 2 x Lithium AA 3 6 V 1 9 Ah Protective separation Yes to IEC 61131 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 39 Power Supply Modules 3 16 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A 6ES7405 0RA01 0AA0 Function The PS 405 20A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC 20 A and 24 VDC 1 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A FO Fixing screws 405 0RA00 0AAO sare LEDs INTF BAF BATT1F BATT2F T 5 VDC 24 VDC FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset e Standby switch Under cover e Battery compartment Switches BATT INDIC 2 BATT OFF 1 BATT 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screws Figure 3 12 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 40 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 405 20 A Dimensions Weight and Cable Cross Sections Output Rating Dimensions WxHxD mm 79x290x217 Output voltages Weight 2 2 kg e Rated values 5 1 VDC 24 VDC Cable cross section 3x1 5 mm litz wire Output currents with wire end ferrule e Rated values 5 VDC 20A use component conductor or
467. page of each chapter e You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual The glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual e Atthe end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you rapid access to the information you need S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 V Preface Specific Information for S7 400 You require the following manuals and manual packages in order to program and commission an S7 400 Manual Contents Manual Package Standard Software for S7 and M7 STEP 7 Basic Information STEP 7 Reference Information Statement List STL for S7 300 and S7 400 Ladder Logic LAD for S7 300 and S7 400 Function Block Diagram FBD for S7 300 and S7 400 System and Standard Functions Manual PG 7xx yi Installing and starting up STEP 7 on a programming device PC Working with STEP 7 with the following contents Managing projects and files Configuring and assigning parameters to the S7 400 configuration Assigning symbolic names for user programs Creating and testing a user program in STL LAD Creating data blocks Configuring the communication between two or more CPUs Loading storing and deleting user programs in the CPU programming device Monitoring and controlling user programs Monitoring and controlling the CPU Guide for efficiently implementing the programming task with the programming device
468. pe J TC type K TC type U TC type L TC type N Resistance thermocouples three conductor standard measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic measuring range Pt 100 Pt 200 Pt 500 Pt 1000 Ni 100 Ni 1000 Temperature error with reference to the input range Linearity error with reference to the input range Repeat accuracy in the steady state at 25 C referred to the input range S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 1 K 4 9K 3 9 K 3 1K 0 8K 0 8K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 4K 0 8K 0 8K 0 004 K 0 01 K 0 1 5 81 Analog Modules Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts None Diagnostic functions None Substitute value can be applied No Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values Input resistance e Voltage 80 mV 1 MQ 250 mV 1 MQ 500 mV 1 MQ 1 V1 MQ 2 5 V1 MQ 5 V1 MQ 1 to 5 V 1 MQ 10 V 1 MQ 0 to 20 mA 50 Q 20 mA 50 Q 4 to 20 mA 50 Q 0 to 48 9 1 MQ 0 to 150 9 1 MQ 0 to 300 02 1 MQ 0 to 600 02 1 MQ 0 to 6000 02 1 MQ can be used up to 5000 2 TC type B 1 MQ TC type R 1 MQ TC type S 1 MQ TC type T 1 MQ TC type E 1 MQ TC type J 1 MQ TC type K 1 MQ TC type U 1 MQ TC type L 1 MQ TC type N 1 MQ Pt 100 1 MQ Pt 200 1 MQ Pt 500 1 MQ Pt 1000 1 MQ Ni 100 1 MQ Ni 1000 1 MQ e Current e Resistors e Thermocouples e Resistance therm
469. pears on the screen Figure 11 14 m jl Security _ Device Security _ m Floppy Disk Read only cx Hard Disk Read cnly L EEA ee a E E N Password Enter Setup m Cancel System Boot ee I Uoll Press F1 key for help Figure 11 14 Security Setup Page What is the Purpose of the Setup Page On this setup page you activate or deactivate the write protection for the disk drive and hard drive and the password protection for setting up and or booting the CPU Device Security Floppy Disk Read Only When this check box is activated write access to the hard disk is no longer possible Hard Disk Read Only When this check box is activated write access to the hard disk is no longer possible S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 30 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 Password Enter Setup By activating this check box you can assign a password that authorizes access to the Setup System Boot By activating this check box you can assign a password that permits booting of the operating system You can only set this password if a valid password was already entered for Enter Setup Note The password can have a maximum of 8 alohanumeric characters Upper and lower case are distinguished If you use the American keyboard to enter the password and then change fo
470. ply Modules Order Numbers and Function Table 3 2 Redundant power supply modules Type Order Number Input Voltage Output Voltage See Section PS 407 10AR_ 6ES7407 OKROO OAAO 85 VAC to 264 VAC or 5 VDC 10A and 3 8 88 VDC to 300 VDC 24 VDC 1A PS 405 10AR_ 6ES7405 OKRO0 0AAO 19 2 VDC to 72 VDC 5 VDC 10A and 3 14 24 VDC 1A Redundant Operation If you use two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R you can install a redundant power supply on a mounting rack We recommend this if you want to increase the availability of your programmable controller particularly if you are operating it on an unreliable power system Configuring a Redundant Power Supply Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in this manual STEP 7 as of V4 02 is also required To set up a redundant power supply insert a power supply module in slots 1 and 3 of the rack You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power supply module In other words in redundant operation all the modules can only draw a total of 10 A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 4 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Characteristics The redundant power supply of an S7 400 has the following characteristics The power supply module delivers a making current in accordance with NAMUR Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the whole rack if the
471. presentation for Resistance Thermometers Ni100 120 200 500 1000 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Ni 100 120 200 500 1000 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type B Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R S Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U Bipolar Output Ranges 00 ccc ee eee eens Unipolar Output Ranges 0 ce ee ee eee eens Life Zero Output RAngeS 06 eee eee eens Analog Value Representation in Output Range 10 V Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 Vand1to5V Analog Value Representation in Output Range 20 MA S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 XXV Contents XXVI 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 9 92 9 93 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57
472. program and processes the hardware interrupt block OB 40 In the user program of OB 40 you can set how the programmable controller is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached When OB 40 is exited the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module Note Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange Structure of the Start Information Tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40 The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_ POINT ADDR The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8 LB 8 3130 29 28272625 24 Value falls below lower limit for channel 0 Value falls below lower limit for channel 1 Value exceeds upper limit for channel 0 Value exceeds upper limit for channel 1 Figure 5 24 Start Information of OB 40 Which Event Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 68 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Hardware Interrupt on Trigger Reached End of Scan Cycle By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle you have the option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled channels of the analog input module
473. pter is subdivided into the following subjects 1 Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2 Information that is generally valid in other words relating to all digital modules for example parameter assignment and diagnostics 3 Information that refers to specific modules for example characteristics diagram of connections and block diagram technical specifications and special characteristics of the module a for digital inout modules b for digital output modules Additional Information Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter records data records 0 1 and 128 in the system data You must be familiar with this structure if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data data records 0 1 in the system data You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 1 Digital Modules Chapter Overview 4 2 Section Deon SCP Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Digital Module Parameter Assignment Diagnostics of the Digital Modules Interrupts of the Digital Modules 4 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs g a 4 7 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x24 VDC 6ES7421 1BL00 0AA0 4 8 Digit
474. put current of 2 2 mA already at 5 V e Inthe case of type 1 an input current of 2 0 5 mA already at 5 V EN 60947 5 2 Two Wire BEROs The standard for BEROs EN 60947 5 2 specifies that there can be a current of lt 1 5 mA for BEROs in the 0 signal state The input current of the module in the 0 signal state is decisive for the operation of two wire BEROs This must be in accordance with BERO requirements S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 15 Digital Modules Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs As long as the current flowing into the module remains lt 1 5 mA the module recognizes this as a O signal Typ switching threshold yP 9 5 V Resistance characteristic curve BERO standard lt 1 5 mA min to IEC 61131 type 1 2 Wire BERO gt 0 signal PLC input resistance Figure 4 1 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs IEC 61131 Type 1 in the Case of the Digital Input Module 6ES7421 1BL01 0AA0 The input current in the case of the digital input module 6ES7421 1BL01 0AA0 reaches 1 5 mA only above the 5 V switching threshold but under the switching threshold of the module typ 9 5 V Therefore only type 1 can be specified with the IEC 61131 standard S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 16 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 7 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 1B
475. r example to using another national keyboard such as the German this can have consequences for the password For the password Johnny_ you would then have to enter Johnnz Write down your password and keep it in a safe place where you can find it again If you lose or forget your password contact your local Siemens dealer OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 31 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 9 Setup Page Date and Time Opening the Setup Page If you have selected Date and Time and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this BIOS setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 15 Date and Time Time yc zig Late 27 Nov 1996 Figure 11 15 Date and Time Setup Page Default What is the Purpose of the Setup Page On this setup page you set the date and time for the programmable module Date You enter the date in the form dd mm yyyy day month year in this edit box Time You enter the time in the form hh mm ss hour minute second in this edit box The seconds in the setup page are updated continuously and only stopped when you select the seconds field You can then accept the value displayed or set by
476. r program of the hardware interrupt OB OB 40 to OB 47 you can specify how the programmable controller is to respond to an edge change When the hardware interrupt OB is exited the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been triggered If no higher priority run time levels are waiting to be processed the buffered interrupts of all modules are serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they occurred Hardware Interrupt Lost In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that channel before it has been processed by the CPU a diagnostic interrupt hardware interrupt lost is triggered More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed Interrupt Triggering Channels The interrupt triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs in the start information of the corresponding OB The start information is two words long bits 0 to 31 The bit number is the channel number Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 14 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 6 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs IEC 61131 Type 1 and Type 2 The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current e Inthe case of type 2 an in
477. rammable Controllers Module Specifications 3 20 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules 3 7 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A 6ES7407 0DA01 0AA0 Function The PS 407 4A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC line voltage of 85 to 264 V or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supplies 5 VDC 4 A and 24 VDC 0 5 A on the secondary side Controls and Indicators of the PS 4074 A PS 407 4A X 2 1 407 0DA01 nad o INTF o BAF o BATTF o 5VDC 24 VDC Fixing screw LEDs INTF BAF BATTF DC 5 V DC 24 V FMR pushbutton Failure Message Reset Standby switch does not cut off mains Under cover Battery compartment Switches BATT INDIC BATT OFF 3 pin plug in power connector Fixing screw Figure 3 3 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A Power connection In contrast to the instructions on installing a power supply module in the S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation manual an AC power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 4A to both an AC and DC supply S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 21 Power Supply Modules Polarity Reversal of L and L The polarity reversal of L and L with supply voltages of between 88 VDC and 300 VDC has no effect on the function
478. rations and data for signal processing required to control a system or process It is assigned to a programmable module CPU FM for example and can be structured in smaller units blocks Varistor Voltage dependent resistor S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 19 Glossary Warm restart This is a reboot after a power failure using a set of dynamic data programmed by the user and a user program section defined in the system A warm restart is indicated by setting a status bit or by some other appropriate means that can be read by the user program and indicate that the standstill of the programmable controller brought about by a power failure has been detected in RUN mode Wire break Parameter in STEP 7 A wire break test is used for monitoring the connection from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator With wire break the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized input output Working memory The working memory is a random access memory in the CPU which the processor accesses during program execution of the user program S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 20 A5E00069467 07 Index A Accessories C 1 Accessories M7 400 memory card 11 8 Actuator connection to analog output module 5 59 Actuators p 12 4 ADC D analog input module Address Address area UT Address assi
479. rcuit of the analog circuit MANA This potential difference Ucm must not exceed the permissible value If the permissible potential difference is exceeded the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules T Chassis ground Figure 5 21 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four Conductor Connection Two Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output In the case of a two conductor connection connect Qy to S and Mana to S on the front connector However this will not produce the accuracy of a four conductor connection Connect the load to terminals Qy and to the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana of the module 1 Chassis ground Figure 5 22 Two Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 61 Analog Modules 5 15 Connecting Loads Actuators to Current Outputs Note The necessary connecting cables which result from the potential connection of the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown below In other words you must continue to take note of and implement Section 5 13 with its generally applicable information for connecting loads actuators Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figure Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following m
480. re enabled It therefore has no effect on the filter settling time which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing Note It is only advisable to parameterize smoothing if you also parameterize interference frequency suppression otherwise the measured value resolution will be reduced to 9 bits analog value representation is right aligned in this case Filter Settling Time with Strong Smoothing Table 5 57 Interference Frequency Suppression and Filter Settling Time with Smoothing of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7431 1KF20 0ABO Interference Suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms a a S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 95 Analog Modules Step Response with Strong Smoothing The following figure illustrates the contents of Table 5 57 It shows the filter settling time after which in the case of a step response the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100 depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal in percent 100 0 12 5 30 60 83 333 100 120 150 Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz Filter settling time in ms 60 Hz 50 Hz Figure 5 32 Step Response of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit 6ES7 431 1KF20 0
481. rence voltage suppression for f nx f1 1 f1 interference frequency n 1 2 25 X 290 x 210 interference Ucm lt 30 V 8 e Series mode interference gt 40 dB 4 peak value of interference lt rated value max 200i of input range Crosstalk between the inputs gt 50 dB Operational limit in the entire temperature range with Not required reference to the input range Typ 1 67 mA l e Voltage input 1V 1 0 Yes 10V 0 6 1Vto5V 0 7 No e Current input 20mA 1 0 30 VAC 4mA to 20 mA 1 0 e Resistance measurement 1 25 30 VAC 0 to 500 Q four conductor 75 VDC 60 VAC measurement in the range of 6009 Basic error operational limit at 25 5C referred to input range 2120 VDC e Voltage input 500 VDC 1V 0 7 10V 0 4 2120 VDC 1Vto5V 0 5 e Current input 20mA 0 7 Max 350 mA 4mAto20mA 0 7 Typ 1 8 W e Resistance measurement 0 8 0 to 500 Q four conductor measurement in the range of 6009 Temperature error with reference to the input range Integrative Does not go into the response time e Inthe resistance 0 02 K Yes measurement range e In all the other 0 007 K 60 50 measurement ranges Linearity error with reference 0 05 K 16 7 20 to the input range Repeat accuracy inthe steady 0 1 state at 25 C referred to the input range 23 25 13 13 Bit Not possible S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Modu
482. rent 4 wire transmitter 2DMU Current two wire transmitter R 4L Resistor four conductor terminal R 3L Resistor three conductor terminal Static Channel RTD 4L Thermal resistor linear four conductor terminal RTD 3L Thermal resistor linear three conductor terminal TC L Thermocouple linear e Measuring range Refer to Section 5 22 2 for the 10V measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set e teference 273 15 to 327 67 C 0 00 C Temperature e Interference 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz suppression e Smoothing None None ao Dynamic Module Average High e Ref junction None None RTD on Channel 0 Reference temperature value 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings A Point to Note About Channels for Hardware Interrupts with the End of Scan Cycle Trigger You can parameterize hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 115 Analog Modules Smoothing of the Measured Values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 5 6 The following figure indicates for the
483. representation Table 5 6 Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Data Word Value in 915 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 100 000 0 003617 0 000 Measured Data Word Value in 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 117 589 Over range gt 100 004 100 000 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 003617 Rated range 0 000 0 003617 Under range 17 593 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 32768 lt 17 596 TIT flow S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 10 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 8 Life Zero Input Ranges Measured Data Word Value in 915 214 213 912 211 210 29 28 of gt 32767 118 515 32511 2 649 2 648 100 000 1 0 003617 0 0 000 1 0 003617 4864 17 593 In the event of wire break the module reports 7FFFy Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges Table 5 9 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 10 Vto 1V Sytem Votase ensuring Range mein av sv easy av T T T wo a ov S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 11 Analog Modules Table 5 10 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges 500 mV to 25 mV System Voltage Measuring Range bee Hex S00mv a50mV 8D mv 50m zw aa in iene Sen San ae a a a a a eC es E S FFFF 75 00 00 20736 AF00 375mV mV 187 54 mV 54 mV 60mV mV 37 5 mV 5mV 18 75 mV 7
484. reset the memory of the CPU MRES Module filtering mode By operating mode we mean 1 The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the PG 2 The type of program execution in the CPU MPI The multipoint interface MPI is the programming device interface of the SIMATIC S7 It is used to access programmable modules CPUs CPs text displays and operator panel from a central point The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each other Multicomputing Multicomputing operation is the synchronous operation of several 2 to 4 CPUs in an appropriate central rack of the S7 400 Multiprocessor operation During multiprocessor operation several CPUs access one or more master interfaces for gt PROFIBUS DP S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 11 Glossary Non isolated In the case of non isolated input output modules the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected OB gt Organization block Organization block Organization blocks OBs form the interface between the operating system of the CPU and the user program The order in which the user program is processed is defined in the organization blocks Operating mode The SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers have the following operating modes STOP gt STARTUP RUN and STOP Operating system The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and processes of
485. rmation available Vector channel error Channel parameter assignment error User calibration doesn t correspond to the parameter assignment S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 128 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 23 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit Measuring Methods As the measuring method for the input channels you can set the temperature measurement Unused Channels Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges with the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 73 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit RTD 3L Thermal resistor Pt 100 standard You will find the digitized analog values linear three conductor Pt 200 standard in Section 5 3 1 in the temperature mney Pt500 standard 29 temperature Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard measurement RTD 4L Thermal resistor linear four conductor terminal temperature measurement Default Settings The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Thermal resistor linear 3 conductor terminal for the measuring method and Pt 100 standard for the measuring range You can use this measuring method with this measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 8 x RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmab
486. rmissible Condition for Channel n Resistor 0 2 4o0r6 You must disable the Measuring Type parameter for four conductor terminal channels n 1 1 3 5 7 Resistor 0 2 4o0r6 The reason The connections of channel n 1 are used three conductor terminal to supply the resistance that is connected to Thermal resistor 0 2 4o0r6 ena linear four conductor termi nal Thermal resistor 0 2 4o0r6 linear four conductor termi nal Wiring for Junction Compensation for Thermocouples If you select RTD on Channel 0 as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for thermocouples the following applies Table 5 54 Thermocouple with Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0 Reference Junction Permissible Condition Parameter for Channel n RTD on Channel 0 You must connect and parameterize on channel 0 a resistance thermometer with linearization a 3 or 4 conductor connection in the climatic range channels 0 and 1 are thus assigned The reason If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction a resistance type sensor must be connected there to record absolute temperatures in the climatic range Unused Channels Unused channels can usually be left open Put the measuring range module in position A You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by short circuiting the channels Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unu
487. rogrammable Controllers Module Specifications A 8 A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 bytes 3 and 4 for the parameters of the digital output modules You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 76543210 Byte3 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 16 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 17 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 18 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 19 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 20 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 21 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 22 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23 76543210 Byte 4 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 24 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 25 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 26 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 27 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 28 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 29 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 30 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31 Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Figure A 4 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 A 9 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameters A 10 The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input module
488. rogrammable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 9 M7 400 Expansions Division of Addresses in the M7 400 Specific I O Address Area The EXM 478 expansion module is operated on the ISA bus of the programmable module The I O address area from COO0y to D2FFy in the CPU 486 3 CPU 488 3 or the FM 456 application module is reserved for this purpose Each expansion module occupies 256 bytes 100p in this area The division of the address area is shown in Figure 12 6 using the FM 456 4 as an example 12 10 Submodule receptacle number 6 Reserved 3 EXM 478 expansion module Submodule receptacle number 5 2 EXM 478 expansion module Submodule receptacle number 4 1 EXM 478 expansion module Submodule receptacle number 3 e g FM 456 4 Reserved n q Number of the slot of the module in the mounting rack Submodule receptacle number 1 in hexadecimal notation Example n 6 FM 456 4 C600H Submodule receptacle number 0 o 7 1 EXM478 C700H p 8 2 EXM 478 C800H q 9 3 EXM 478 C900H Reserved All addresses are in hexadecimal notation Figure 12 6 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules and the Interface Submodules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Addresses Within an Expansion Module Each expansion module occupies 256 bytes 100p within the CPU
489. ross inhibit voltage Size of the motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e For redundant triggering of a load Triggering a digital input Switch rate e For resistive load e For inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 e For lamp load Short circuit protection of the output e Min current required for fuse to blow e Max response time Replacement fuses e Wickmann Schurter Littelfuse S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 At maximum current min L1 1 5 Vrms At maximum current min L1 10 7 Vrms 5A 10 mAto5A Max 50 A per cycle Max 3 5 mA Not more than 1 AC scan cycle Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA Max 55 V Max size 5 to NEMA Max 100 W Possible only outputs connected to the same load Possible Max 10 Hz Max 0 5 Hz 1 Hz Fuse 8 A 250 V per output Min 100 A Max 100 ms Fuse 8 A quick acting 194 1800 0 SP001 1013 217 008 4 81 Digital Modules Changing Fuses 1 Warning This can result in injury If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module you could be injured by an electric shock Consequently always remove the front connector before you change the fuse S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 82 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 22 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 120 230 VAC 2 A 6ES7422 1FHO0 0AA0
490. rs Connecting Measured Value Sensors to Analog Inputs The maximum permissible voltage difference Vcm 8 V AC between the inputs and the internal ground must not be exceeded The measuring ranges current voltage are selected via the wiring of the front connector and by calling the software driver provided for the measuring range Unswitched Channels You must short circuit unswitched input channels and ground them This achieves optimal noise immunity for the analog module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 37 Interface Submodules Isolated Measured Value Sensors Potential differences can occur between the individual measured value sensors in the case of isolated measured value sensors These potential differences can occur as the result of interference or the physical distribution of the measured value Sensors Note Ensure that the Vcm common mode voltage does not exceed the permissible value Violation of the permissible value can result in wrong measured values Figure 13 13 shows the connection of isolated measured value sensors Isolated measured value sensors Ground bus Figure 13 13 Connection of Isolated Measured Value Sensors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 38 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Non lIsolated Measured Value Sensors Potential differences must not arise between non isolated measured value sensors I
491. rs will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved regularly and any necessary corrections included subsequent editions Suggestions for improvement are Siemens AG welcomed Bereich Automation and Drives Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems Siemens AG 1999 2003 Postfach 4848 D 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E000069467 07 We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full agreement However the data in this manual are reviewed Preface Purpose of the Manual The manual contains reference information on operator actions descriptions of functions and technical specifications of the central processing units power supply modules and interface modules of the S7 400 How to configure assemble and wire these modules in an S7 400 or M7 400 system is described in the installation manuals for each system Required Basic Knowledge You will need a general knowledge of automation to understand this manual In addition you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions e g programming devices under Windows 95 98 2000 or NT operating systems Since S7 400 is configured with the STEP 7 basic software you have to have a good working knowl
492. ry 7 circuit block diagram 13 35 cyclic conversion of the ADC channels Ground Glossary 7 13 50 Ground short circuit analog input module 5 66 electrical installation 13 46 Grounded operation RS 485 repeater 10 4 individual start of an ADC channel 13 49 Grounding interrupt 13 53 for the analog inputs IF 961 AlO 13 36 p N E erer for the analog outputs IF 961 AIO 13 36 hin a aieape pedis cee ic i measuring range selection 13 33 output range selection 13 33 pin assignments 13 34 H starting up 13 46 Hardware interrupt Glossary 8 submodule ID 13 53 end of scan cycle technical specifications of digital modules 4 14 terminal connection diagram 13 34 when limit exceeded 5 68 unswitched channels 13 37 13 46 Hardware interrupt enable digital input IF 961 CT1 module 4 7 addressing Hardware interrupt lost characteristics analog input module 5 66 technical specifications 13 60 digital module 4 11 4 14 IF 961 DIO Hardware interrupt IF 961 AlO addressing Hot keys M7 400 11 19 acknowledgment register 13 27 digital input function 13 26 digital output function 13 27 l interrupt enable register 13 28 I O base M7 400 11 26 interrupt register 13 28 mode register 13 30 I O bus 2 5 Glossary 9 IEC 61131 2 selection register falling edge 13 29 i selection register rising edge 13 29 characteristics 13 23 pin assignments 13 24 technic
493. s 16 inputs for voltage current and temperature measurement 8 inputs for resistance measurement Unlimited measuring range selection 16 bit resolution Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Programmable end of scan cycle interrupt Analog section isolated from CPU The maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels and between the channel and the central ground point is 120 VAC S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 107 Analog Modules Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit CHO Bus S7 400 D a F D z 2 9 op Z 8 m CH14 Meas range Multiplexer Opto relay 5V Diagnostics Bus S7 400 OV Figure 5 35 Block Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 108 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Thermocouples Resistance
494. s 1 6 1 Zone 2 Einsatz der S7 400 im explosionsgefahrdeten Bereich Zone 2 Explosionsgefahrdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt Die Zonen werden nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfahigen Atmosphare unterschieden Zone Explosionsgefahr explosive Gasatmosphare tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in geschlossenen Raumen sicherer au erhalb der Zone 2 Bereich Standardanwendungen von dezentraler Peripherie Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise fur die Installation der SIMATIC S7 400 im explosionsgefahrdeten Bereich Weitere Informationen Weitere Informationen zu den verschiedenen S 7 400 Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch Fertigungsort Zulassung 1 20 Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche RheinbriickenstraRe 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Ex I3G EEXnAIIT3 T6 nach EN 50021 1999 Pr fnummer KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Hinweis Baugruppen mit der Zulassung x I3 G EExnAIlT3 76 d rfen nur in Automatisierungssystemen SIMATIC S7 400 der Geratekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Instandhaltung Fur eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt werden Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgefuhrt werden Besondere Bedingungen 1 Die SIMATIC S7 400 muss in einen Sc
495. s The power supply modules share certain common characteristics in addition to their special technical specifications The most important common characteristics are e Encapsulated design for use in mounting racks of the S7 400 system e Cooling via natural convection e Plug in connection of the supply voltage with AC DC coding e Protection class with protective conductor in accordance with IEC 60536 VDE 0106 Part 1 e Limitation of making current in accordance with NAMUR recommendation part 1 of August 1998 e Short circuit proof outputs e Monitoring of both output voltages If one of these voltages fails the power supply module signals a fault to the CPU e Both output voltages 5 VDC and 24 VDC share a common ground e Primary clocked e Battery backup as option The parameters set and the memory contents RAM are backed up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules In addition the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage e Operating and fault error LEDs on the front plate Warning A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply modules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 2 A5E00069467 07 Power Supply Modules Switching the Line Voltage Off On The power supply modules have a making current limiter in accordance with NAMUR Pow
496. s You will see which parameters you can modify from the list e in STEP7 e with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 refer to the STEP 7 manuals Table A 4 Parameters of the Analog Inout Modules Parameter Data Record Parameters Can Be Assigned No with SFC 55 STEP 7 End of scan cycle interrupt Yes Diagnostic interrupt enable Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1 you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input modules You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 7 6 0 peo 111111 Diagnostic interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable High Order Byte Low Order Byte High Order Byte Low Order Byte High Order Byte Low Order Byte Reference temperature in 0 01 C Upper limit value for channel 0 Lower limit value for channel 0 Low Order Byte High Order Byte Low Order Byte channel 7 Lower limit value for channel 7 High Order Byte Low Order Byte High Order Byte Low Order Byte Upper limit value for channel 15 Lower limit value for channel 15 High
497. s any current at 24 V and it interfaces with a maximum slaves only makes this voltage of available at the MPI DP 150 mA interface Number of connections for 32 1 diagnostic S7 functions for the connection programming device and operator control and monitoring Data volume per slave Max 244 bytes Consistency Max 128 bytes Configuration software STEP 7 DP slave No Deviations from the DP Interface Integrated in the CPU Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics Possibly extended SFC run times Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 8 13 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies Chapter Overview ee in Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies Cable Duct 6ES7408 0TA00 0AA0 ET The 120 230 VAC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1TB00 0XA0 9 5 The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1TA00 0XA0 Characteristics The cable duct and the fan subassembly have the following characteristics e The air inflow area is variable e Shield and cable clamping are possible In addition the fan subassembly has the following characteristics e Fans and filter frames can be replaced from the front during operation e The fan function is controlled by means of speed monitoring e Operation with filter frames is optional S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Mo
498. s W x H x D mm 25 Xx 290 x 210 Weight 0 65 kg Note The sum of the power losses of the EXM 478 expansion module and the interface submodules it contains must not exceed the maximum permissible power losses S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 14 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 3 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 6ES7 478 2CA00 0AC0 Characteristics The ATM 478 AT adapter module is used to accommodate a short AT module card The ATM 478 AT adapter module has a 120 pin connector on the left hand side and a 120 pin socket on the right hand side for connecting a further expansion module or a mass storage module Figure 12 7 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 15 M7 400 Expansions 12 3 1 Pin Assignments of the AT Module Pin Assignments The ATM 478 AT adapter module has a 98 pin standard direct connector for short AT modules see Figure 12 8 8 bit data 16 bit data Figure 12 8 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module 98 Pin Standard Direct Connector See the following table for the pin assignments of the 98 pin standard direct connector S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 12 16 A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions Table 12 5 Pin Assignments of the 98 Pin Standard D
499. s continued Diagnostic Message Possible Error Cause Wire break Lines interrupted Close circuit No external sensor supply Wire sensors with 10 to 18 kQ Channel not connected open Disable the Diagnostics Wire Break parameter for the channel in STEP 7 Connect channel Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module Remove the overload and replace the has blown and caused this fault fuse No sensor supply Overload of sensor supply Short circuit of sensor supply to M No Power supply L to module missing Oaa votades Fuse in module is defective S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 12 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 5 Interrupts of the Digital Modules Introduction This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules The following interrupts exist e Diagnostic Interrupt e Hardware interrupt Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of the modules starting at Section 4 7 to find out which digital modules have interrupt capability The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online help system for STEP 7 where they are described in greater detail Enabling Interrupts The interrupts are not preset in other words they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment You enable the interrupts in STEP 7 refer to Se
500. s CTRL ALT ES C to enter setup Figure 11 7 Warm Restart Window for a CPU S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 18 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 2 BIOS Hot Keys BIOS Hot Keys After power up the BIOS offers the user a range of functions under MS DOS These functions are executed by pressing the following groups of keys simultaneously Table 11 7 BIOS Hot Keys with German and English Key Assignments English Key Assignments German Key Assignments Function CTRL at J DeL j at J ENTF Warm restart of the module Al Cold restart of the module power off on with initialization of all blocks cTRL sTRG IDE hard disk in standby mode CTRL _at_ Paon PGDN sTRG _Bild J Screen saver on dark screen Note These functions can be overlaid by other operating systems or user programs such as Windows S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 19 CPUs for M7 400 11 4 3 Operator Inputs in the BIOS Setup Definition of the Setup Fields 11 20 Within the BIOS setup there are fields in which you can make entries or selections These fields have the following functions Editbox You can enter desired values in this field L____ The field content must be deleted first with BacksPace or List box This field _J lists for example all menu pages in the setup menu from which you can select a
501. s Location e CSA 213 Hazardous Location APPROVED for Use in e Cl 1 Div 2 GP A B C D T4A e Cl 1 Zone 2 GP IIC T4 Please read the notes below or cULus Approvals Hazardous Location for Relay Modules UL CULUS Listed 7RA9 INT CONT EQ FOR HAZ LOC C US Underwriters Laboratories Inc nach HAZ LOC UL 908 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Pocess Control Equipment e UL 1604 Hazardous Location e CSA 213 Hazardous Location APPROVED for Use in e Cl 1 Div 2 GP A B C D T4A e Cl 1 Zone 2 AEx nC IIC T4 e Cl 1 Zone 2 Ex nC IIC T4 Please read the notes below Note This plant has to be mounted according to the NEC National Electric Code Stipulations When used in environments according to class I division 2 see above S7 400 must be mounted in a housing that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 1 5 General Technical Specifications cuULu requirements on hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs The power supply to the backup battery of a CPU must be via a non incendive plug The figure below portrays the concept of such connection Battery or E CPU with connector Power supply unit ext batt Cc Cable capacity Lc Cable inductance Figure 1 1 Power supply to the backup battery The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics
502. s an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Table 4 16 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Hardware interrupt Yes no No Destination CPU for interrupt 1104 Diagnostics e Wire break Yes no No Static Channel Trigger for hardware interrupt e Rising positive edge Yes no Dynamic Channel e Falling negative edge Yes no Input delay 0 5 ms DC 3 DC Static Channel group 3 ms DC 20 ms DC AC 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings 3 If you assign 0 5 ms then you should not parameterize a diagnosis because the internal processing time for diagnostic functions can be gt 0 5 ms Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out To ensure that a wire break check is carried out you require an external sensor circuit using a resistor of 18 to 56 kQ The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor This additional resistor is not required in the following cases e If two wire BEROs are used e lf you don t parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis S7 400 M7 400 Progra
503. s of 07 99 in the S7 400 and in the M7 400 Characteristics The IF 964 DP interface submodule is used for connecting distributed I O via PROFIBUS DP The submodule has an isolated RS485 interface The maximum transmission rate is 12 Mbps The permissible cable length depends on the transmission rate and the number of nodes In the case of a point to point connection with a speed of 12 Mbps a cable length of 100 m is possible and with a speed of 9 6 Kbps a cable length of 1 200 m is possible The system can be expanded to 125 stations s w gt lt A 964 2AA00 0ACO Figure 13 25 IF 964 DP Interface Submodule S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 61 Interface Submodules Additional Front Cover The IF 964 DP interface submodule with order number 6ES7964 2AA01 O0ABO has an additional front cover which is similar to the front cover of the IF 960HF synchronization submodule As long as this second front cover is not screwed on the submodule interface on the S7 400 CPU remains off circuit Only when you insert an IF submodule and screw on the second front cover is the submodule interface on circuit When using the submodule in an M7 the additional front cover has no function it should however be mounted for technical maintenance reasons and due to improved EMC properties Note Even in an S7 400 CPU you may remove or insert the IF 964 DP interface
504. sed channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 86 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 55 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description Type of Sensor Module U Voltage 80 mV You will find the digitized analog 250 mV values in Section 5 3 1 in the 500 mV voltage measuring range 1V 2 5V 5V 1to5V 10V 2DMU Current two wire 4 to 20 mA To supply these transmitters with transmitter current you must connect 24 V to the L and M front connector terminals You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 4DMU Current 0 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog four wire transmitter 4 to 20 mA values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 20 mA R 4L Resistors You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the four conductor resistance measuring range connection R 3L Resistors three conductor connection S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 87 Analog Modules Table 5 55 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit continued Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Descr
505. sentation for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog InputS 0 0c ccc cee eee eens Analog Value Representation for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Outputs Diagnostics Interrupts and Submodule ID 00005 Technical Specifications nanan nannaa ee teen ees IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule for M7 300 400 6GES7961 3AA00 OACO 0 ce eee What Can the IF961 CT1 Interface Submodule Do 00 Addressing and Interrupts 0 ccc eens Technical Specifications 0 0 cee eee teen ees S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 XVII Contents 13 9 IF 964 DP Interface Submodule for S7 400 and M7 400 13 9 1 Pin Assignments 20 0 ccc eee eee eee eens 13 9 2 Addressing and Interrupts 0 ccc eee eens 13 9 3 Technical Specifications 0 cc eee eee ees A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules 0000 cece eee eee ees A 1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program A 2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules 000ee eee eae A 3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules 000000 A 4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 00 c00eeeeeeeee B Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules 202 c cece eee eee B 1 Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program aicedccc sxde birds da cee dameeeg
506. set Address for the Interrupt Enable Register IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Enable Register IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Selection Register Rising Edge IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Rising Edge IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Selection Register Falling Edge IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Falling Edge IF 961 DIO Offset Address for the Mode Register IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Bits in the Mode Register IF 961 DIO Meaning of the Signals of the X1 Socket of the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule Meaning of the Data Bits in the Analog Output Function IF 961 AlO Meaning of the Input Bits in the Analog Input Function IF 961 AlO Meaning of the Control Bits in the Analog Input Function IF 961 AlO Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Analog Input Function Voltage and Current Measuring Range Representation of the Analog Output Ranges Voltage and Current Output Ranges 2 cece eee eee X1 Socket IF 964 DP 9 Pin Sub D Connector SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters of the Analog Inout Modules Codes of the Module Types S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 0
507. sione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa essere superata per pi del 40 da parte di transienti Campo termico ambientale da 0 C a 60 C All interno del contenitore va apportata in un luogo ben visibile dopo l apertura una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento Attenzione Il contenitore pu rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo ad esempio per una diagnostica a vista In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore non disinnestare o innestare unit e non staccare connessioni elettriche connettori Non necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se noto che nonce un atmosfera a rischio di esplosione Elenco delle unit omologate La lista con le unit omologate si trova in Internet al sito http www4 ad siemens de view cs all ID di voce 13702947 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications AS5E00069467 07 1 29 General Technical Specifications 1 6 6 Gebruik van de S7 400 in het explosief gebied zone 2 Zone 2 Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones Bij de zones wordt onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een explosieve atmosfeer Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten korte duur vertrekken e Buiten de zone 2 Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
508. sistance type sensors for thermocouple 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 for voltage measurement ranges 5 12 for voltage measuring ranges 5 11 5 13 for voltage output ranges 5 26 5 29 _ Analog digital conversion 13 44 Analog to digital conversion 5 35 E ay Area of ap plication 7 2 ATM 478 12 15 dimensions of the AT module 12 21 pin assignment of the AT module 12 16 power consumptions calculation 12 19 technical specifications 12 19 Auxiliary voltage missing analog input module 5 65 digital module B Backplane bus Glossary 1 Backup battery Glossary 1 shipping and storage conditions 1 12 technical specifications 3 6 Backup tme 37 3 7 calculating Backup voltage external Glossary 1 Basic error limit 5 33 Basic execution time analog input channels 5 36 analog output channels 5 38 Battery Siehe backup batter BIOS setup M7 400 11 16 setup page Hard Disk 11 33 _ setup page IF modules 11 25 setup page Security 11 30 setup page System 11 38 setup page Timeout Function 11 29 setup page User Help 11 24 BIOS M7 400 Bus Glossary 1 Bus connector 11 15 Bus segment Glossary 2 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data B 3 C Cable length 7 3 selecting 7 7 Cable length selector switch 7 5 Cables for analog cr switcht aT Causes of errors and remedies ana
509. special measures are required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the S7 400 M7 400 systems The lithium component of the backup battery is less than 0 5 g S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Storing Backup Batteries Backup batteries must be stored in a cool dry place The maximum storage time is 10 years Warning Improper handling of backup batteries can cause injury and material damage If backup batteries are not treated properly they can explode and cause severe burning Please observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7 400 M7 400 programmable controllers never charge them never heat them never throw them in the fire never damage them mechanically drill squeeze etc S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications 1 4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the S7 400 M7 400 Operating Conditions The S7 400 M7 400 is designed for weather protected use as a permanent installation The S7 400 M7 400 fulfills the requirements for use in accordance with IEC 60721 3 3 e Class 3M3 mechanical requirements e Class 3K3 ambient climatic conditions Use with Additional Measures The S7 400 M7 400 for example must not be used without taking additional measures e In locations exposed to a high degree of io
510. ss input image and the process output image The process input image PII is read by the input modules before the operating system scans the user program The process output image PIQ is transferred to the output modules at the end of program scanning Product status Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product status The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions modifications due to production reasons use of new component parts and components and troubleshooting PROFIBUS DP Digital analog and intelligent I O modules and a wide range of field devices complying with EN 50170 Part 3 such as drives or valve terminals are moved by the automation system to the process on site over a distance of up to 23 km The modules and field devices are connected to the programmable controller by means of the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus and addressed in the same way as central O Programmable controller Programmable controllers PLCs are electronic controllers whose function is sto red as a program on the control device The design and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the controller The architecture of a programmable controller is similar to that of a computer it consists of a gt CPU central processing unit with memory input output modules and an internal bus system The I O and the programming language are designed to meet the requirements of open loop control
511. sstalk between the gt 130 dB inputs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 133 Analog Modules Operational limit in the entire temperature range with reference to the input range Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts e Voltage input e Current input e Thermocouple 0 3 0 5 Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U 3 5 C 2 7 C 1 8 C 3 3 C 3 2 C 2 4 C ELC 0 8 C 2 5 C Be ge AG Basic error operational limit at 25 C referred to input range e Voltage input e Current input e Thermocouple Temperature error with reference to the input range Linearity error with reference to the input range Repeatability in steady state at 25 C with reference to the input range 5 134 0 05 0 15 Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U 0 015 K e Hardware interrupt e Diagnostic Interrupt Diagnostic functions e Group error display For internal fault For external fault Diagnostic information can be displayed Parameters can be assigned Programmable Programmable Programmable Red LED INTF Red LED EXTF Yes Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range rated values Input resistance e Voltage e Current e Thermocouple Maximum input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Maximum i
512. stance Thermometer Connected to Channel 0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 58 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 13 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs Introduction You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current and voltage This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow Cables for Analog Signals For the analog signals you should use shielded and twisted pair cables The cables Qy and S and M and S respectively are to be twisted together This reduces the interference Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables If there are potential differences between the cable ends an equipotential bonding current which can flow over the shield can cause interference of the analog signals In such a case you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only Isolated Analog Output Modules With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and chassis ground You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference Ujso can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mayna and chassis ground By means of an equipotential bonding conductor between the Mana terminal and chassis ground make sure that Uiso does not ex
513. stances S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 7 Glossary Ground to To ground means to connect an electrically conductive part via a grounding system to the grounding electrode one or more conductive parts having a very good contact to ground Hardware interrupt Input delay A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt triggering modules in response to a particular event in the process limit value violation the module has completed the cyclic change of its channels The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU In accordance with the priority of this interrupt the gt organization block assigned to it is processed Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules The input delay is used to suppress injected interference Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay are suppressed The set input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be obtained from the technical specifications of the module A high input delay suppresses long interfering pulses whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the encoder and the module For example a high input delay has to be set for long unshielded supply conductors to the encoder longer than 100m Integration time The integration time is the inverse value of the interference frequency suppression in ms Interface multipoint gt MPI
514. stant Current Source Each 0 0 cece eee eee 13 41 Four Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers Resistances with a Common Constant Current Source 20000e eee 13 41 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 20 13 21 13 22 13 23 13 24 13 25 Contents Connecting Loads Actuators via a Two Wire Connection to Current QUID oai arur havin opr oe ee aa ee aaa ARE Pelee ee Connecting Loads Actuators via a Three Wire Connection to a Voltage Output 2 eee eee eee eens Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module 00 e eee Response Time of the Analog Output Channels 0 IF 961 CT1 Interface Submodule 0 0 cee ee eee IF 964 DP Interface Submodule nananana nananana Data Record 1 of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data 0 0 0 cee Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16x 24 VDC Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421 DI 16x24 VDC Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of th
515. sts how to remedy the faults The status of the BAF BATTF BATT1F and BATT2F LEDs is not relevant here Table 3 8 INTF DC5V DC24V LEDs LED defective TE external supply after approximately 1 minute if Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or illegal Disconnect from mains and reconnect necessary remove external supply Power supply module operated in Install the power supply module in the wrong slot correct slot slot 1 Short circuit or overload on 5 V Switch off the power supply module remove the source of the short circuit after approximately 3 seconds the power supply module can be switched on with the standby switch or via the power system H Overvoltage on 24 V Check if the supply is external if not replace power supply module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 3 13 Power Supply Modules Table 3 8 INTF DC5V DC24V LEDs continued H D Short circuit or overload on 5 V and Check load on the power supply 24 V module Possibly remove modules D H D Short circuit or overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply module Possibly remove modules If the standby switch is at the Remove all modules position illegal external supply on 5V Determine which module is faulty If the standby switch is at the Check load on the power supply position short circuit or overload on module Possibly remove modules Voltage restored after short circuit or Press FMR momen
516. t Modules 0 2 00 eee eee 4 3 2 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules 4 4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules 0 c cece eee 4 5 Interrupts of the Digital Modules 0 00 ccc cee eens 4 6 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs 00 e0ee 4 7 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 1BLOO OAAO 0 ee ee teens 4 17 4 8 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 32 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 1BLO1 OAAO 0 ee eens 4 20 4 9 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 7BHOO OABO 0 ee eee eens 4 9 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI 16 x 24VDC 4 9 2 Behavior of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24VDC 0 cee eee 4 10 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDC 6ES7421 7BHOO OABO 0 eee eens 4 10 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI16 x 24VDC 4 10 2 Behavior of the SM 421 DI 16 24 VDC 4 11 Digital Inout Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 VAC 6ES7421 5EHOO OAAO 0 ent e eee 4 41 4 12 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 6ES7 421 7DHOO OABO 0 ccc eee eee eee 4 44 4 12 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 4 47 4 13 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI 16 x 120 230 VUC GES7 421 1FHOO OAAO 0 ccc eee ee eee eens 4 50 4 14 Digital Input Module SM 421 DI16 x 120 230 VUC 6ES7421 1FH20 OAAO 0 ccc cere e
517. t connector is not inserted S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 73 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Module Process 1L monitorin 1 9 1L 5 Monitoring of internal voltage E 3 1L Y Channel 5 ia status 6 Se Diagnostics E gt E 8 Output status hl A 10 E i E 12 1M 13 l 14 2L N N PMO N a a w N O O O NOOA N N o A MN N N O ie m eb O a 0 ep Q Cc AS Q x O 39 an OWWwownwno WwWNnN DN N Oo ff WMS O O OW 4L AA A A A A A AOO oar WN O O O 47 7 e V Figure 4 18 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 74 A5E00069467 07 Technical Specifications of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D in millimeters Weight Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable e Unshielded Shielded Voltages Currents Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L Rated load voltage L Total current of the outputs per group Up to 40 C Up to 60 C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with e Channels against
518. t protection of the output e Threshold on S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Min L 0 8 V Max 0 5 mA 48 Q to 4 kQ Possible only outputs of the same group Possible only outputs of the same group Possible Max 100 Hz Max 2 Hz 0 5 A 5 mA to 0 6 A Max 2 Hz Typ L 45 V Electronically cyclic Typ 0 75 A to 1 5 A 4 75 Digital Modules Time Frequency Internal preparation time between backplane bus and input of the output driver Up to hardware release 03 independent of enable max 100 us diagnostics diagnostic interrupt substitute value Up to hardware release 04 e without enable diagnostics max 60 us diagnostic interrupt substitute value e with enable diagnostics diagnostic interrupt substitute value max 100 us 1 The switching time of the output driver is added to the overall runtime on the module lt 100 us for resistive load S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 76 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 20 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A Parameter Assignment You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 5 7 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A in
519. tage in using backup batteries in the power supply modules in ER1 and ER2 Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU The battery monitoring function of a power supply module installed in the ER1 or ER2 should therefore always be switched off Suitable Modules for ER1 and ER2 You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks e All power supply modules e Receive IMs e All signal modules provided the above mentioned restrictions are observed However Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461 1 receive IM S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 2 9 Racks Structure of ER1 and ER2 E 290 mm 190 mm
520. taires sur les divers modules 87 400 se trouvent dans le manuel Lieu de production Siemens AG Bereich A amp D stliche Rheinbr ckenstra e 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany Homologation x 3G EExnAIlIT3 T6 selon EN 50021 1999 Num ro de contr le KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Nota Les modules homologu s 913 G EEx nA lI T3 T6 ne peuvent tre utilis s que dans des automates SIMATIC S7 400 de cat gorie 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 24 A5E00069467 07 Entretien General Technical Specifications Si une r paration est n cessaire le module concern doit tre exp di au lieu de production La reparation ne doit tre effectu e qu en ce lieu Conditions particuli res 1 Le SIMATIC S7 400 doit tre install dans une armoire ou un boitier m tallique Ceux ci doivent assurer au moins l indice de protection IP 54 II faut alors tenir compte des conditions d environnement dans lesquelles l appareil est install Le boitier doit faire l objet d une declaration de conformit du fabricant pour la zone 2 selon EN 500271 Si dans les conditions d exploitation une temperature gt 70 C est atteinte au niveau du cable ou de l entr e du cable dans ce boitier ou bien si la temperature au niveau de la d rivation des conducteurs peut tre gt 80 C les capacites de resistance thermique des cables doivent corespondre aux temperatures effectivement mesur es Les entr es de c
521. tary contact overload on 5 V if faults occur in pushbutton operation Flashing light changes to constant light Dynamic overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply module Possibly remove modules Voltage restored after short circuit or Press FMR momentary contact overload on 24 V if faults occur in pushbutton operation Flashing light changes to constant light Dynamic overload on 24 V Check load on the power supply module Possibly remove modules Voltage restored after short circuit or Press FMR momentary contact overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults occur pushbutton in operation Flashing light changes to constant light Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V Check load on the power supply module Possibly remove modules D LED is dark L LED lights up F LED flashing If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the overload has been removed remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then switch it on again If the module stills does not start up you must replace it This applies to 6 S7407 O0KA01 0AA0 release 3 and for 6 S7407 O0KROO 0AAO release lt 5 Depending on the short circuit resistance If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on the system has not powered up lf either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than 1 or 2 seconds after it is switched on the power supply module will not start up S7 400 M7 400 Progr
522. terference emission of RAM Glossary 14 RAM error analog input module 5 66 RC element Glossary 14 Read analog values STEP 7 blocks 5 1 Read only M7 400 11 30 Reboot Glossary 14 Redundant operation 3 4 Redundant power supply modules 3 4 Reference channel error Glossary 15 analog input module 5 66 Reference junction analog input module 5 41 Reference junction temperature with thermocouples compensating 5 54 Reference potential Glossary 15 Reference temperature Glossary 15 analog input module 5 41 Repeater Glossary 15 Siehe auch RS 485 repeater Resistance thermometer connections 13 41 Resistance thermometer connection to analog input module 5 50 Resistor connection to analog input module 5 7 Glossary 15 Resolution lossary 15 Response time analog output 13 45 Restart Glossary 16 Retentivity Glossary 16 RS 485 repeater 10 1 appearance 10 3 application 10 2 definition 10 2 grounded 10 4 grounded operation 10 4 rules 10 2 ungrounded 10 4 ungrounded operation 10 4 Run time calibration error analog input module 5 66 S S5 modules configuring 7 10 S7 basic communication Glossary 16 S7 communication Glossary 16 Scan time Glossary 16 analog input channels 5 35 analog output channels 5 37 SDB Glossary 18 Secondary cache size M7 400 Select boot sequence M7 400 Select submodule M7 400 Sensor connection
523. terrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called refer to Section 4 5 Reading out Diagnostic Messages You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnosis refer to the STEP 7 online help system Diagnostic Message in the Measured Value of Analog Input Modules Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFy irrespective of the parameter assignment when an error is detected This measured value means either Overflow Malfunction or a channel is disabled Diagnostic Message via the INTF and EXTF LEDs Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF internal fault and EXTF external fault The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been eliminated Refer to the technical specifications of the modules starting at Section 5 18 to find out which analog input modules have these fault LEDs S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 63 Analog Modules Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules with diagnostics capability You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules Table 5 46 Diag
524. terrupts are not preset in other words they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment You enable interrupts in STEP 7 refer to Section 5 7 Special Feature The Module is Inserted in ER 1 ER 2 Note If you use the analog module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set the parameters for the input of all the interrupts to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 Diagnostic Interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts then active error events initial occurrence of the error and departing error events message after troubleshooting are reported by means of an interrupt The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block OB 82 In the user program you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited When OB 82 is exited the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 67 Analog Modules Hardware Interrupt with Trigger Upper or Lower Limit Exceeded Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value If the process signal for example the temperature leaves this working range the module triggers a hardware interrupt provided the interrupt is enabled The CPU interrupts execution of the user
525. the CPU that are not tied to a specific control task Parameters 1st tag of a logic block 2nd tag for setting the characteristics of a module one or more per module When delivered to the customer each module has a practical basic setting for its parameters which the user can modify in STEP 7 PG gt Programming device PLC Programmable controller Point to point connection Only two nodes are physically linked with one another in a point to point connection This type of communication link is used if the use of a communication network is not recommended or when for example different types of partners such as a PLC and a process computer are to be connected S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 12 A5E00069467 07 Glossary Priority class The operating system of an S7 CPU has a maximum of 28 priority classes program execution levels for cyclic program scanning or program scanning controlled by hardware interrupt for example Each priority class is assigned organization blocks in which the user can program a response By default the OBs have different priorities determining the order in which they are executed or interrupted in the event that they are activated simultaneously The user can change the default priorities Process image The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in a process image A distinction is made between the proce
526. the climatic range S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 118 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Unused Channels Unused channels can usually be left open Put the measuring range modules in position A You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious interference by short circuiting the channels Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 69 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description Type of Sensor Module aoe U Voltage 2DMU Current two wire transmitter 4DMU Current four wire transmitter S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 25 mV 50 mV 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1V 2 5V 5V 1to5V 10 V 4 to 20 mA 5 mA 10 mA O to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the voltage measuring range To supply these transmitters with current you must connect 24 V to the L and M front connector terminals You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Sec
527. the exact error cause in STEP 7 PLC gt Module Information from the diagnostic buffer Diagnostic data All the diagnostic events that occur are collected in the CPU and entered in the gt diagnostic buffer If there is an error OB it is started Diagnostic interrupt Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors to the gt CPU by means of diagnostic interrupts The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the course of a diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics Generic term for gt system diagnostics process error diagnostics and user defined diagnostics Direct access This is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the I O bus to modules bypassing the process image S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 4 A5E00069467 07 Glossary Direct communication Direct communication involves assigning local input address areas of an intelligent DP slave for example CPU 315 2 with PROFIBUS DP connection or of a DP masier to the input address areas of a PROFIBUS DP partner The intelligent DP slave or DP master receives the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner sends to its DP master via these assigned input address areas DP master A node with a master function in the PROFIBUS DP A master that behaves in accordance with the EN 50170 with the DP protocol is a DP master The bus access right token is only passed amongst masters The slaves in this case DP slaves can onl
528. the first instruction in OB1 In the M7 400 At rebooting the process input image is read User programs continue to be processed and notified about the STARTUP and RUN modes Reference ground gt Ground S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 14 A5E00069467 07 Glossary Reference channel error Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules Using this parameter you can enable the group error message of the reference junction when thermocouples are used A reference channel error occurs when thermocouples are used and the following occurs e fan error occurs for example wire break on a reference channel on which a thermal resistor RTD is connected to compensate for temperature drift channel 0 e Ifthe reference temperature is outside the permissible range of values Each input channel that is assigned the RTD on Channel 0 reference junction has a reference channel error in the situation described above The measured temperature is no longer compensated Reference potential Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved are viewed and measured Reference temperature Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules The reference temperature is the temperature at the reference junction in 1 100 C climatic temperature range when thermocouples are used The reference temperature makes it possible to measure the temperature correctly using thermocouples The temperature at the
529. the front connector before you change the fuse S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 68 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 18 1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Parameter Assignment You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 5 7 Parameters of the SM 421 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5 A in the following table Table 4 17 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 16x 20 125 VDC 1 5A Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Enable e Diagnostic interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module Destination TO 1 to 4 Static Module Interrupt Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV Dynamic Module Keep last value ay Diagnostics e No load voltage L vaso Channel e Short circuit to M Static group mene Channel 1 If you use the module in ER 1 ER 2 you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not available in ER 1 ER 2 2 Only in the CC central controller is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings Assigning the No Load Voltage L Diagnosis to Channel Groups You can only set the No Load Voltage L diagnosis separately for each channel group In other words the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs O to 7 and the setting for chann
530. the purpose the submodules can be damaged Use only the MEM 478 DRAM memory submodules for the main memory Inserting the Memory Submodules The sections Installing an M7 400 and Replacing Modules and Submodules in the User Manual explain how to insert or replace the memory submodules S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 13 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 6 Expansion Socket Introduction The CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 are each equipped with an expansion socket The ISA bus is continued via the expansion socket Which Expansions Can Be Connected One EXM 478 extension module with up to three interface submodules one MSM 478 mass storage module with diskette and hard disk drives or one ATM 478 AT adapter module for short AT cards can be connected direct to the CPUs A total of up to three expansions can be connected in series to the CPU If three EXM 478 expansion modules are connected up to 11 interface submodules can be operated together with the slots on each CPU see Section 11 3 4 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 14 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 11 3 7 Multipoint Interface MPI X1 Interface The X1 interface of the CPU 486 3 and CPU 488 3 for connecting devices such as PCs programming devices is a multipoint interface MPI and is connected via a 9 pin sub D connector Suitable Devices You can connect the following at the MPI
531. ther devices conforming to the standard Additional S7 DP masters PG OP S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 63 Interface Submodules 13 9 2 Addressing and Interrupts In the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable modules for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule You require the base address for assigning parameters to the driver software Intermediate Memory The IF 964 DP interface submodule provides intermediate storage of the data in the dual port RAM The size of the memory and its address can be assigned via the driver used Protected Mode 1 out of 8 areas of 512 Kbytes in the address area CO 00 004 bis FF FF FFy Note The memory address must not collide with other system addresses The IF 964 VGA interface submodule for example occupies the addresses from C 00 004 to C 7F FFy Interrupt Request The interrupt line of the interface submodule is switched with a processor interrupt per software parameter assignment Addressing in the S7 400 I O Address Area The interface submodule can be accessed by the respective interface in an assigned address window Interrupt Request The interrupt line of the interface submodule is per
532. thout 5 V transfer via IM 460 0 and IM 461 0 Remote connection via IM 460 3 and IM 461 3 102 25 m Remote connection via IM 460 4 and IM 461 4 Terminator The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line To do this plug in the appropriate terminator in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line Unused front connectors in a send IM do not have to be terminated The IM 461 1 with the order number 6ES7 461 1BA01 OAA0 does not require a terminator Table 6 2 Terminators for the Receive IMs IM 461 0 6ES7461 0AA00 7AA0 IM 461 1 6ES7461 1BA00 7AA0 IM 461 3 6ES7461 3AA00 7AA0 IM 461 4 6ES7461 4AA00 7AA0 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 4 A5E00069467 07 Interface Modules The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs receive IMs and terminators Receive IM Terminator Receive IM Send IM Figure 6 1 Example Configuration with Send IMs Receive IMs and Termi
533. tic parts that function among other things as guides when swinging the modules into place e A backplane bus an I O bus and if necessary a communication bus with bus connector e Connection for local ground Figure 2 1 shows the mechanical configuration of a rack UR1 Aluminum carrier Plastic parts A ONOONO oer 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 o llo llolileollo Connection for local ground Bus connector covered when shipped Figure 2 1 Structure of a Rack with 18 Slots
534. tion 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 5 119 Analog Modules Table 5 69 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit continued Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description Type of Sensor Module Sero R 3L Resistor three conductor terminal R 4L Resistor four conductor terminal TC L Thermocouple linear temperature measurement RTD 3L thermal resistor linear three conductor terminal temperature measurement RTD 4L thermal resistor linear four conductor terminal temperature measurement Default Settings 300 Q 600 Q 6000 Q max 5000 2 48Q 150 Q 300 Q 600 Q 6000 Q max 5000 2 Pt 100 climatic Pt 200 climatic Pt 500 climatic Pt 1000 climatic Ni 100 climatic Ni 1000 climatic Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 1000 standard You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the resistance measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the temperature range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 5 3 1 in the temperature range The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are Voltage for the measuring method and 10 V for the measuring range You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7 9 120 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Modu
535. tion of the module description S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 M7 400 Expansions 12 4 1 LPT1 Parallel Port Characteristics The MSM 478 mass storage module has an AT compatible parallel port LPT for connecting a printer with Centronics interface The parallel port can also be used as a bi directional data interface There is a 25 pin sub D socket connector on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable This parallel port is always configured by the BIOS as LPT1 regardless of the slot occupied by the MSM 478 mass storage module Addressing I O address of the parallel port LPT O3BCy to 03BEp Device name LPT1 Interrupt Request The parallel port LPT supplies the interrupt request IRQ7 Pin Assignment of the Parallel Port There is a 25 pin sub D socket connector on the frontside of the submodule for plugging in the connecting cable See Table 12 7 for the pin assignments Cable Length The cable length on the LPT1 parallel port should not exceed approximately 3 m S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 12 23 M7 400 Expansions 12 24 Table 12 7 MSM 478 Parallel Port Socket X1 25 Pin Sub D Socket M o pee oo o pe oo o per oo ep o a a Note Operational ground GND signal at the COMa or COMb ports is referenced to internal ground Suitable measures may be required on the process side t
536. tions Dimensions W x H x D mm 482 5 x 109 5 x235 Weight ca 1200 g S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 9 4 A5E00069467 07 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies 9 3 The 120 230 VAC Fan Subassembly 6ES7408 1TB00 0XA0 Operator Controls and Indicators on the 120 230 VAC Fan Subassembly Relay contacts 1 2 3 Relay contacts 4 5 6 Quick release lock LEDs F1 F2 F3 230 A Voltage selector switch 120 120V 250mAT 230V 160mAT Fuse N compartment Figure 9 3 Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 120 230 VAC 6ES7408 1 TBOO 0XA0 Fuse Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links 5 x 20 mm conforming to DIN e 250 mAT for 120 V e 160 mAT for 230 V The fuse for the 230 V range is already installed on shipping from the factory Note If you change the voltage range you must also insert the fuse for this voltage range in the fan subassembly You will find a description of how to change the fuse in the Installation Manual Chapter 9 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 0
537. tment for one or two backup batteries Use of these batteries is optional Function of the Backup Batteries If backup batteries have been installed the parameters set and the memory contents RAM will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and programmable modules if the supply voltage fails The battery voltage must be within the tolerance range In addition the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after power on Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage Power Supply Modules With Two Backup Batteries Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries If you use two batteries and set the switch to 2BATT the power supply module defines one of the two batteries as the backup battery This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty When the backup battery is completely discharged the system switches to the reserve battery which is then in turn used as the backup battery for the duration of its life The status backup battery is also stored in the event of a power failure Battery Type Only batteries approved by Siemens must be used see Appendix C Spare Parts The batteries can form a passivation layer Depassivation takes place when the batteries are inserted in the power supply module Technical Specifications of the Backup Battery 1 x lithium AA Rated capacity 1 9 Ah S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers
538. tput Modules 0000 a eae 4 8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules 0 4 9 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures 000 cee eee 4 10 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24VDC 4 11 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 421 DITO 324A NOG nos dnevrany ceed stacdocevenedbarcroesebsiseernnsei 4 29 4 12 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 VDO wccdtaeda kane bs Ancien iie edwin a aaa ea 4 30 4 13 Parameters of the SM 421 DI16 x 24VDC 4 36 4 14 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L of the SM 421 DI16 x 24VDC 4 15 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421 DI16 x 24VDC 4 39 4 16 Parameters of the SM 421 DI 16 x 24 60 VUC 4 47 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications XXIV A5E00069467 07 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 9 5 5 6 o 5 8 5 9 5 10 Contents Parameters of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 125 VDC 1 5A 4 69 Parameters of the SM 422 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A 6ES87422 7BL00 OABO sca ccsccnnses aus weaees oueas een nee baneo bas Dependence of the Output Values on the Operatin
539. tput value reached Figure 5 6 Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels Settling Time The settling time t to t3 in other words the time elapsing from application the converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output is load dependent A distinction is made between resistive capacitive and inductive loads For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned starting at Section 5 25 Response Time 5 38 The response time t4 to tz in other words the time elapsing from application of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached at the analog output in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the settling time You have a worst case situation if shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted cycle time S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment Introduction Analog modules can have different characteristics You can set the characteristics of the modules by means of parameter assignment Tools for Parameter Assignment You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7 You must perform parameter assignment in STO
540. transfer Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4 3 IM 461 0 gt IM 461 0 Chain length max 3 m Expansion with 5 V local transfer Expansion rack ER 1 5 IM 461 1 Chain length max 1 5 m Remote expansion Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4 5 9 IM 461 3 F 9 IM 461 3 Chain length max 102 25 m Expansion rack ER 1 Expansion rack ER 4 IM 461 4 IM 461 4 Chain length max 605 m S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 3 Interface Modules Rules for Connection When you connect a central rack to expansion racks you must observe the following rules e You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7 400 to one CR e The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them The rack number must be set on the coding switch of the receive IM Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned Numbers must not be duplicated e You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR However only two send IMs with 5 V transfer are allowed in one CR e Each chain connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs without 5 V transfer or one ER with 5 V transfer e The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks meaning the CR and ER numbers 1 to 6 e The maximum total cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be exceeded Connection type Maximum total line length Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 Local connection wi
541. tup Page What is the Purpose of the Setup Page If you have expanded your CPU with expansion modules you can configure the interface submodules used in the expansion modules on this setup page See the Interface Submodules and M7 400 Expansions chapters for the settings you require You should only change the settings if you need to otherwise the default settings should be used Representation of Information Information cannot be edited It is shown on this setup page in gray type The gray type is not available in Remote Setup and is replaced there with black type S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 25 CPUs for M7 400 Accepting Edited Values Only the values for which the relevant interface submodule has been designed are accepted by the system in the edit boxes If for example you enter three values under Interrupt Source and the interface submodule only has one interrupt only the first value will be significant Any changed values are only saved when you confirm them with the key or with sHIFT_ TAB __J only locally not under Remote Setup Select Submodule Number Here you enter the consecutive number for the submodule receptacle containing the interface submodule or you select the number using the cursor control keys i N In the M7 400 you can enter submodule receptacle numbers 0 to 14 if the maximum possible three EXM 478 expansion modules
542. ture measurement You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and by means of the Measuring Type parameter in STEP 7 Circuit Variants for the Channels Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module There are therefore restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 7 as shown in the following table Table 5 52 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n 1 of the SM 431 Al8 amp x 14 Bit Meas Method Disa Voltage Current Current R 4L R 3L RTD 4L RTD 3L TC L bled 4 DMU 2 DMU Disabled Voltage Current four wire transmitter Current two wire transmitter Resistor four conductor Resistor rae sont ee O S D S a S Thermal resistor four conductor Cx Cald E E a A ee a Thermal resistor three conductor Thermocouples Example If you select current two wire transmitter for channel 6 you can then only deactivate the measuring method or set current two wire transmitter for channel 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 85 Analog Modules Wiring for Resistance and Temperature Measurement The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Table 5 53 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement with the SM 431 Al 8 x 14 Bit Measuring Type Parameter Pe
543. u can only connect one EU per line The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460 1 and IM 461 1 You must not use a power supply module in the EU Note If you connect an EU via a local link with 5 V transmission ungrounded operation is prescribed for the EU see Installation Manual Chapter 4 Parameter Assignment for the Mounting Rack Number Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module you must set the number of the mounting rack in which the receive IM is installed The permitted range is 1 to 21 Setting Changing the Number Proceed as follows 1 Put the power supply module in the CC into the position Output voltage 0 V 2 Enter the number using the DIP switch 3 Switch the power supply module on again S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 6 11 Interface Modules Operator Controls and Indicators on the Send IM EXTF LED Lights up in the event of an external fault Line 1 or line 2 is faulty al Ci LED Line 1 via front connector X1 connection 1 is correct green Ci LED A module has not yet completed the initialization process flashing green C2 LED Line 2 via front connector X2 connection 2 is correct green C2 LED A module has not yet completed the initialization process flashing green Front Connector output
544. ubmodule is addressed with the M7 300 400 reserved I O address area starting from C000p Addressing in the M7 300 400 Reserved I O Address Area The base address depends on the interface submodule slot in the expansion module or the programmable module See the descriptions M7 300 Expansions M7 400 Expansions or the description of the M7 400 programmable modules for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule The I O address is the sum of the base address and the offset address The registers and their meanings and the offset addresses are described below Table 13 39 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule Address Reading Writing ADC data channel 0 2 215 ADC data channel 0 2 215 ADC data channel 1 a a ADC data channel 1 20 215 z C of settings a as automatic Setting of automatic conversion conversion cycle time interrupt enable cycle time and interrupt enable OAH Indication of channel number Output of channel number a Indication of end of conversion EOC Start of analog digital conversion and voltage fault S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 46 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 8 Analog Output Function Analog Output Function The 12 bit digital value to be converted is loaded left justified into the DAC data registers of the relevant DAC channel After the data has been written into the register digital an
545. ule e Address Read cause of interrupt 03H 044 Interrupt enable register General enable of interrupt 05H Selection register rising edge Interrupt generation at rising edge of a digital input 06H Selection register falling edge Interrupt generation at falling edge of a digital input Mode register Set input delay Digital Input Function 13 26 Tables 13 22 and 13 23 give an overview of the digital input function Table 13 22 Offset Address for the Digital Input Function IF 961 DIO Offset Address 0 User data digital input function Read only Table 13 23 Assignment of the Digital Input DI Channels to the Bits IF 961 DIO 20 DI channel 0 In the range In the range 30 V to 5 V from 13 V to 30 V 27 DI channel 7 In the range In the range 30 V to 5 V from 13 V to 30 V S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Digital Output Function Tables 13 24 and 13 25 give an overview of the digital output function Table 13 24 Offset Address for the Digital Output Function IF 961 DIO Offset Address 1 User data digital output function Read write Table 13 25 Assignment of the Digital Output DO Channels to the Bits IF 961 DIO DO channel DO channel 7 Acknowledgment Register The interrupt is acknowledged in this register Tables 13 26 and 13 27 give an overview of the acknowledgment register Table 13 26 Offset Address for the Acknowl
546. ules for the slot dependent base address of the interface submodule Interrupt Request The interface submodule supplies an interrupt request IRQa You can define the assignment of the IRQa interrupt request to the relevant processor interrupt request in the BIOS setup Submodule ID The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule has the submodule ID 03 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 59 Interface Submodules 13 8 3 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications The IF 961 CT1 interface submodule receives its supply voltage from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules The current consumption given in the technical specifications is the consumption required for dimensioning the power supply that is the current consumption is referenced to 24 V in the M7 300 and to 5 V in the M7 400 6ES7961 3AA00 0ACO Counter Inputs 24 V Technical Specifications Number of counter Supply voltage Supplied from the channels 1 alternative to 5 V M7 400 Low level 30Vto 5V programmable High level 11Vto 30V modules or from the Input resistance 1 kQ M7 300 400 Input current typ 7 mA expansion modules ee Sensor voltage No Current consumption in the ae M7 300 Sensor monitoring No for dimensioning the 24 V Counter range 32 bits current supply Max counter frequency 200 kHz Current consumption in the Digital Inputs M7 400 2 i for dimensioning the 5 V Supply v
547. ules or from the Weight 0 085 kg M7 300 400 aP i Module Specific Data expansion modules Submodule ID Olp eee consumption in the Number of inputs 4 for dimensioning the 24 V Number of outputs 2 current supply Cable length shielded lt 200 m Current consumption in the M7 400 Voltages Currents Potentials for dimensioning the 5 V Nominal voltage current supply Load current supply L 24 VDC Power losses Current consumption L 150 mA Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Reverse polarity protection No Measuring principle Instantaneous value Galvanic isolation No encoding Permissible common mode Resolution incl overrange 16 bits bipolar twos range Vcm complement e Inputs to each other or Conversion time channel 35 ms to the central grounding Cycle time all channels 5 7 ms 2 8 ms point automatic conversion 1 3 ms 600 ms Voltage outputs to each 185 ms omer z s ine centra Interference Suppression Error Limits for grounding point Outputs Current outputs to each Load dependent error at Error in 19 x other or to the central l grounding point voltage output R in ohms 100 19 RL S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 54 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules Interference Suppression Error Limits for Analog Value Generation for the Outputs Inputs Resolution incl overrange 12 bits bipolar twos Interference voltage complement suppression for Cycle t
548. unctions Parameters cannotbe Schurter SP001 1013 assigned Littelfuse 217 008 e Group error display For internal fault Red LED INTF failed fuse For external fault Red LED EXTF failed load voltage S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 85 Digital Modules Changing Fuses 1 Warning This can result in injury If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module you could be injured by an electric shock Consequently always remove the front connector before you change the fuse S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 86 A5E00069467 07 Digital Modules 4 23 Digital Output Module SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A 6ES7422 5EH00 0ABO0 Characteristics The SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A has the following features 16 outputs isolated in groups of 1 2 A output current Rated load voltage 20 VAC to 120 VAC Group error display for internal faults INTF and external faults EXTF Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 87 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422 DO 16 x 20 120 VAC 2 A Process Module S Byte 0 OOnNDODOARWN pi PN EA HEA LR NSIS ta register and bus control LED control Figure 4 21 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422
549. unding for the Analog Inputs If the valid Common Mode area Vcm cannot be retained the analog inputs must be grounded To do this the ground lines of the individual analog inputs 1 and the shielding must be routed to the grounding point isolated Refer to Figure 13 12 for the grounding of the analog inputs Grounding for the Analog Outputs To do this the ground lines of the individual analog outputs 2 and the shielding must be routed to the grounding point isolated With a grounded installation of the load current supply the ground terminal of the load current supply must be connected with its own line to the grounding point 3 The following figure shows the grounding of the analog outputs Transducer Transducer 1 Analog output L Load current supply Figure 13 12 Grounding the Analog Inputs Outputs of the Interface Submodule IF 961 AlO S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 36 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 2 Connecting Measured Value Sensors to Analog Inputs Introduction Depending on the measuring type you can connect various measured value sensors to the analog inputs e Voltage sensors e Current sensors as two wire transducers four wire transducers e Resistance This section describes how to connect the measured value sensors and what to look out for when connecting the measured value senso
550. ure 11 3 Mode Selector Switch Positions of the Mode Selector Switch The positions of the mode selector switch are explained in Table 11 5 in the order in which they are arranged on the CPUs Table 11 5 Positions of the Mode Selector Switch Position of Explanations the Mode Selector Switch The CPU executes the user program The key cannot be removed in this position Write and read access to the CPU are possible The CPU executes the user program Read access only to the CPU is possible The key can be removed in this position to prevent any unauthorized persons from changing the operating mode S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 9 CPUs for M7 400 Table 11 5 Positions of the Mode Selector Switch Position of Explanations the Mode Selector Switch I O access is disabled for the user program of the CPU The user program cannot control the process The key can be removed in this position to prevent any unauthorized persons from changing the operating mode MRES Position of the keyswitch for software controlled resetting of the CPU hardware reset Activating MRES To generate a hardware reset via MRES follow the steps outlined below 1 Turn the mode selector switch to the STOP position Result The STOP LED lights up 2 Turn the mode selector switch to the MRES position and hold it there Result The STOP LED goes dark for a second lights up for a second
551. us interference by short circuiting the channels and connecting to Mana Disable the Measuring Type parameter for unused channels In this way you shorten the scan time of the module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 9 75 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges You set the measuring ranges by means of the Measuring Range parameter in STEP 7 Table 5 50 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit Method Selected Measuring Description Range U Voltage V You will find the digitized analog values in 1to5V Section 5 3 1 in the voltage measuring 0 V range 2DMU Current two wire 4 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in transmitter Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range 4DMU Current 4 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in four wire transmitter 20 mA Section 5 3 1 in the current measuring range R 4L Resistance 600 Q You will find the digitized analog values in four conductor Section 5 3 1 in the resistance measuring connection range Default Settings The default settings of the module are Voltage for the measuring method and 10 V for the measuring range You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 431 Al 8 x 13 Bit in SIEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 76 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules 5 19 Analog Input Module SM
552. us segment 1 ee ee l Terminating resistance for bus segment 1 Switch for OFF operating mode isolate bus segments from each other for example for startup Terminating resistance for bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2 SIEMENS Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment2 ES tata Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the it san SE eTO e RS Saon Te S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 10 3 RS 485 Repeater 10 3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Grounded or Ungrounded The RS 485 repeater is e grounded if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded potential e ungrounded if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential Note The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the PG OP socket of the RS 485 repeater Ground connection is effected since the MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG OP socket is connected internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater Grounded Operation of the RS 485 Repeater For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater you must jump terminals M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater Ungrounded Operation of the RS 485 Repeater For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater M and PE on the top of the RS 485 repeater must not be interconnecte
553. use non isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between the measuring sensors and chassis ground Isolated Analog Input Modules With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and chassis ground You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference Ujso can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and chassis ground By means of an equipotential bonding conductor between the Mana terminal and chassis ground make sure that Ujso does not exceed the permitted value Limited Potential Difference Ucy Only a limited potential difference Ucm common mode voltage may occur amongst the M measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded you must take different actions described below depending on the potential connection of the sensors S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 5 43 Analog Modules Abbreviations and Mnemonics Used in the Figures Below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings M Measuring line positive M Measuring line negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ucm Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the Mana m
554. using The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7 Table 5 42 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Type Enable Diagnostic interrupt Yasi V Dynamic Module Hardware interrupt VESINO Destination CPU for 1to4 Static Module interrupt Trigger for hardware Static Channel interrupt e End of scan cycle Yes no reached at input Constraint possible due to measuring range e High limit 32511 to 32512 a Sa anne e Low limit 32512 to 32511 Diagnostics Wire break y No es no Reference channel Vaio No error No Static Channel Yes no Underflow No Yes no Overflow Veslio No Short circuit to M S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 40 A5E00069467 07 Analog Modules Table 5 42 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules continued Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Type Measurement N e Measuring type Measuring range Reference temperature Temperature unit Temperature coefficient for temperature measurement with thermal resistor RTD Interference frequency suppression Smoothing Reference junction Disabled U U Voltage 4DMU Current four wire transmitter 2DMU Current two wire transmitter R 4L Resistance four conductor connection R 3L Resistance three conductor connection Static Channel RTD 4L Thermal resistor linear four conductor connect
555. ution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Notice draws your attention to particularly important information on the product handling the product or to a particular part of the documentation Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to ground and to tag circuits equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Correct Usage ZN Trademarks Note the following Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported stored set up and installed correctly and operated and maintained as recommended SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners Copyright Siemens AG 1999 2003 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offende
556. uto Sets the type and all parameters for the corresponding hard disk automatically during BIOS startup if the check box is activated Type Size These are drive specific parameters S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 11 33 CPUs for M7 400 Translation Mode In Translation Mode you have four possible settings e Auto reads the hard disk parameters and automatically sets the correct mode Normal LBA Large The Translation Mode Auto is set as the default e Normal used for hard disks with a memory capacity of lt 504 Mbytes e LBA Logical Block Addressing is used for hard disks with a memory capacity of gt 504 Mbytes e Large must be set for hard disks with a memory capacity of gt 504 Mbytes which do not support the LBA mode Block Mode Sets the block mode for DMA transfers As the hard disks in the M7 400 are not being operated in DMA mode this check box should not be activated 32 Bits Sets 32 bit access mode As this is not supported by ISA hard disk controllers this check box should not be activated Fast PIO Sets a faster Programmed Input Output mode OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Changes on the setup page are retained CANCEL Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu Deletes all changes you have made on the setup page S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 34 A5E00069467 07 11
557. uttom List Box edit Re Option Option 1 option1 o Eichi ie Am Mg a s ela y oa c Use SPACE Bar to Option 3 option3 enable disable Use Cursor Keys checkbox option Use Cursor Keys to or type in the select an option number or string SSS S555 gt 0 sss OT ea ee at 1 DEF Select and press ENTER to load default values in page Figure 11 11 User Help Setup Page S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 11 24 A5E00069467 07 CPUs for M7 400 What is the Purpose of the Setup Page This setup page contains notes that help you to use the Setup menu OK Button Activating this button returns to the Setup menu 11 4 6 Setup Page IF modules Opening the Setup Page If you have selected IF Modules and activated the OPEN button in the Setup menu Figure 11 9 on page 11 23 this setup page appears on the screen Figure 11 12 a aA R a ee e es Select Module 0 I O Base CDOO x l Type configured FF 41 detected CANCEL Config Index 0 SIG Dest 0 0 Value FF 36 Interrupt Source DMA Request A FF E4 o A FF FF B FF ES Faun B FF FF C FF FF e Shared Dest FF FF m 5E oure heee a a OT 10 0 WOS 2 iW E Figure 11 12 IF Modules Se
558. ve capacitive and inductive load Response Time The response time that is the time between the presence of the digital output values in the internal memory and reaching the specified value at the analog output is in the worst case the sum of the cycle time and the settling time The worst case arises if the analog channel is converted shortly before transfer of a new output value and converted back only after conversion of the other channels cycle time Figure 13 23 shows the response time of the analog output channels ta Response time tc Cycle time corresponds to n x conversion time n activated channels ts Settling time t4 New digitized output value available to Output value received and converted t3 Specified output value reached Figure 13 23 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 45 Interface Submodules 13 7 6 Starting Up the IF 961 AlO Interface Submodule Electrical Installation You must connect the ground terminal M and So S of the analog input output module with the ground terminal of the load power supply Use a cable with a cross section of 1 mm for this purpose Unswitched Channels You must short circuit unswitched input channels This achieves optimal noise immunity for the analog module Leave unswitched output channels open 13 7 7 Addressing Addressing The IF 961 AlO interface s
559. ve to perform one after the other to commission digital modules successfully The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later for example assign parameters to the module or install other modules or install commission etc other modules in between times Sequence of Steps Table 4 4 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module a Select the module Section 4 1 and specific module section from Section 4 8 Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 Installation section in the manual for the network programmable controller being used e 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation Assign parameters to module Section 4 3 and if necessary the specific module section as of Section 4 7 Commission configuration Section on commissioning in the manual for the programmable controller being used e 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation s If commissioning was not successful Section 4 4 diagnose configuration S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 4 5 Digital Modules 4 3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment Introduction Digital modules can have different characteristics You can set the characteristics of dome modules by means of parameter assignment Tools for Parameter Assignment You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7 You must perform parameter
560. verter ADC and the settling time of the multiplexer Cycle Time Analog digital conversion and transfer of the digitized measured values takes place upon request or by way of multiplexing parameter assignment required that is the analog input channels are converted in sequence one after the other The cycle time that is the time until an analog input value has been converted again is the sum of the conversion times of all analog input channels of the interface submodule Figure 13 22 gives a breakdown of the cycle time for an four channel analog input module Conversion time channel 0 Conversion time channel 1 Cycle time Yy Conversion time channel 3 Figure 13 22 Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 13 44 A5E00069467 07 Interface Submodules 13 7 5 Conversion Time Cycle Time Settling Time and Response Time of the Analog Output Channels Introduction This section contains the definitions and relationships of times relevant to the analog output modules Conversion Time The conversion time of the analog output channels includes the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital analog conversion Settling Time The settling time that is the time between the presence of the converted value and reaching the specified value at the analog output depends on the load Here a distinction must be made between resisti
561. xception of receive IMs e You can only use the CPU 414 4H and CPU 417 4H in stand alone operation Structure of the CR3 Figure 2 5 CR3 Rack Technical Specifications of the CR3 Rack As of STEP7 V 5 1 ServicePack 3 Dimensions W x H x D in mm 122 5 x 290 x 27 5 Weight kg Buses I O bus and communication bus S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 8 A5E00069467 07 Racks 2 6 The Racks ER1 6ES7403 1TA01 O0AA0 and ER2 6ES7403 1JA01 0AA0 Introduction The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for assembling expansion racks The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I O bus with the following restrictions e Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no interrupt lines provided e Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V Modules requiring a 24 V supply are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2 e Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power supply module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive IM EXT BATT socket There is therefore no advan
562. y Licen a x 3G EExnAlIT3 T6 seg EN 50021 1999 N mero de ensaio KEMA 03ATEX1125 X Aviso Componentes com a licen a 13G EEx nAllT3 T6 s podem ser aplicados em sistemas de automa o SIMATIC S7 400 da categoria de aparelho 3 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 38 A5E00069467 07 General Technical Specifications Reparo Os componente em quest o deve ser remetido para o local de produ o a fim de que seja realizado o reparo Apenas la deve ser efetuado o reparo Condi es especiais 1 O SIMATIC 87 400 deve ser montado em um arm rio de distribui o ou em uma caixa met lica Estes devem garantir no m nimo o tipo de prote o IP 54 Durante este trabalho dever o ser levadas em considera o as condi es locais nas quais o aparelho ser instalado Para a caixa dever ser apresentada uma declara o do fabricante para a zona 2 de acordo com EN 50021 2 Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta caixa sob as condi es operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de gt 70 C ou caso sob condi es operacionais a temperatura na ramifica o do fio possa atingir gt 80 C as carater sticas de temperatura dever o corresponder s temperaturas realmente medidas 3 As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de prote o IP e se o 7 2 de acordo com o EN 50021 4 Todos os aparelhos inclusive as chaves etc que estejam conectadas
563. y voltage range Load current supply L 20 4 V to 28 8 V Power losses of the module Reverse polarity protection No fuse Number of inputs 8 Number of outputs 8 Current consumption L Dependent on wiring Number of inputs that can be controlled simultaneously Number of outputs that can be controlled simultaneously 8 Galvanic isolation Yes optocoupler e In groups of 2 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 13 31 Interface Submodules Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status indicated Data for Selecting an Actuator Interrupt Diagnostic functions Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage e Nominal value e For signal 1 e For signal 0 Input current e At signal 1 Input delay time Input characteristic Type of input in accordance with IEC 1131 Connection of 2 wire BEROs Permissible quiescent current Permissible supply voltage 13 32 1 sum interrupt from up to 8 sources No 24 VDC from 13 V to 30 V 30 Vto 5V from 4 mA to 8 5 mA 750 us or 3 ms In accordance with IEC 1131 Part 2 Type 1 Possible under the following conditions lt 1 5 mA min 22 V Output voltage e At signal 0 e At signal 1 Output current e At signal 1 nominal value permissible range e At signal O residual current Lamp load Parallel wiring of 2 outputs Setting a digital input Switching freque
564. y current at 24 V and it only makes this voltage available at the DP interface Current consumption in the M7 400 for dimensioning the 5 V power supply Current carrying capacity of the isolated 5 V P5ext Load rating of the isolated 5V P5ext Submodule ID Power losses Dimensions W x H x D mm Weight Supplied from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules Total current consumption of the components connected to the DP interface with a maximum of 150 mA Max 90 mA max 90 mA 8Cy 2 W 18 2 x 67 x 97 0 065 kg Supply voltage Current consumption from the S7 400 bus in M7 300 DC 24 V for the dimensioning of the 24 V power supply The module does not consume any current at 24 V and it only makes this voltage available at the DP interface Current carrying capacity of the isolated 5 V P5ext Load rating of the isolated 5V P5ext Load rating of the 24 V Submodule ID Power losses Dimensions W x H x D mm Weight S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Supplied from the S7 400 or from the M7 400 programmable modules or from the M7 300 400 expansion modules Total current consumption of the components connected to the DP interface with a maximum of 150 mA Max 90 mA max 90 mA max 150 mA 8Cy 2W 18 2 x 67 x 97 0 065 kg 13 65 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specific
565. y respond on the request of a master The following distinctions are made DP master class 1 executes the user data communication with the DP slaves assigned to it DP master class 2 provides services such as reading of the input output data diagnostics global control DP slave A slave that is operated on the PROFIBUS bus system with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is called a DP slave Edge falling Signal status change from 1 to 0 Edge rising Signal status change from 0 to 1 EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory Equidistance Equidistance is a DP bus cycle that is accurate to a few us and can be configured in STEP 7 S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 Glossary 5 Glossary Equipotential bonding An electrical connection equipotential bonding conductor that brings the bodies of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approximately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages between these bodies External load memory FB FC FEPROM Memory card gt Function block gt Function In their ability to retain data in the event of a power failure even without a backup battery FEPROMs flash erasable programmable read only memories are the equivalent of the electrically erasable EEPROMS but can be erased considerably more quickly
566. yte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al8 x RTD x 16 Bit Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 AIl 8 x16 Bit Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431 Al 8 x 16 Bit Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person S7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00069467 07 xxiii Contents Tables Use in an Industrial Environment 0 0 c ccc eee Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low Voltage Directive Power Supply Modules 00 ccc ccc ence eee Pulse Shaped Interference 0 cc eens Sinusoidal Interference 0 cc eee enn ees Interference emission of electromagnet fields 000 eee Interference emission via the mains AC power supply Power Supply Modules that Comply with System Perturbation Standards Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules 0005 Mechanical Conditions 0 0 00 ccc en eee eens Ambient Mechanical Conditions for the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module in OCF ANO IY se ctaat anne ep de a ea nw a Bair e BA agg ed eae ane Ase eggs Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test 00 ccc cece eae 1 13 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7 400 00 0 c eee 1 14 Power Supply Modules for Use at up to 1

Siemens Simatic M7-400 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents